SECTION 08150
INTEGRATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Scope - Work includes but is not limited to the following:
A.
Material Included-Door assemblies including the frame, the door, the exit device, the hinge,
the magnetic hold open, the door closer and all hardware required for a labeled assembly
opening (i.e.: smoke seal, kick plates)
B. Related Work
1.
Applicable SECTION of Division 01 – General Requirements
2.
Division 6-Wood, Plastics, and Composites
3.
Section 08 11 13-Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
4.
Section 08 71 0-Door Hardware
5.
Section 08 71 13-Automatic Swing Door Operators
6.
Section 09 91 00-Painting
7.
Division 26-Electrical rough in, wiring & connectors for electro-magnetic door holders
and smoke detectors.
8.
Section 28 13 00-Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System.
1.2
References
A. ANSI minimum performance standard for steel doors must meet Level A.
B. ANSI minimum performance standard for exit devices must meet Grade 1.
C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990, ANSI A 117.1.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).
1.
UL10C - Fire tests of door assemblies (UBC7-2-97)
2.
UL305 - Panic hardware
E.
National Fire Protection Association.
1.
NFPA80 - Fire doors and windows.
2.
NFPA101 - Code for safety to life from fire in building and structures.
3.
NFPA252 - Fire tests of door assemblies.
F. CBC 2007 – California Building Code.
G. All other applicable local codes and regulations.
1.3
Submittals
A.
Shop drawings - Indicate each door and frame location; frame type, profile and installation
detail; items of finish hardware, finishes and electrical rough-in requirements in accordance
with Division 1.
B.
Samples: Submit in accordance with of applicable SECTION of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
C.
Submit only manufacturers specified or prior approved alternates.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7INTEGRATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
130-202 FHT
08 15 00 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
D. Coordination.
1.
Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving
manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware.
a.
In particular, coordinate door preparation in accordance with applicable regulatory
and trade standards specified.
b.
Review details and conditions prior to ordering material. If door hand is changed
during construction, coordinate and change hardware as necessary at no cost to
the Owner.
E. Operations and Maintenance Data.
1.
Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of applicable SECTION of
Division 01 – General Requirements.
2.
Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements and inspection
procedures related to preventative maintenance.
1.4
Quality Assurance.
A.
Installer qualifications: The installer shall be trained in the trade of hanging commercial doors
on commercial frames with commercial hardware.
B.
Opening qualifications: Frames must be installed plumb, square and level.
C.
The assembly manufacturer does not furnish screws, bolts, expansion shields or other
fasteners for attaching their products to other trades.
1.5
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A.
Deliver products to site under provisions of applicable SECTION of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
B.
Store and protect products under provisions of applicable SECTION of Division 01 – General
Requirements. Store doors in a clean, dry area. The area must be covered and protected
from the weather and construction activities. Extreme humidity can cause product damage.
C.
Furnish all plastic laminate doors with protective padding.
D.
Remove padding from between doors prior to acceptance of the project.
1.6
Warranty
A.
1.7
Provide manufacturer’s standard two-year warranty against defects in material or
workmanship covering the door, frame and all hardware shipped as an integral part of the
assembly. All other products supplied would be covered by the hardware or frame
manufacturer's warranty.
Maintenance Materials.
A.
Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special component.
B.
Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7INTEGRATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
130-202 FHT
08 15 00 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.1
Approved Manufacturers
Item
Specified Manufacturer
Approved Equals
Integrated Door
Opening Assembly
Continuous Hinges
Pivots
Power Transfers
Anti-Vandal Pulls
Auto Flush bolts
Exit Devices
Coordinators
Closers
ARC
RITE Door (by Adams Rite)
None
MAR
RIX
ARC
TRM
DCI
ARC
DCI
NOR
Markar
Rixson
Adams Rite
Trimco
Door Controls International
Adams Rite
Door Controls International
Norton
Floor Stops
Wall Stops
Overhead Stops
Protection Plates
Magnetic Holders
Thresholds
Exterior Door Sweeps
Adhesive Seals
Astragals
Alarm Contacts
TRM
TRM
RIX
ARC
RIX
PEM
ZER
ZER
PEM
GES
Trimco
Trimco
Rixson
Adams Rite
Rixson
Pemko
Zero
Zero
Pemko
G.E. Security
McKinney, Pemko, Select
None
Von Duprin
Ives, Rockwood, McKinney
Ives, McKinney
None
Ives
LCN (Match 08 71 00 brand
in approved submittal)
McKinney, Rockwood
McKinney, Rockwood, Ives
Glynn-Johnson
None
Norton, LCN
Rixson, National Guard, Zero
None
None
National Guard, Zero
None
2.2
Materials
A.
Door frames: Frames are 14-gauge cold rolled steel, or gauge as noted in the hardware sets.
Prime coated and prepared and reinforced for needed hardware applications. Provide
frames of design as indicated by the architectural details; where the details conflict with the
door hardware or 44-inch clearance requirements, advise the Architect in writing and propose
a written solution. Provide galvanized frames at exterior openings.
B.
Door assemblies: 16 gauge steel stiffened core hollow metal door with a factory installed
inset concealed vertical rod, top rod only exit device. The device is fire rated 20 minutes up to
3-hours for the opening. When open, the exit device push pad shall not extend further than
5/8 inch from the face of the door. The door shall be hung on stainless steel pin-and-barrel
continuous hinges for a 3-hour rating application. Provide raised barrel hinge where required
by the frame profile. Provide wide throw hinges where required to clear frame, wall or other
conditions and allow full door swing; provide minimum width required. All doors will be
reinforced with 14 gauge steel reinforcements for door closer and electromagnetic holder
mountings. Doors will be a minimum of 1-3/4 inches thick. There shall be no seams or spot
welds visible on the door faces. Door assemblies will meet or exceed ANSI minimum
performance standards, ADA requirements, and NFPA fire codes. Provide of design and with
glass lites as indicated by the architectural drawings. Provide galvanized frames at exterior
openings.
C.
Clear Opening: Provide only door, frame and hardware integrated assemblies that provide 44inch clear opening when measured parallel to the frame head from any projecting hardware
while the door leaf is at the 90° position to the frame stop at the strike jamb or, at pairs, to the
closed leading edge of the other leaf.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7INTEGRATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
130-202 FHT
08 15 00 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
D.
Provide all electronic door hardware items with quick-connect Molex-type connectors
compatible with all other electronic door hardware connectors on the project.
E.
Provide levers in stainless steel finish with anti-microbial (Agion) coating.
F.
Where the specified floor or wall stop cannot be used, omit the specified stop and provide a
Rixson 1ADJ-Series (or approved equal) concealed overhead stop in 630 finish. Provide
closer drop plates and special closer templating as required to avoid conflict with the
overhead stop.
G.
At outswing lockable or exit-only doors, provideProvide welded end pins (WEP) for continuous
hinges.
H.
At doors with plastic laminate faces, revise continuous hinges to hinge guard model with
same as specified options, and add EG-308-AS edge guards.
HI.
Provide all thresholds with ¼-20 stainless steel machines screws and anchors.
J.
Door Hardware: Provide hardware with integrated door assembly as noted in hardware sets
below, referenced to the Door Schedule.
HW-6C
Stair
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have:
1
1
Continuous Transfer Hinge
Electric Panic Device
HG-305-MB-CE8DEL8-ETAP CUT:ADB CHS-1 630
MAR
D3676-M1 x 619 END CAPS
630
ARC
x 630 CLADDING x D3081-35 (FSE)
24VDC x ANTI-MICROBIAL COATING
1
Closer
7500DA
689
NOR
1
Kick Plate
0.050” THICK 10” HIGH
630
ARC
1
Edge Guard
EG-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630
MAR
1
Floor Stop
1214
626
TRM
1
Threshold
173
627
PEM
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
628
ZER
1
Set Seals
188S488S_ MITRED
TBD
ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBDGES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
WIRING AND CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
LOW VOLTAGE WIRING AND CARD READER BY SECTION 28 13 00.
KEY CYLINDER BY SECTION 08 71 00.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7INTEGRATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
130-202 FHT
08 15 00 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-10A
Corridor
Each [MHO] Integrated Same Swing Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
2
2
90-Min.
Continuous Hinges
Exit Devices
HG-305-MB CHS-1
630
D3681 x 619 END CAPS x 630
630
CLADDING x ANTI-MICROBIAL COATING
2
Closers
PR7500
689
2
Magnetic Holders
990 x 900-SERIES EXT. AS REQUIRED
689
2
Edge Guards
EG-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630
1
Astragal Seal
S771_
TBD
1
Set Seals
188S488S_ MITRED
TBD
FIELD PAINT ASTRAGAL TO MATCH DOORS.
POWER, WIRING, CONDUIT, AND FIRE ALARM CONNECTION BY DIVISION 26.
MAR
ARC
NOR
RIX
MAR
PEM
ZER
HW-10B
Corridor
Each [ADO] Integrated Same Swing Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
2
1
60-Min.
Continuous Transfer Hinges
Electric Exit Device
HG-305-MB-CE8DEL8-ETAP CHS-1
630
MAR
D3676-LR-MOTORIZEDSE x 619 END CAPS 630
ARC
x 630 CLADDING x ANTI-MICROBIAL COATING
1
Electric Exit Device
D3676-LR-MOTORIZEDSE x 619 END CAPS 630
ARC
x 630 CLADDING x D3081-35 x
ANTI-MICROBIAL COATING
1
Power Supply
PS-LR-MOTORIZEDSE
--ARC
2
Armor Plates
0.050” THICK TO UNDERSIDE OF PANIC
630
ARC
2
Edge Guards
EG-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630
MAR
2
Overhead Stops
1ADJ-SERIES
630
RIX
1
Set Astragals
351C x 351CS
628
PEM
1
Set Seals
188S488S_ MITRED
TBD
ZER
WIRING, CONDUIT, AND FIRE ALARM CONNECTION BY DIVISION 26.
POWER TRANSFERS SHARED BY ELECTRIC PANICS AND RE-ACTIVATION SENSORS
(PROVIDED BY SECTION 08 71 13).
KEY CYLINDER BY SECTION 08 71 00.
AUTO DOOR OPERATOR AND CONTROLS BY SECTION 08 71 13.
HW-10C
THIS SET NOT USED.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7INTEGRATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
130-202 FHT
08 15 00 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-10D
Corridor
Each [MHO] Integrated Double Egress Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
2
2
60-Min.
Continuous Hinges
Exit Devices
HG-305-MB CHS-1
630
D3676EO x 619 END CAPS x 630
630
CLADDING x ANTI-MICROBIAL COATING
2
Pocket Closers
7706EP-STP
689
2
Magnetic Holders
997 x 900-SERIES EXT. AS REQUIRED
689
12 Edge Guards
EG-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630
1
Edge Guard/Astragal
EG-T308-AS CUT:HDWE
630
1
Astragal Seal
188S488S_
TBD
1
Adhesive Astragal
S771_
TBD
1
Set Seals
188S488S_ MITRED
TBD
FIELD PAINT ASTRAGAL TO MATCH DOORS.
POWER, WIRING, CONDUIT, AND FIRE ALARM CONNECTION BY DIVISION 26.
MAR
ARC
NOR
RIX
MAR
MAR
ZER
PEM
ZER
HW-10E
Corridor
Each [ADO] Integrated Double Egress Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
2
2
60-Min.
Continuous Transfer Hinges
Electric Exit Devices
FM-300-MB-CE8DEL8-ETAP CHS-1
630
MAR
D3676EO-LR-MOTORIZEDSE x 619 END CAPS630 ARC
x 630 CLADDING x ANTI-MICROBIAL COATING
1
Power Supply
PS-LR-MOTORIZEDSE
--ARC
2
Armor Plates
0.050” THICK TO UNDERSIDE OF PANIC
630
ARC
2
Overhead Stops
1ADJ-SERIES
626
TRM
12 Edge Guards
EG-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630
MAR
1
Edge Guard/Astragal
EG-T308-AS CUT:HDWE
630
MAR
1
Adhesive Astragal Seal
188S488S_
TBD
ZER
1
Adhesive Astragal
S771_
TBD
PEM
1
Set Seals
188S488S_ MITRED
TBD
ZER
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBDES
120VAC POWER, WIRING, AND CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIRE ALARM CONNECTION BY DIVISION 28.
POWER TRANSFERS SHARED BY ELECTRIC PANICS AND RE-ACTIVATION SENSORS
(PROVIDED BY SECTION 08 71 13).
AUTO DOOR OPERATOR AND CONTROLS BY SECTION 08 71 13.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7INTEGRATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
130-202 FHT
08 15 00 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-13A
Stair, Exit Passageway
Each [DPS] Integrated Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
1
1
1
20-Min.
Continuous Hinge
Anti-Vandal Pull
Panic Device
FM-300-MB CHS-1
630
MAR
1096HASP
630
TRM
D3375 x 619 END CAPS
630
ARC
x 630 CLADDING x CYL. ONLY x STRIKE BOX
x ANTI-MICROBIAL COATING
1
Closer
PR7500DA
689
NOR
1
Kick Plate
0.050” THICK 10” HIGH
630
ARC
1
Overhead Stop
1ADJ-SERIES
630
RIX
1
Threshold
2005AT x SINGLE MITER RETURNS
627
PEM
1
Door Sweep
8194AA
628
ZER
1
Head Seal
2891AS x CSK SCREWS
628
PEM
2
Jamb Seals
290AS
628
PEM
1
Drip
346C 4” GDW
628
PEM
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBDGES
ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
KEY CYLINDER BY SECTION 08 71 00.
2.3
Finishes
A.
Finish Symbols
BHMA
652
627
630
689
TBD
US
US26D
US27
US32D
N/A
DESCRIPTION OF FINISH
Satin chrome plated (steel)
Milled aluminum
Satin stainless steel
Aluminum painted
Architect’s selection
B.
Door Face Finish per Schedule:
a. Factory-painted in color as selected by the Architect.
b. Wood grain plastic laminate in type as selected by the Architect.
C.
Anti-microbial Finish: Provide anti-microbial coating on all hand-operated parts (lever
and pull handle trim, push bar mechanism) to prevent the spread of bacterial disease.
This coating shall be warranted for the lifetime of the hardware.
D.
All exposed hardware items must be satin stainless steel or match satin stainless steel
color where stainless steel is not available (except levers must be stainless steel).
Black or other non-matching colors will not be accepted.
E.
Provide only lever handles of stainless steel material.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7INTEGRATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
130-202 FHT
08 15 00 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.4
Fabrication
A.
Unless amended by drawings or specifications, the door must be constructed to
manufacturer’s specifications and must meet all applicable code requirements.
B.
After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections are dressed, filled, and
sanded as required in order to make all faces and vertical edges smooth, and level.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
Examination
A.
The contractor is responsible for notification of any wall condition or building structure
that would prevent the proper execution of the installation of products produced in
accordance with approved shop drawings.
B.
Do not fabricate any product until receipt of approved shop drawings.
C.
The exit device will be installed at the factory. All other hardware products will be field
installed by others. The assembly will be prepared with all trim holes where applicable.
D.
The assembly will be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped for all mortise hardware
and reinforced for all surface hardware.
E.
Frames must be set absolutely plumb, square and level.
F.
All glazing and glazing gasketing is by others.
G.
It is the contractor’s responsibility to note short or damaged deliveries on the bill of
lading at the time of delivery.
H.
The fire label is a manufacturer’s certification only. Proper installation and wall
construction are required.
I.
Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices.
J.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
Installation
A.
Install doors in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturers’ installation
instructions.
1.
2.
Doors should be hung to obtain free swinging operation without binding, sticking,
or sagging. Proper clearances must be maintained between the door and the
frame.
After the door is properly installed, all hardware is adjusted for correct swinging,
closing and latching.
B.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of
SDI, ANSI/NFPA 80, WIC, and BHMA, HMMA/NAAMM. Select applicable standard
based on door function, type and regulatory criteria.
C.
Install hardware in accordance with NFPA 80 in fire labeled doors.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7INTEGRATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
130-202 FHT
08 15 00 - 8
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.3
Field Quality Control
A.
3.4
Install Hardware Using Templates Provided by Hardware Item Manufacturer. The
installation should be checked by a qualified hardware consultant.
Adjusting
A.
At completion of project the assembly as well as all hardware and frame components
shall be left clean and free of disfigurements. Final adjustment of all door, frame and
hardware products to meet all applicable standards and codes shall be completed. Any
defective material will be repaired or replaced.
B.
Adjust Closer Delay and Operating Speeds to Comply With Requirements of ANSI
A117.1.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7INTEGRATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
130-202 FHT
08 15 00 - 9
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.00
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Door hardware.
B.
Thresholds, weather seals and smoke seals.
C.
Electrified door hardware.
D.
Scope of Work in this Section: Provide door hardware necessary to complete work.
Hardware items not specifically specified or identified are to be provided of type and
quality suitable to the service required and comparable to other hardware, and at no
additional cost to Owner.
WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A.
Provide templates to:
1.
2.
3.
1.02
1.03
Section 08 11 13 for door and frame preparation.
Section 08 14 16 for door preparation.
Section 08 41 13 for door and frame preparation.
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 08 11 13-Hollow metal doors and frames.
B.
Section 08 15 00-Integrated door assemblies.
C.
Section 08 14 16-Flush wood doors.
D.
Section 08 41 13-Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.
E.
Section 08 42 43-Intensive care unit/critical care unit (ICU/CCU) entrances.
F.
Section 08 71 13-Automatic swing door operators.
G.
Division 26-Electrical.
H.
Section 28 13 00-Access control and alarm monitoring system.
REFERENCES
A.
Steel Door Institute (SDI) standards as specified.
B.
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) as specified.
C.
California Building Code.
D.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990 criteria as specified.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.04
1.05
1.06
E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. standards as specified.
F.
National Fire Protection (NFPA) standards as specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Hardware Supplier: Provide hardware from company specializing in supplying institutional
door hardware with five years experience and approved by specified hardware
manufacturers as a factory direct supplier.
B.
Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or
equivalent to prepare submittal required by this section.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to UBC "Means of Egress" requirements.
B.
Conform to UBC Standard 7-2 / UL10C requirements applicable to positive pressure fire
rated doors and frames. Provide all necessary hardware for complete fire labeled opening
including ball-bearing hinges, latching hardware, non-flaming fluid closers, smoke seals
and intumescent hot seals.
C.
Conform to SFM Standard 43.7 requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames.
D.
Conform to applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990
regarding accessibility requirements for door and entrance hardware.
E.
Conform to applicable requirements of California Building Code regarding exiting and
accessibility requirements for door and entrance hardware.
F.
All hardware shall meet the requirements of CBC Sections 1133B.2.1, 1133B.2.5.1 and
1003.3.1.8.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit schedule and product data under provisions of applicable SECTION of Division 01
– General Requirements.
B.
Provide five (5) copies of vertical format hardware schedule showing each application
including door index, headings, hardware sets, door number and location, door and frame
size and material, door and hardware handing, degrees of opening, quantity required, part
numbers and finish of each item.
1.
2.
Projects with multiple buildings and/or multiple floor levels must be submitted so
each building and/or floor level is not mixed with another starting with Building A,
st
1 floor etc.
Architect’s review of such schedule does not relieve the Contractor of providing
hardware required for the work, whether or not such hardware was inadvertently
omitted from this Section.
C.
Accompanying the schedules, provide two (2) manufacturer’s brochures of each item
scheduled, indicating function, finish, dimensions, and related features. No hardware
schedule will be accepted for review without submission of such brochure package.
D.
Submit manufacturer’s certificate of warranty with submittal; otherwise material will be
rejected.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.07
E.
When alternate manufacturers are proposed by contractor, provide two (2) brochures of
proposed items two weeks prior of bid date.
F.
Submit only manufacturers specified as approved or alternate.
G.
Provide samples indicating hardware design and finish when required by Architect.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving
manufacturers of any internal reinforcement for door hardware.
In particular, coordinate door preparation in accordance with applicable regulatory and
trade standards specified.
Review details and conditions prior to ordering hardware. When a door hand is changed
during construction, coordinate and change hardware as necessary at no cost to the
Owner.
1.08
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of applicable SECTION of Division 01 –
General Requirements.
A.
1.09
1.10
1.11
Include data on operating hardware. Lubrication requirements and inspection procedures
related to preventive maintenance.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site under provisions of applicable SECTION of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
B.
Store and protect products under provisions of applicable SECTION of Division 01 –
General Requirements.
C.
Package hardware items individually; label and identify packages with door opening code
to match hardware schedule.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware
component.
B.
Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component
manufacturer.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide two year guarantee against defects on hardware, including electrical components,
five years warranty for cylindrical locks, mortise locks and exit devices and ten year
warranty for surface, floor concealed closers and continuous hinges.
B.
Submit guarantee on form provided in Documents.
C.
Submit manufacturer’s certificate of warranty with submittal, otherwise material will be
rejected.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR HARDWARE CRITERIA
A.
2.2
Manufacturers
Item
Manufacturer
Approved Alternates
Hinges:
Continuous Hinges:
Push/Pull Plates:
Tube Pulls:
Metal Door Flush Bolts:
Wood Door Flush Bolts:
Locks and Latchsets:
Cylinders:
Occupancy Indicators:
(MCK)-McKinney
(MAR)-Markar
(TRM)-Trimco
(ROC)-Rockwood
(DCI)-Door Controls
(DCI)-Door Controls
(BES)-Best Access Systems
(BES)-Best “PKS”
(TIC)-Tice
Lock Guards:
Exit Devices:
Electric Strikes:
Coordinators:
Closers:
Magnetic Holders
Floor & Wall Stops
Overhead Stops:
Protection Plates:
Lock Protector Bars:
Fastener Seals:
Exterior Door Sweeps:
Automatic Door Bottoms:
Adhesive Seals:
Rated Overlapping
Astragals
Thresholds:
Threshold Assemblies:
Key Switches & Pushbuttons:
Coat Hooks:
Silencers:
Knox Boxes:
Recessed Key Cabinet:
Alarm Contacts:
Power Supplies:
(D-J)-Don-Jo
(VON)-Von Duprin
(FAS)-Folger Adam
(DCI)-Door Controls
(NOR)-Norton
(RIX)-Rixson
(TRM)-Trimco
(RIX)-Rixson
(TRM)-Trimco
(ROC)-Rockwood
(PEM)-Pemko
(ZER)-Zero
(ZER)-Zero
(ZER)-Zero
(PEM)-Pemko
Stanley, Bommer, Hager
Select, Pemko, McKinney
Ives, Rockwood
Forms+Surfaces, Tice, Trimco
Ives
None
Corbin Russwin
None
Corbin Russwin (if Corbin
Russwin locks are furnished)
Ives
None
Von Duprin
Ives
LCN 4041
Norton, LCN
McKinney, Rockwood
Glynn-Johnson
Ives, Rockwood
None
Zero, National Guard
Or Equal
None
None
Reese
(PEM)-Pemko
(ZER)-Zero
(SDC)-Sec. Dr Controls
(TRM)-Trimco
(TRM)-Trimco
(KNX)- Knox
(LUN)-Lund
(GES)-G.E. Security
(SDC)-Sec. Dr. Controls
Zero, National Guard
None
Locknetics, Securitron
None
Ives, Rockwood
None
None
None
Securitron, Locknetics
HINGES
A.
Unless noted otherwise, provide steel hinges, with finish as shown in schedule. Provide
non-ferrous hinges at exterior doors.
B.
Provide hinges in accordance with following schedule:
1.
2.
3.
Doors up to 4 feet high: 2 hinges.
Doors 4 feet to 7 feet 5 inches high: 3 hinges minimum.
Doors greater than 7 feet 5 inches high: 4 hinges.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
4.
5.
6.
C.
Unless otherwise noted or required, provide full mortise three-knuckle hinges, with nonrising loose pins and concealed ball bearings.
D.
Provide set screw (NRP) type at outswing doors to prevent pin removal when door is in
closed position.
E.
Where necessary to maintain door clearance at jamb trim, frame conditions, door reveals
and similar conditions, provide wide throw hinges as approved by the Architect.
F.
Continuous Hinges
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
2.3
Doors up to 3 feet wide, standard weight: 4-1/2" x 4" hinges.
Doors 3'6" wide, standard weight: 5" x 4-1/2".
Doors 4'0" wide, heavy weight: 5" x 4-1/2".
Provide heavy-weight hinges where specified.
At doors weighing 150 lbs. or more, furnish 5” high hinges.
To be barrel-type of 14 gauge 304 stainless steel, 14 gauge 1012 cold-rolled steel
or 6063-T5 aluminum material with 0.25" diameter stainless steel Teflon-coated
pin. Gear types are prohibited.
Hinge guard models to be furnished with Adjusta-screw fasteners.
Provide with welded ends at outswing doors.
Where necessary to maintain door clearance at jamb trim, frame conditions, door
reveals and similar conditions, provide wide throw hinges as approved by the
Architect.
Provide with factory cut-outs for mortise hardware that must penetrate the hinge
(e.g. concealed auto door bottoms, concealed power transfer, etc.) where they
occur.
Provide mortar guard frame box by hinge manufacturer for electric hinges where not
provided by frame manufacturer.
KEYING
A.
Provide Best PKS 150 7-pin interchangeable core cylinders in the “B2” keyway where the
key blanks are protected by a utility patent and factory key distribution contracts.
B.
Stamp master keys and grand master keys with a registry number. Do not stamp
"Master" or letter "M".
C.
Stamp individual room keys with plain identification number. Do not indicate key cut.
D.
Cut keys and stamp "DO NOT DUPLICATE".
E.
Locksets and cylinders to be be furnished with temporary brass construction cores.
Provide 15 construction masterkeys and 2 construction control keys.
F.
Contractor will meet with the Owner's Representative and Architect to establish the keying
schedule and to provide the correct master, pass and change key groups to properly
operate locking devices.
G.
Provide bitting list record and registration of system.
H.
Locksets and cylinders to be great-grandmasterkeyed into the existing key system.
Supply four change keys per cylinder and six master keys for each master.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
I.
Contractor will be responsible for completion of keying schedule and ordering construction
and permanent keys.
J.
Permanent cores and keys shall be delivered directly from cylinder manufacturer to the
Owner’s Representative via registered means.
K.
Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall remove the construction cores and
install the permanent cores in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor shall return the
construction cores for credit.
L.
Cylinder collars shall be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be
free spinning.
M.
Provide key control system including envelops, labels, tags with self-locking key clips,
receipt forms, 3 way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and
standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for
150% of the number of locks require for the project.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Provide complete cross index system set up by key control manufacturer and
place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key
schedule.
Provide hinge-panel type cabinet, for wall mounting.
Provide with pushbutton security lock on cabinet door.
LOCKSETS, LATCHSET AND STRIKES
A.
Unless noted otherwise in schedule, locksets, latchsets, cylinders and component parts
shall be the products of single manufacturer.
B.
Provide strikes at locks with curved lip strike of sufficient length to protect trim and jamb.
Each strike will include wrought strike box (similar to Tice Industries No. 1502). At
outswing doors with overlapping astragals, provide a flat strike with 7/8” lip-to-center
dimension.
C.
Mortise Locks:
1.
2.
Lock Body shall include quick reversibility mechanism without removing lock body
cover.
Provide cast or forged levers only. Roses, where specified, shall be wrought.
Escutcheons, where specified, shall be cast or forged.
D.
Unless noted otherwise, provide 2-3/4 inch backset.
E.
Lock Throw: Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire
openings.
F.
Accurate H7804 Holdback Deadlatches: Provide with special faceplate stamped with
holdback instructions.
G.
Auto Flush Bolts: Minimum ½” throw latch bolts, fully automatic extending into top strike
and dust proof strike at sill. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7’0” in
height. Where auto flush bolts are specified as top bolts only with bottom fire bolt at wood
pairs rated above 20-minutes, provide bottom auto flush bolt and dust proof strike (DCI 82
or approved equal) in lieu of specified bottom fire bolt.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.5
2.6
PANIC EXIT DEVICES
A.
Where specified, provide panic exit device with required UL labels. Where panic device is
required on fire rated doors, provide UL label with supplementary marking on door and
hardware indicating compliant fire exit hardware.
B.
Provide modern push-pad type, reversible exit devices. Provide exit device
manufacturer’s shims as required to clear glass lite frames.
C.
Push-pad shall be mounted at a height of not less than 30 inches (762mm) nor more than
44 inches (1118mm) above floor. The unlatching force shall not exceed 15 pounds
(66.72N) when applied in the direction of travel per CBC 1133B.2.5.
D.
Exit Devices shall comply with UBC standard 10-4 and CBC 1003.3.1.9.
E.
Provide exit devices levers of design to match lock levers. Provide stainless steel levers
only.
DOOR CLOSERS
A.
Surface mounted closers to be full rack and pinion type with cast shell.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.7
2.8
Provide drop brackets, mortise shoes, and long arms as required.
Provide non-handed door closers with multi-sized springs, with separate
adjustable valves for latch, sweep speed, and backcheck.
Template and adjust closers per manufacturer's recommendations and to meet
accessibility requirements. When used in conjunction with an overhead stop,
provide special templates and brackets as required.
Where the specified regular arm closer must swing 180° and LCN 4041-Series
closers are being furnished, provide a 4041-T (Top Jamb) closer in lieu of the
regular arm closer.
Where used in conjunction with an overhead stop, provide special template,
special arms, backplate, and other items as needed to allow the closer to be
installed without conflicting with the overhead stop.
Where LCN 4041SE electro-mechanical closer-holders are provided in lieu of the
specified Norton 7700PT, provide with concealed overhead stops (less spring)
and all needed brackets and drop plates to coordinate installation.
MAGNETIC HOLDERS
A.
Provide magnetic holders with tri-volts coils only.
B.
Provide assemblies consisting of an armature contact plate with adjustable mounting
pivot.
C.
Provide model as required to ensure door holds open parallel to wall.
D.
Use Rixson 900 series extensions as necessary to align door at parallel with wall.
PROTECTIVE PLATES AND EDGE GUARDS
A.
Provide stainless steel kick or armor plates as scheduled, 18 gauge, 10 inches high, 2
inches less than door width on single doors, 1 inch less than door width on pair, 40 inches
high (revise height as needed so that top of armor plate is level with top of non-full-height
edge guard) on armor plates, with all edges beveled.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.9
B.
Provide stainless steel mop plates as scheduled, 18 gauge, 4 inches high, 1 inch less
than door width, with all edges beveled.
C.
Mortise edge guards:
1. Height to underside of mortise lock armor front. At doors without mortise locks,
provide same as for doors with mortise locks.
2. Provide with cut-outs for mortised door hardware.
3. Provide fasteners into door edge only, not to door face.
4. Provide in mortise configuration.
5. Provide with bevel to match door bevel.
6. Provide for exact door thickness.
7. Forward edge guards to wood door manufacturer for factory-installation.
PUSH/PULL PLATES
A.
2.10
2.11
Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special concealed fastener system for
installation; through-bolted for matched pairs, but not for single units.
STOPS
A.
Provide a floor, wall, or overhead stop at every door.
B.
Where specified floor or wall stop would present a pedestrian hazard or cannot be used,
furnish Rixson model overhead stop (concealed except at fire-rated wood doors) or
provide closer with integral stop.
SILENCERS
A.
Provide silencers at hollow metal or wood door frames that are without seals in quantities
as follows:
1.
2.
2.12
Single Doors:
Pairs:
3 silencers
2 silencers
SEALS
A.
Provide seals complete with retainers, fasteners and trim.
B.
Provide UL listed seals at rated openings.
C.
Provide UL listed intumescent hot seal at fire rated wood doors when doors are not being
furnish with intumescent hot seal.
D.
Unless noted otherwise, furnish fastener-applied silicone or neoprene seals at door jamb
and head conditions. Use of vinyl seal prohibited.
E.
Where flat bar head seals are specified to accommodate hardware mounted to the
underside of the frame stop, furnish factory-cut as required for frame stops narrower than
the standard seal width.
F.
Where specified, furnish solid neoprene seals complying with MilSpec R6855, Class II,
Grade 40.
G.
Where concealed automatic door bottoms are specified, provide a type compatible with
the construction and rating of the door, regardless of the type specified.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 8
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
THRESHOLDS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated furnish standard metal threshold unit of type, size
and profile as shown or scheduled. Where required by fire code, furnish appropriate
model thresholds at openings where combustible floor material extends through the door
opening. Provide threshold as indicated in details where the details conform more to the
as-built conditions than does the scheduled threshold. Provide ¼-20 stainless steel
fasteners with anchors.
B.
Thresholds must comply with the requirements of ADA and ANSI-117.1 and CBC section
1133B.2.4.1.
FINISHES
A.
Finishes are identified in Schedule at end of this Section.
B.
Where finish not shown, match finish of lockset.
C.
Provide seals in color as selected by the Architect.
D.
Provide fasteners matching in finish, base material and color.
E.
Provide anti-microbial lifetime coating on lever handles, panic bars, hospital latch pulls,
door pulls and push/pull plates.
FASTENERS
A.
Fasteners: Provide hardware manufacture to conform to publish templates, generally
prepared for machine screws installation.
B.
Install hardware with manufacturer supplied screws for each item.
C.
Provide screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws
except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to
match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such
other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive
painted finish.
D.
Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed,
except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed
fasteners.
E.
Provide machine screws and anchors for all thresholds to be installed over concrete floor
material.
F.
Provide wood screws for mortise edge guards.
ELECTRONIC HARDWARE CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide all electronic door hardware items with quick-connect Molex-type connectors
compatible with all other electronic door hardware connectors on the project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 9
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.2
3.3
3.4
A.
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated
on shop drawings, instructed by the manufacturer.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
INSTALLATION
A.
A QUALIFIED MECHANIC skilled in the application of institutional grade builder’s
hardware shall install hardware.
B.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI,
ANSI/NFPA 80, AWI, and BHMA. Select applicable standard based on door function,
type and regulatory criteria.
C.
Install hardware in accordance with NFPA 80 in fire labeled doors.
D.
Where door is designated as receiving new hardware, package and label hardware by
type and function, and deliver to Owner.
E.
Predrill pilot holes in wood for screws. Drill and tap for surface mounted hardware on
metal. Set hinge leaf snug and flat in mortises, turn screws to flat seat [do not drive].
F.
Mount surface closers on side of door away from corridor, inside rooms or in stairs.
Install regular or parallel rigid arm closers as required.
G.
Provide ADEQUATE BACKING in stud partitions for the attachment of all respective finish
hardware.
H.
Floor mounted door stops are to be installed at maximum of four inches from the face of
the wall or partition.
I.
Install thresholds in full bed of sealant at front and side edges.
INSTALL HARDWARE USING TEMPLATES PROVIDED BY HARDWARE ITEM
MANUFACTURER
A.
Prior to finishing door, fit hardware to door, utilizing fasteners and templates as specified.
B.
Remove hardware, carefully label and store. Where door exists and is designated to
receive new finish, remove existing hardware.
C.
Re-install after door finish is complete
UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE OR SHOWN ON DRAWINGS, MOUNT HARDWARE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA:
A.
Latchset and Lockset handle: 38 inches above finish floor. Verify manufacturer's
template with door design.
B.
Glass locks: 40 inches above finish floor to center line. Verify manufacturer's template
with door design.
C.
Auxiliary Locks: 40 inches to center line.
D.
Panic Devices: 40 inches above floor; at storefront doors, aligned with center muntin on
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 10
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
adjacent window wall. Verify manufacturer's template with door design.
3.5
3.6
3.7
E.
Push and Pull Plates: 44 inches to center line.
F.
Door Pulls: 40 inches above finish floor to center line.
ADJUST CLOSER OPERATING EFFORT CONFORM TO CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE
SECTION 1133B.2.5
A.
Exterior and Interior Doors: 5.0 pounds force.
B.
Fire Rated Doors: Verify with AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction) not to exceed 15.0
pounds force.
ADJUST CLOSER DELAY AND OPERATING SPEEDS TO COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS
OF CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE AND THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT
ARCHITECTURAL GUIDELINES, ARTICLE 4.13.10
A.
The sweep period of the door closers shall be adjusted so that from an open position of
70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the
latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
B.
Closer Certification: Provide written certification, signed by door closer representative,
stating closers were inspected and installed in accordance with specified opening force
and delay requirements.
CLEAN AND ADJUST
A.
At completion, all hardware shall be left clean and free from disfigurement. Contractor
shall make a final adjustment to all door closers and other items of hardware. Where
hardware is found defective, repair, replace, or otherwise correct as directed.
B.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Adjust hardware so that moving parts operate freely,
without bind, or excessive play. Hardware shall be free of paint, corrosion, or damage of
any kind.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 11
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.8
FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HW-1
Stair
Each [DPS] Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
90-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
FM-300-MB CHS-1 CUT:ADB
1
Latchset
45H0N 14H
1
Closer
7500DA SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
630
630AM
689
630
626
628
TBD
TBD
MAR
BES
NOR
TRM
TRM
ZER
ZER
GES
HW-1A
THIS SET NOT USED.
HW-1B
Staff Lounge
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
20-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
FM-300-MB CUT:ADB CHS-1
1
Latchset
45H0N 14H
1
Closer
7500DA SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Mop Plate
KM050 4” x 1” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
630
630AM
689
630
630
626
628
TBD
MAR
BES
NOR
TRM
TRM
TRM
ZER
ZER
HW-1B.1
Staff Lounge
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
NR
1
Continuous Hinge
FM-300-MB CUT:ADB CHS-1
1
Push/Pull Plate Set
1895-4B B4E-HEAVY x TRIMGUARD
1
Closer
7500-H SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Mop Plate
KM050 4” x 1” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 12
630
630
689
630
630
626
628
TBD
MAR
TRM
NOR
TRM
TRM
TRM
ZER
ZER
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-1C
THIS SET NOT USED.
HW-1D
IV and Chemo Prep
Each [ADO] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
1
1
1
1
NR
Continuous Hinge
Push/Pull Plate
Push Plate
Hospital Pull
HG-305-MB-CE8D-ETAP CUT:ADB CHS-1
630 MAR
1895-4B.CUST x 1135 PULL x TRIMGUARD
630 TRM
1001 8” x 16” x TRIMGUARD
630 TRM
1135 x MTG. “E” LESS FINISH WASHER
630 TRM
X TRIMGUARD
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Mortised Edge Guard
302B
630 ROC
1
Overhead Stop
1ADJ-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
POWER TRANSFER FOR AUTO DOOR RE-ACTIVATION SENSOR (SEE SECTION 08 71 13).
AUTO DOOR OPERATOR AND CONTROLS BY SECTION 08 71 13.
120VAC POWER, WIRING, AND CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
HW-1E
Anteroom
Each [ADO] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
1
1
1
1
NR
Continuous Hinge
Push/Pull Plate
Push Plate
Hospital Pull
HG-305-MB-CE8D-ETAP CUT:ADB CHS-1
630 MAR
1895-4B.CUST x 1135 PULL x TRIMGUARD
630 TRM
1001 8” x 16” x TRIMGUARD
630 TRM
1135 x MTG. “E” LESS FINISH WASHER
630 TRM
X TRIMGUARD
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Mortised Edge Guard
302B
630 ROC
1
Overhead Stop
1ADJ-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
POWER TRANSFER FOR AUTO DOOR RE-ACTIVATION SENSOR (SEE SECTION 08 71 13).
AUTO DOOR OPERATOR AND CONTROLS BY SECTION 08 71 13.
120VAC POWER, WIRING, AND CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 13
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-2
Staff Toilet
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
NR/Rated
3
Hinges
TA314
1
Key Override Privacy Lock
45H7T 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Occupancy Indicator
TYPE C x SECURITY SPINDLE
1
Closer
7500DA SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Mop Plate
KM050 4” x 1” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Wall Stop
1270CX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
1
Coat Hook
3071-1
STONE THRESHOLD BY OTHERS.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
630
630AM
626
619
689
630
630
626
TBD
630
MCK
BES
BES
TIC
NOR
TRM
TRM
TRM
ZER
TRM
HW-3
Individual Office
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
NR/Rated
3
Hinges
TA714
1
Office Lock
45H7TA 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500-H SNB
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Threshold
173A
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
1
Coat Hook
3071-1
AT RATED DOORS, OMIT “-H” FROM CLOSER.
OMIT COAT HOOK AT DOORS WITH HALF GLASS LITES.
652
630AM
626
689
626
627
628
TBD
630
MCK
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
PEM
ZER
ZER
TRM
HW-3A
Individual Office
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
NR
3
Hinges
TA786
1
Office Lock
45H7TA 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500 x 7786 x 9023JWG SNB
1
Overhead Stop & Holder
2-SERIES
1
Threshold
173A
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
1
Coat Hook
3071-1
OMIT COAT HOOK AT DOORS WITH HALF GLASS LITES.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 14
652
630AM
626
689
630
627
628
TBD
630
MCK
BES
BES
NOR
RIX
PEM
ZER
ZER
TRM
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-4
Shell Space, Storage
Each Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
45-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
FM-300-MB CHS-1
1
Utility Lock
45H7C 14H
2
Permanent Cores
1CB7
1
Closer
7500DA SNB
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
630
630AM
626
689
630
626
TBD
MAR
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
TRM
ZER
HW-4A
Soiled Hold, Cylinder Storage
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB CHS-1
1
Utility Lock
45H7C 14H
2
Permanent Cores
1CB7
1
Closer (@ Inswing Doors)
7500DA SNB
1
Closer (@ Outswing Doors) PR7500DA SNB
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Mortised Edge Guard
302B
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
630
630AM
626
689
689
630
630
626
TBD
MAR
BES
BES
NOR
NOR
TRM
ROC
TRM
ZER
HW-4B
Work Room, Microbiology
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB CHS-1 CUT:ADB
1
Classroom Lock
45H7R 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer (@ Inswing Doors)
7500DA SNB
1
Closer (@ Outswing Doors) PR7500DA SNB
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Mortised Edge Guard
302B
1
Floor Stop (@ Inswing Drs) 1214
1
Wall Stop (@ Outswing Drs) 1270CX
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 15
630
630AM
626
689
689
630
630
626
626
628
TBD
MAR
BES
BES
NOR
NOR
TRM
ROC
TRM
TRM
ZER
ZER
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-4C
Temporary
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinges
Classroom Lock
Permanent Core
Closer
Kick Plate
Wall Stop
Set Seals
NR/Rated
TA714
45H7R 14H
1CB7
(PR)7500DA SNB
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1270CX
188S_ MITRED
652
630
626
689
630
626
TBD
MCK
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
TRM
ZER
HW-4D
Large Office, Copy/Fax, Clean/Soiled Lab, Dictation
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
3
Hinges
TA786
1
Classroom Lock
45H7R 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500DA x 7786 x 9023JWG SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Overhead Stop
2-SERIES
1
Threshold
173A
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
45-Min.
652
630AM
626
689
630
630
627
628
TBD
MCK
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
RIX
PEM
ZER
ZER
HW-4E
Conference, Work Office
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
3
Hinges
TA714
1
Classroom Lock
45H7R 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500DA SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Threshold
173A
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 16
652
630AM
626
689
630
626
627
628
TBD
MCK
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
TRM
PEM
ZER
ZER
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-4F
Shared Work
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
NR
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB CHS-1
1
Classroom Lock
45H7R 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500-H SNB
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Mortised Edge Guard
302B
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
630
630AM
626
689
630
630
626
TBD
MAR
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
ROC
TRM
ZER
HW-4F.1
Clinical Resource, Blood Bank, Lab Testing
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB CUT:ADB CHS-1
1
Utility Lock
45H7C 14H
2
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500 x 7786OH x 9488JWG SNB
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Mortised Edge Guard
302B
1
Overhead Stop
1ADJ-SERIES
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
630
630AM
626
689
630
630
630
628
TBD
MAR
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
ROC
RIX
ZER
ZER
HW-4G
Secretary Work Area
Each Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
3
Hinges
TA714
1
Classroom Lock
45H7R 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
PR7500DA SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Wall Stop
1270CX
1
Threshold
173A
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 17
652
630AM
626
689
630
626
627
628
TBD
MCK
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
TRM
PEM
ZER
ZER
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-5
Elevator Machine Room
Each Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
90-Min.
3
Hinges
TA714
1
Storeroom Lock
45H7D 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500DA SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
652
630
626
689
630
626
628
TBD
MCK
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
TRM
ZER
ZER
HW-5.1
Loading Dock
Each Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
90-Min.
3
Hinges
TA714
1
Storeroom Lock
45H7D 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500DA x 7786 x 9023JWG SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Overhead Stop
2-SERIES
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
652
630
626
689
630
630
628
TBD
MCK
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
RIX
ZER
ZER
630
630
626
689
630
630
626
TBD
MAR
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
MAR
TRM
ZER
HW-5A
Secure Workroom
Each Door to Have: (HMD x HMF) NR
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB CHS-1
1
Security Lock
45H7TD 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500DA SNB
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Full-Height Surf. Edge Grd EG-308-AS
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 18
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-5B
Data, Electrical
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
2
Hinges
TA714
652 MCK
1
Transfer Hinge
TA714-CC6
652 MCK
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7DEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630 BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Closer
7500 SNB
689 NOR
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Floor Stop
1214
626 TRM
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
628 ZER
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
HW-5B.1
Secretary Work Area
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
2
Hinges
TA786
652 MCK
1
Transfer Hinge
TA786-CC6
652 MCK
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7DEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630 BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Closer
7500 x 7786 x 9023JWG SNB
689 NOR
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Overhead Stop
2-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Threshold
173A
627 PEM
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
628 ZER
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 19
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-5C
Vendor
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
45-Min.
2
Hinges
TA714
652 MCK
1
Transfer Hinge
TA714-CC6
652 MCK
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7DEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630AM BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Closer
7500 SNB
689 NOR
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Floor Stop
1214
626 TRM
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
HW-5D
Staff Lockers
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
FM-300-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1 CUT:ADB
630 MAR
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7DEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630AM BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Closer
7500 x 7786OH x 9488JWG SNB
689 NOR
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Overhead Stop
1ADJ-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
628 ZER
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 20
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-5E
Stair
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
90-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
FM-300-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1 CUT:ADB
630 MAR
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7DEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630AM BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Closer
7500 SNB
689 NOR
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Floor Stop
1214
626 TRM
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
628 ZER
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
KEY CYLINDER INSIDE STAIR.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
HW-5F
Narcotics Storage
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
NR
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7TDEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630AM BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Deadlock Monitor
MS-18
--- SDC
1
Lock Astragal
NLP-110
630 D-J
1
Closer
PR7500 SNB
689 NOR
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Mortised Edge Guard
302B
630 ROC
1
Overhead Stop
1ADJ-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
DEADBOLT CONTROLLED BY PHARMACIST’S KEY. THROWING DEADBOLT TRIPS MONITOR
SWITCH, WHICH DISABLES CARD READER.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 21
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-5G
Pharmacy
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7TDEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630AM BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Deadlock Monitor
MS-18
--- SDC
1
Lock Astragal
NLP-110
630 D-J
1
Closer
PR7500DA SNB
689 NOR
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Mortised Edge Guard
302B
630 ROC
1
Floor Stop
1214
626 TRM
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
DEADBOLT CONTROLLED BY PHARMACIST’S KEY. THROWING DEADBOLT TRIPS MONITOR
SWITCH, WHICH DISABLES CARD READER.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
HW-5H
Pharmacy Administrator
Each [DPS] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
3
Hinges
TA714
1
Continuous Hinge
FM-300-MB CHS-1
1
Security Lock
45H7TD 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500 SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 22
652
630
630AM
626
689
630
626
TBD
TBD
MCK
MAR
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
TRM
ZER
GES
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-5J
Staff Entry, Hematology
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45/60-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7DEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630AM BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Closer
PR7500DA SNB
689 NOR
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Mortised Edge Guard
302B
630 ROC
1
Floor Stop
1214
626 TRM
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
HW-5K
Soiled Hold, Cylinder Storage, Clean/Soiled Lab, Blood Bank
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7DEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630AM BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Closer
7500DA SNB
689 NOR
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Mortised Edge Guard
302B
630 ROC
1
Floor Stop
1214
626 TRM
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
HW-5L
EVS
Each Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
45-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
FM-300-MB CHS-1
1
Storeroom Lock
45H7D 14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
7500DA SNB
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Mop Plate
KM050 4” x 1” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 23
630
630AM
626
689
630
630
626
TBD
MAR
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
TRM
TRM
ZER
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-5M
THIS SET NOT USED.
HW-5N
THIS SET NOT USED.
HW-5P
Stair
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
90-Min.
2
Hinges
TA786
652 MCK
1
Transfer Hinge
TA786-CC6
652 MCK
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7DEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630AM BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Closer
7500
689 NOR
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Floor Stop
1214
626 TRM
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
628 PEM
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
KEY CYLINDER INSIDE STAIR.
HW-6
Electrical
Each [DPS] Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
45-Min.
3
Hinges
TA786
1
Panic Device
98NL-F
1
Cylinder
RIM
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
PR7500DA SNB
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Floor Stop
1214
1
Auto Door Bottom
369A-Z49
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 24
652
630
626
626
689
630
626
628
TBD
TBD
MCK
VON
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
TRM
ZER
ZER
GES
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-6A
Flammable Storage
Each Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
90-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB CHS-1
1
Panic Device
98NL-F
1
Cylinder
RIM
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Closer
PR7500DA SNB
1
Armor Plate
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
1
Full-Height Surf. Edge Grd EG-308-AS
1
Wall Stop
1270CX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
630
630
626
626
689
630
630
626
TBD
MAR
VON
BES
BES
NOR
TRM
MAR
TRM
ZER
HW-6B
THIS SET NOT USED.
HW-6C
Stair
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Integrated Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
NR
1
Cylinder
MORTISE
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
KEY CYLINDER INSIDE STAIR.
DOOR, FRAME, AND BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY SECTION 08 15 00.
626
626
BES
BES
626
626
BES
BES
HW-7
Each Rolling Fire Shutter to Have: NR
2
Cylinders
TYPE REQUIRED
2
Permanent Cores
1CB7
BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY ROLLING FIRE SHUTTER SECTION.
HW-8
Corridor
Each Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
NR
2
Continuous Hinges
HG-305-MB CHS-1
1
Push Plate
1807-4 B4E-HEAVY x TRIMGUARD
1
Push/Pull Plate Set
1895-4B B4E-HEAVY x TRIMGUARD
2
Closers
PR7500-H SNB
2
Armor Plates
KA125 34” x 1” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK .
2
Wall Stops
1270CX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 25
630
630
630
689
630
626
TBD
MAR
TRM
TRM
NOR
TRM
TRM
ZER
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-8A
THIS SET NOT USED.
HW-8B
Staging
Each [ADO] Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
45-Min.
2
Continuous Hinges
HG-305-MB-EL12-ETAP CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Auto Flush Bolt
840 x 8BFB
626 DCI
1
Utility Lock
45H7C 14H
630 BES
2
Permanent Cores
1CB7
626 BES
1
Electric Strike
712-75 NFS
630 FAC
1
Power Supply
602RF
--- SDC
1
Coordinator
600-SERIES COMPLETE
600 DCI
2
Armor Plates
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK U.L.
630 TRM
1
Full-Height Surf. Edge Grd EG-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630 MAR
1
Full-Height Edge Gd/Ast.
EG-T-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630 MAR
1
Adhesive Astragal Seal
188S_
TBD ZER
2
Overhead Stops
1ADJ-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
AUTO DOOR OPERATORS, ACTIVATION SWITCHES, AND SENSORS BY SECTION 08 71 13.
120VAC POWER, WIRING, AND CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIRE ALARM CONNECTION BY DIVISION 28.
TRANSFER HINGES USED FOR RE-ACTIVATION SENSORS AND ELECTRIC STRIKE.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) COORDINATOR TO MATCH FRAME.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
HW-8C
Clean Linen Hold, EVS Storage
Each Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
45-Min.
2
Continuous Hinges
HG-305-MB CHS-1
630
1
Auto Flush Bolt
840 x 8BFB
626
1
Utility Lock
45H7C 14H
630AM
2
Permanent Cores
1CB7
626
1
Coordinator
600-SERIES COMPLETE
600
2
Closers
7500DA x 7786OH x 9488JWG SNB
689
1
Full-Height Surf. Edge Grd EG-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630
1
Full-Height Edge Gd/Ast.
EG-T-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630
2
Armor Plates
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK U.L.
630
1
Lock Protector Bar
R111LPB
630
2
Overhead Stops
1ADJ-SERIES
630
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD
INSTALL ASTRAGAL ON PUSH SIDE OF INACTIVE LEAF.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) COORDINATOR TO MATCH FRAME.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 26
MAR
DCI
BES
BES
DCI
NOR
MAR
MAR
TRM
ROC
RIX
ZER
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-8D
Loading Dock to Corridor
Each [ADO] Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
45-Min.
2
Continuous Transfer Hinges HG-305-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Auto Flush Bolt
840 x 8BFB
626 DCI
1
Utility Lock
45H7C 14H
630 BES
2
Permanent Cores
1CB7
626 BES
1
Electric Strike
712-75 NFS
630 FAC
1
Power Supply
602RF
--- SDC
1
Coordinator
600-SERIES COMPLETE
600 DCI
2
Armor Plates
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK U.L.
630 TRM
1
Full-Height Surf. Edge Grd EG-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630 MAR
1
Full-Height Edge Gd/Ast.
EG-T-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630 MAR
1
Lock Protector Bar
R111LPB
630 ROC
2
Overhead Stops
1ADJ-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
POWER TRANSFER IN EACH LEAF FOR AUTO DOOR RE-ACTIVATION SENSOR (SEE SECTION 08
71 13).
POWER TRANSFER IN INACTIVE LEAF ALSO USED FOR ELECTRIC STRIKE.
AUTO DOOR OPERATOR AND CONTROLS BY SECTION 08 71 13.
120VAC POWER, WIRING, CONDUIT, AND FIRE ALARM CONNECTION BY DIVISION 26.
INSTALL ASTRAGAL ON PUSH SIDE OF INACTIVE LEAF.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) COORDINATOR TO MATCH FRAME.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
HW-9
Lab Staging
Each [DPS] Pair to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
2
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Set Auto Flush Bolts
962
626 DCI
1
Dust Proof Strike
82
626 DCI
1
Utility Lock
45H7C 14H
630 BES
2
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Coordinator
600-SERIES COMPLETE
600 DCI
1
Astragal
357SS x T.B. x 188S_
630 PEM
2
Closers
7500DA x 7786OH x 9488JWG SNB
689 NOR
2
Armor Plates
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
2
Mortised Edge Guards
KE33-2
630 TRM
2
Overhead Stops
1ADJ-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACTS AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
INSTALL ASTRAGAL ON PUSH SIDE OF INACTIVE LEAF.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) COORDINATOR TO MATCH FRAME.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 27
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-9A
Receiving, Storage
Each Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
NR/45-Min.
2
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Auto Flush Bolt
840 (x 8BFB @ RATED DOORS)
626 DCI
1
Utility Lock
45H7C 14H
630 BES
2
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Coordinator
600-SERIES COMPLETE
600 DCI
2
Closers
7500DA x 7786OH x 9488JWG SNB
689 NOR
2
Armor Plates
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Lock Protector Bar
R111LPB
630 ROC
1
Surface Edge Guard
EG-308 CUT:HDWE
630 MAR
1
Surface Edge Guard/Ast.
EG-T-308 CUT:HDWE
630 MAR
1
Adhesive Astragal
188S_
TBD ZER
2
Overhead Holder-Stops
1ADJ-SERIES (STOP ONLY @ RATED DRS) 630 RIX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACTS AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) COORDINATOR TO MATCH FRAME.
HW-9B
Mechanical
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
45/90-Min.
Hinges
Transfer Hinge
Auto Flush Bolt
Electric Lock
Permanent Core
Coordinator
Astragal
TA786
652 MCK
TA786-CC8
652 MCK
840 x 8BFB
626 DCI
45H7DEU-RQE 14H x 7/8” LTC STRIKE
630 BES
1CB7
626 BES
600-SERIES COMPLETE
600 DCI
357SS x CSK x 188S_ x NO HOLE AT LOCK
630 PEM
CASE
1
Adhesive Ast. Seal
117S-BK
BLK ZER
2
Closers
PR7500DA SNB
689 NOR
2
Kick Plates
KO050 10” x 1” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
2
Floor Stops
1214
626 TRM
2
Auto Door Bottoms
369A-Z49
628 PEM
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
2
Panic Device
98NL-OP
630 VON
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACTS AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) COORDINATOR TO MATCH FRAME.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 28
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-9C
Pharmacy Receiving/Storage
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Pair to Have: (WD x HMF)
45-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB CHS-1
630 MAR
1
ContinuousTransfer Hinge
HG-305-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Set Auto Flush Bolts
842
626 DCI
1
Dust Proof Strike
82
626 DCI
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7TDEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630 BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Astragal
357SS x T.B. x 188S_
630 PEM
1
Coordinator
600-SERIES COMPLETE
600 DCI
2
Closers
7500DA x 7786OH x 9488JWG SNB
689 NOR
2
Armor Plates
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
2
Mortised Edge Guards
KE33-2
630 TRM
2
Overhead Stops
1ADJ-SERIES 630
RIX
1
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACTS AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
DEADBOLT CONTROLLED BY PHARMACIST’S KEY.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
INSTALL ASTRAGAL ON PUSH SIDE OF INACTIVE LEAF.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) COORDINATOR TO MATCH FRAME.
COMPLY WITH 08 71 00 2.8 C.
HW-10
Electrical, Emergency Power
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
45-Min.
6
Hinges
TA786
652 MCK
2
Power Transfers
4612-1
628 ARC
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Electric Panic Device
RX-9827EO-F-LBR
630 VON
1
Electric Panic Device
RX-9827L-F-LBR x E996L x 17 (630 LVR)
630 VON
1
Cylinder
RIM
626 BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Set Astragals
351C x 351CS
628 PEM
2
Closers
PR7500DA SNB
689 NOR
2
Kick Plates
KO050 10” x 1” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
2
Wall Stops
1270CX
626 TRM
2
Auto Door Bottoms
369A-Z49
628 PEM
2
Set Seals
188S_ MITRED
TBD ZER
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACTS AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) SNB’S TO MATCH DOOR.
ADJUST PANIC DEVICE BACKSET TO ACCOMMODATE MEETING STILE ASTRAGALS.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 29
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-10A
Corridor
Each [MHO] Integrated Same Swing Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
90-Min.
DOOR, FRAME, AND ALL HARDWARE BY SECTION 08 15 00.
HW-10B
Corridor
Each [ADO] Integrated Same Swing Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
1
Cylinder
MORTISE
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
DOOR, FRAME, AND BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY SECTION 08 15 00.
AUTO DOOR OPERATOR AND CONTROLS BY SECTION 08 71 13.
60-Min.
626
626
BES
BES
HW-10C
THIS SET NOT USED.
HW-10D
Corridor
Each [MHO] Integrated Double Egress Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
60-Min.
DOOR, FRAME, AND ALL HARDWARE BY SECTION 08 15 00.
HW-10E
Corridor
Each [ADO] Integrated Double Egress Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
60-Min.
DOOR, FRAME, AND ALL HARDWARE BY SECTION 08 15 00.
HW-11
THIS SET NOT USED.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 30
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-12
Loading Dock
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
NR
1
Continuous Hinge
FM-300-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7DEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630 BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Closer
7500
689 NOR
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Floor Stop
1214
626 TRM
1
Threshold
172A x DOUBLE MITER RETURNS
627 PEM
1
Door Sweep
8194AA
628 ZER
1
Set Seals
332CR
628 PEM
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CARD READER, 24VDC POWER, ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
HW-12A
Penthouse
Each [DPS] Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
NR
3
Hinges
TA386
1
Security Lock
45H7TD14H
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
1
Lock Astragal
NLP-110
1
Closer
PR7500
1
Overhead Holder-Stop
1ADJ-SERIES
1
Threshold
2005AT x SINGLE MITER RETURNS
1
Door Sweep
8194AA
1
Head Seal
2891AS x CSK SCREWS
2
Jamb Seals
290AS
1
Drip
346C 4” GDW
1
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
630
630
626
630
689
630
627
628
628
628
628
TBD
MCK
BES
BES
D-J
NOR
RIX
PEM
ZER
PEM
PEM
PEM
GES
HW-13
THIS SET NOT USED.
HW-13A
Stair, Exit Passageway
Each [DPS] Integrated Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
1
Cylinder
MORTISE
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
DOOR, FRAME, AND BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY SECTION 08 15 00.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 31
45-Min.
626
626
BES
BES
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-13B
Emergency Power
Each [DPS] Door to Have: (HMD x HMF)
NR
1
Continuous Hinge
FM-300-MB CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Anti-Vandal Pull
1097HASP
630 TRM
1
Panic Device
98NL-OP
630 VON
1
Cylinder
RIM
626 BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Closer
PR7500DA
689 NOR
1
Kick Plate
KO050 10” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK
630 TRM
1
Overhead Stop
1ADJ-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Threshold
2005AT x SINGLE MITER RETURNS
627 PEM
1
Door Sweep
8194AA
628 ZER
1
Set Seals
2891AS x CSK SCREWS
628 PEM
1
Drip
346C 4” GDW
628 PEM
1
Alarm Contact
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
INSTALL SEALS BEFORE RIM STRIKE AND CLOSER; DO NOT CUT SEALS; ADJUST PANIC AND
OUTSIDE PULL BACKSET FOR RIM STRIKE MOUNTED ON STRIKE JAMB SEAL.
ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
HW-14
Loading Dock
Each [DPS] Roll-Up Door to Have: NR
2
Cylinders or Padlocks
TYPE REQUIRED
2
Permanent Cores
1CB7
2
Alarm Contacts
2207AU-L (X 1982 AS REQ’D) BY 28 13 00
BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY SECTION 08 33 23.
ALARM CONTACT AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 32
626
626
628
BES
BES
GES
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-15
Loading Dock
Each [ADO, CR, REX, DPS] Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
45-Min.
2
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Set Auto Flush Bolts
842
626 DCI
1
Dust Proof Strike
82
626 DCI
1
Security Lock w/REX
45H7TD-RQE 14H
630 BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Full-Height Surf. Edge Grd EG-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630 MAR
1
Full-Height Edge Gd/Ast.
EG-T-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630 MAR
1
Adhesive Astragal Seal
188S_
TBD ZER
1
Coordinator
600-SERIES COMPLETE
600 DCI
1
Electric Strike
310-3-1
630 FAC
1
Power Supply
602RF
--- SDC
2
Armor Plates
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK TRM
630 TRM
1
Lock Protector Bar
R111LPB
630 ROC
2
Floor Stops
1214
626 TRM
1
H.D. Threshold
1719A x DOUBLE MITER RETURNS
627 PEM
2
Door Sweeps
8194AA
628 ZER
1
Set Seals
332CR
628 PEM
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
120VAC POWER, WIRING, AND CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
FIRE ALARM CONNECTION BY DIVISION 28.
AUTO DOOR OPERATORS, CONTROLS AND SENSORS BY SECTION 08 71 13.
CARD READER AND ALARM CONTACTS BY SECTION 28 13 00.
POWER TRANSFERS SHARED BY RQE SWITCH, ELECTRIC STRIKE, AND RE-ACTIVATION
SENSORS.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) COORDINATOR TO MATCH FRAME.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 33
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-15A
Loading Dock
Each [CR, REX, DPS] Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
45-Min.
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Continuous Hinge
HG-305-MB-CE8D-ETAP CHS-1
630 MAR
1
Set Auto Flush Bolts
842
626 DCI
1
Dust Proof Strike
82
626 DCI
1
Electric Lock w/REX
45HW7TDEU-RQE 14H 24VDC
630 BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
1
Full-Height Surf. Edge Grd EG-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630 MAR
1
Full-Height Edge Gd/Ast.
EG-T-308-AS CUT:HDWE
630 MAR
1
Adhesive Astragal Seal
188S_
TBD ZER
1
Coordinator
600-SERIES COMPLETE
600 DCI
2
Closers
7500DA
689 NOR
2
Armor Plates
KA050 34” x 2” LDW B4E-HEAVY CSK TRM
630 TRM
1
Lock Protector Bar
R111LPB
630 ROC
2
Floor Stops
1214
626 TRM
1
H.D. Threshold
1719A x DOUBLE MITER RETURNS
627 PEM
2
Door Sweeps
8194AA
628 ZER
1
Set Seals
332CR
628 PEM
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
CARD READER, LOW VOLTAGE POWER, AND ALARM CONTACTS BY SECTION 28 13 00.
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) COORDINATOR TO MATCH FRAME.
HW-16
Penthouse
Each [DPS] Pair to Have: (HMD x HMF)
NR
6
1
1
1
1
1
630
626
626
630
626
630
MCK
DCI
DCI
BES
BES
PEM
600
689
630
627
628
628
628
628
TBD
DCI
NOR
RIX
PEM
ZER
PEM
PEM
PEM
GES
Hinges
Set Auto Flush Bolts
Dust Proof Strike
Security Lock
Permanent Core
Astragal
TA386
842
82
45H7TD14H x 7/8” LTC STRIKE
1CB7
357SS x T.B. x 188S_ x NO HOLE AT LOCK
CASE
1
Coordinator
600-SERIES COMPLETE
2
Closers
PR7500
2
Overhead Holder-Stops
1ADJ-SERIES
1
Threshold
2005AT x SINGLE MITER RETURNS
2
Door Sweeps
8194AA
1
Head Seal
2891AS x CSK SCREWS
2
Jamb Seals
290AS
1
Drip
346C 4” GDW
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
FIELD PAINT (09 91 00) COORDINATOR TO MATCH FRAME.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
ALARM CONTACTS AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 34
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-17
Lobby
Each [ADO, CR, REX, DPS] Pair to Have: (AL/GLD x ALF)
2
2
2
2
2
NR
Arm Assemblies
Intermediate Pivots
Top Pivots
Power Transfers
Offset Pulls
252051R/L
626 RIX
M190
626 RIX
L180
626 RIX
4612-1
628 ARC
RM3140-16” x SPANNER SECURITY T.B. 630BIO ROC
x MTG. “1HD”
1
Electric Panic Device
RX-QEL-HD3547A-EO
630AM VON
1
Electric Panic Device
RX-QEL-HD3547NL OMIT PULL
630AM VON
1
Power Supply
PS873-2Q-AO
--- VON
1
Cylinder
MORTISE
626 BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
2
Overhead Stops
1ADJ-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Threshold Assembly
TYPE 3 x 268A x 6710A-E x 663A x #226
AL ZER
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
AUTO DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS BY SECTION 08 71 13.
FRAME SEALS, DOOR BOTTOMS, AND MEETING STILE ASTRAGALS BY SECTION 08 41 13.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
CARD READER, ALARM CONTACTS, AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
120VAC POWER, WIRING, AND CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
POWER TRANSFERS SHARED BY RE-ACTIVATION SENSORS AND ELECTRIFIED PANICS.
HW-17A
Women’s Center – DOOR 401
Each [ADO, CRx2, DPS] Pair to Have: (AL/GLD x ALF)
NR
NOT A REQUIRED EXIT.
2
Continuous Transfer Hinges HG-105-HT-CE8-ETAP
*** MAR
2
Offset Pulls
RM3140-16” x SPANNER SECURITY T.B. 630BIO ROC
x MTG. “1HD”
2
Push Bars
RM3112 x MTG “1HD” x BTB MT TO PULLS 630BIO ROC
1
3-Point Deadlock
MS1850S x 4015 x 4085
628 ARC
2
Cylinders
MORTISE
626 BES
2
Permanent Cores
1CB7
626 BES
1
Double Magnetic Lock
1513-B x FINISH TO MATCH DOOR FRAME
--- SDC
2
Overhead Stops
1ADJ-SERIES
630 RIX
1
Threshold Assembly
PER SILL DETAIL x #226
AL ZER
2
Alarm Contacts
1076D-SERIES BY 28 13 00
TBD GES
*** CUSTOM ANODIZE TO MATCH DOOR AND FRAME FINISH.
AUTO DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS BY SECTION 08 71 13.
FRAME SEALS, DOOR BOTTOMS, AND MEETING STILE ASTRAGALS BY SECTION 08 41 13.
CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
CARD READER, ALARM CONTACTS, AND WIRING BY SECTION 28 13 00.
DEADLOCK ONLY USED FOR EMERGENCY LOCKING OF DOOR IN POWER FAILURE.
120VAC POWER, WIRING, AND CONDUIT BY DIVISION 26.
POWER TRANSFERS USED FOR CONCEALED WIRING OF RE-ACTIVATION SENSORS.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 35
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
HW-18
Miscellaneous:
1
Recessed Key Cabinet
1305A-SPECIAL x SET-UP FOR 50 CORES
GRY LUN
& 300 STANDARD KEYS x
G.E. TOUCHPOINT PUSHBUTTON LOCK
2
Fire Dept. Key Boxes
4400-RMK-ALUMINZATION-ANTI-TAMPER
TBD KNX
SWITCH
20 Extra Cores for Stock
1CB7 (COMBINATED) x 2 KEYS
626 BES
1
Key Switch
705-L2 (GREEN=UNLOCKED; RED=LOCKED) 630 SDC
1
Cylinder (Key Switch)
MORTISE
626 BES
1
Permanent Core
1CB7
626 BES
LOCATE KEY SWITCH IN LOBBY AX03B AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT FOR AUTHORIZED
UNLOCKING OF STAIR DOORS BY EMERGENCY PERSONNEL. PLACE KEY IN KNOX BOX.
LOCATE KEY CABINET AND FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY BOXES AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT.
CONDUIT FOR KEY BOXES BY DIVISION 16.
WIRING FOR KEY BOXES BY SECURITY SECTION.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7
130-202 FHT
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 36
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 08 71 13
AUTOMATIC SWING DOOR OPERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and of applicable SECTIONS of Division 01 – General Requirements, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of automatic door operators:
1.
Exterior and interior, automatic swing door operators, low energy, with visible mounting
or concealed mounting per architectural details.
2.
Automatic door operators shall be configured for doors as follows:
a.
Simultaneous pairs, out swing, in swing, or double egress.
b.
Coordinated unequal leaf rated pairs, out swing or in swing.
c.
Single doors, out swing or in swing.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 08 11 13-Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2.
Section 08 14 16-Flush Wood Doors
3.
Section 08 15 00-Integrated Door Assemblies
4.
Section 08 41 13-Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
5.
Section 08 71 00-Door Hardware
6.
Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for automatic
door operators.
7.
Section 28 13 00-Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System
1.03
REFERENCES
General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of
this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing
authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by
issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing
authority abbreviation and standard designation.
A.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1.
UL 228 – Standard for Electronic Closer-Holder Mechanisms.
2.
UL 325 – Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and
Systems.
B.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Builders’ Hardware Manufacturers Association
(BHMA):
1.
ANSI/BHMA A156.19: Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated
Doors.
C.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
2.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
130-202 FHT
08 71 13 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
D.
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM):
E.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.
NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code.
2.
NFPA 70 – National Electric Code.
F.
California Building Code
1.
CBC 2007: California Building Code
G.
California Department of Forestry and Fire Protection, Office of the State Fire Marshall.
H.
International Standards Organization (ISO):
1.
ISO 9001 - Standard for Manufacturing Quality Management Systems
I.
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):
1.
Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
J.
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1.
AAMA 607.1 - Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
2.
AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.
1.04
A.
1.05
DEFINITIONS
Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator
to open the door.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide automatic door operators capable of withstanding structural loads and thermal
movements based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those
indicated for this Project.
B.
Operating Range: Minus 30 deg F (29 deg C) to 130 deg F (54 deg C).
C.
Opening-Force Requirements for Egress Doors: In the event power failure to the operator,
swinging automatic entrance doors shall open with a manual force, not to exceed 30 lbf (133
N) applied at 1” (25 mm) form the latch edge of the door.
D.
Door Energy: The kinetic energy of a door in motion shall not exceed 1.25 lbs-ft (1.69 Nm).
E.
Closing Time:
1.
Doors shall be field adjusted to close from 90 degrees to 10 degrees in 3 seconds or
longer.
2.
Doors shall be field adjusted to close from 10 degrees to fully closed in not less than 1.5
seconds.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and of applicable
SECTION of Division 01 – General Requirements submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and
attachments to other work. Indicate wiring for electrical supply.
C.
Color Samples for selection of factory-applied color finishes.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
130-202 FHT
08 71 13 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
D.
1.07
A.
Closeout Submittals: Provide the following with project close-out documents.
1.
Owner’s Manual.
2.
Warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained for installation
and maintenance of units required for this Project.
Brand
Stanley
Authorized Dealers
Dealer
Stanley Access Technologies
ATTN: Jeff Weller
244 Millar Avenue
El Cajon, CA 92020
(619) 447-5061 FAX: (619) 447-9101
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with a manufacturing facility certified
under ISO 9001 and with company certificate issued by AAADM.
C.
Certifications: Automatic door operators shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet
performance design criteria in accordance with the following standards:
1.
ANSI A156.19.
2.
NFPA 101.
3.
UL 228 Listed (Fire Door Operator)
4.
ICBO (UBC Standard 10-1).
5.
California State Fire Marshall (CSFM) Listed.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain automatic door operators through one source from a single
manufacturer.
E.
Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
automatic door assemblies and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to of
applicable SECTION of Division 01 – General Requirements Section "Product Requirements."
F.
Power Operated Door Standard: ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
G.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
H.
Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for swinging automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress.
1.08
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: General Contractor shall verify openings to receive automatic door
operators by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
B.
Mounting Surfaces: General Contractor shall verify all surfaces to be plumb, straight and
secure; substrates to be of proper dimension and material.
C.
Other trades: General Contractor Advise of any inadequate conditions or equipment.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
130-202 FHT
08 71 13 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.09
COORDINATION
A.
Templates: Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing automatic door operators to comply with indicated
requirements.
B.
Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic door operators
with connections to, power supplies, and remote activation devices.
C.
System Integration: Integrate automatic door operators with other systems as required for a
complete working installation.
1.
Provide electrical interface control capability for card reader or keypad operation of
automatic door operators on doors with electric locking.
2.
Where required for proper operation, provide a time delay relay to signal automatic door
operator to activate only after electric lock system is released.
1.10
WARRANTY
A.
Automatic door operators shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of
two (2) years from the date of substantial completion.
B.
During the warranty period the Owner shall engage a factory-trained technician to perform
service and affect repairs. A safety inspection shall be performed after each adjustment or
repair and a completed inspection form shall be submitted to the Owner.
C.
During the warranty period all warranty work, including but not limited to emergency service,
shall be performed during normal working hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
A.
Operator Manufacturers: Stanley Magic-Force
A.B.
Concealed-in-Floor Convertor Manufacturer: Opcon.
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1.
Headers: 6063-T6.
2.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
B.
Sealants and Joint Fillers: Refer to Division 7 Section "Interior Joint Sealants".
2.03
COMPONENTS
A.
Door Arms: A combination of door arms and linkage shall provide positive control of door through
entire swing; units shall permit use of butt hung, center pivot, and offset pivot-hung doors. Provide
drop plates and arm assemblies as needed to avoid conflict with concealed overhead stops (provided
by Section 08710), yet not restrict required clear opening height.
B.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
130-202 FHT
08 71 13 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.C. Provide surface-mounted operators with custom aluminum plates by Tice Industries (Portland,
OR) to fill any gap between the operator and the wall. Custom powdercoat plates to match the
operator enclosure finish.
C.D. Signage: Provide signage in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
2.04
SWINGING DOOR OPERATORS
A.
Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and
movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under
normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.
B.
Make available power-close option for each auto door operator, field-selectable.
C.
Electromechanical or Electrohydraulic Operators: Self-contained unit.
1.
Operator Type: Low energy; readily convertible to full energy; no tools required to
change type.
2.
Mounting: Visible (typically mounted inside room and away from public view), overhead
concealed, or concealed-in-floor, based on Door Schedule Key Notes.
3.
Features:
a.
Adjustable opening and closing speeds.
b.
Adjustable opening and closing force.
c.
Adjustable back-check.
d.
Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds.
e.
Reverse on obstruction.
f.
Variable rate open/closed speed control.
g.
Closed loop speed control with active braking and acceleration.
h.
Variable obstruction recycle time delay.
i.
When operators are provided in pairs, adjustable features are independently
adjustable for each operator.
D.
Quiet Performance: The operator shall be designed to output audible noise ratios less than or equal to
50dba.
E.
Manual Use: The operator shall function as a manual door closer in the direction of swing with or
without electrical power. The operator shall deliver an even, consistent open force across the entire
transition from door fully closed to door fully open.
F.
Electrical service to door operators shall be provided under Division 26 Electrical. Minimum
service to be 120 VAC, 10 amps for doors with operators in pairs, 5 amps for single doors.
G.
At automatic doors with 24VDC electric locking devices, provide SDC 602RF power supply (or
equal by Securitron or Locknetics) to provide 24VDC power to electric locking device.
Coordinate with Section 08 71 00 to eliminate redundant provision of this power supply.
2.05
A.
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
Safety Search Circuitry: Provide system to recycle the swinging panels when an obstruction is
encountered during the closing cycle. If an obstruction is detected, the system shall search for
that object on the next closing cycle by reducing door closing speed prior to the previously
encountered obstruction location, and will continue to close in check speed until doors are fully
closed, at which time the doors will reset to normal speed. If obstruction is encountered again,
the door will come to a full stop. The doors shall remain stopped until obstruction is removed
and operate signal is given, resetting the door to normal operation.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
130-202 FHT
08 71 13 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
Control Switch: Automatic door operators shall be equipped with a three position function key
switch to control the operation of the door, similar to Camden CM-170/3 Control switch shall
provide three modes of operation, Automatic, Off, and Hold-Open. Locate switch on side
jamb frame face, 44-inches above finished floor. Coordinate with frame section for wiring and
installation of three-position switch..
C.
Safety Sensing: Provide BEA SuperScan II at each door leaf equipped with an automatic door
operator to sense when a person is in the doorway and signal the automatic door operator to
re-activate until the doorway is clear. Concealed wiring through concealed power transfer (by
Section 087100) from door to frame. Provide BodyGuard sensor to prevent door from opening
when person is in path of door swing.
D.
Fire Alarm Connection: At fire-rated doors, upon activation of the fire alarm, the automatic
door operators’ power-open and hold-open functions shall be disabled and the operator shall
function as a normal door closer.
E.
Provide independent control of doors at pairs with coordinators for coordinated opening.
F.
Time Delay Relays: At fire-rated doors with electric strikes or electric panic hardware, provide
time delay relay (ESI 530 or equal by BEA) to allow door to electrically unlatch prior to
opening. Also, provide for coordinated opening and closing of leaves at pairs with flush bolts.
2.06
A.
2.07
ACTIVATION DEVICES
Activation for Low Energy Doors:
1.
Push Plates: Provide MS Sedco 59-P (630 finish) at each side of the opening for doors
where the operator serves for ease of use by staff only, Wikk Ingress’R (630 finish)
where operator serves to provide accessibility for the public, except at sides where card
reader serves as the sole activation switch.
a.
Interior and exterior push plates shall be wall mounted in single or double gang
electrical boxes and hardwired to door operator controls.
a.b. At doors with card readers, provide activation switches with DPDT switch option.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for
recommendations for applying and designing finishes. Finish designations prefixed by AA
comply with system established by Aluminum Association for designing finishes.
B.
Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M10C22A31 Mechanical Finish: as fabricated; Chemical
Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.40 mils
minimum complying with AAMA 611-98, and the following:
1.
AAMA 607.1
2.
Applicator must be fully compliant with all applicable environmental regulations and
permits, including wastewater and heavy metal discharge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of swinging automatic
entrance doors. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
130-202 FHT
08 71 13 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and
distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
B.
Mounting: Install automatic door operators/headers plumb and true in alignment with
established lines and grades. Anchor securely in place.
1.
Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent
possible.
2.
Set headers, arms and linkages level and true to location with anchorage for permanent
support.
C.
Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in
Division 26 Sections.
D.
Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to provide
weather tight installation.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Services: Factory Trained Installer shall test and inspect each swinging automatic
entrance door to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable ANSI standards.
3.04
ADJUSTING
Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation, for weather-tight
closure, and complying with requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.19 by AAADM Certified
Technician.
3.05
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess sealant compounds, dirt, and other
substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD#7 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
130-202 FHT
08 71 13 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Size
Equip ID
ALLOI11 ANACO16 ANACO20 ANACO30 ANACO30A
ANACO30B
ANACO30C
ANAEL13 ANAFF01 ANAFF01A
ANALB51 ANALM04 ANALM30 ANALM30A
ANALM40 ANALM52 ANAPR24 ANAPR24A
ANAUR08 ANAUR15 ANAUR15A
ANAUR15B
ANBGS01 ANBGS01B
ANBNP02 ANGLU05 ANGLU07 ANHEM32 ANLZB01 ANLZB02C
BALAN14 BALAN16 BATHD04 BATHT03 BATHT07 BATHW07 BATHW14 BATHW14A
BATHW14B
BATHW17 BENWK22 BLEND04 BOARD01 BOARD03 BOARD08 BOARD19 BOARD22 BUCKM03 CABBE09 CABBL01 CABFL03 CABFL06 CABFL13 CABFL14 CABFL24 CABMO58 CABSL03 CABSU03 CARHK11 CARSY24 CARSY25 CARTE40 CARTF04 CARTP03 CARTP51 CARTS23 CARTS23A
CARTS23B
Equipment Name
24‐Port 100‐MB Switched Hubs, Fiber Automated Coagulation Analyzer Platelet Function Analyzer Automated Coagulation Analyzer 17" Flat Panel Monitor with Touch Screen
Control Module (CPU) for ACL TOP 500 CTS
Cart for ACL TOP 500 CTS Blood Gas Analyzer Fetal Fibronectin Analyzer Printer for Fetal Fibronectin Analyzer Blood Culture Analyzer‐ Double‐Stacked Automated Microbiology Analyzer Microbial Identification System Lysis Block for MicroProbe Automated Urine Specimen Processor Colorimeter Chemistry/Immunoassay Analyzer Control Unit Cart Urine Chemistry Analyzer Automated Urinalysis System Automated Urine Chemistry Analyzer Computer and Monitor for Urine Analyzer Centrifuge‐Blood Grouping Sys. Incubator‐Blood Grouping Sys. BNP Analyzer Blood Glucose Analysis System Blood Glucose Analyzer Automated Hematology Analyzer Automated Blood Bank Analyzer Uninterrupted Power Supply Two‐Pan Beam Balance Pharmacy Prescription Balance Dri Bath Heater Tissue Float Bath Tissue Flotation Bath Water Bath Plasma Thawing Water Bath Digital Thermometer Chamber Cover Plasma/Red Cell Thawing Bath Mobile Workbench with Drawers & Cabinets
Commercial Blender Allowance‐ Marker Board, 36"w x 24"h Allowance‐ Tackboard, 48"w x 36"h Visual Presentation Cabinet Allowance‐ White Board Markerboard 60" x 36" Stainless Steel Mop Bucket, 8 Gallon Supply Cabinet Cabinet, Block Storage Flammables Storage Cabinet‐ 4 Gallon Flammables Storage Cabinet‐ 12 Gallon Flammables Storage Cabinet‐ 4 Gallon Flammables Storage Cabinet‐ 22 Gallon Flammables Storage Cabinet‐ 90 Gallon Mobile Storage Unit Microscope Slide Stor. Cabinet Two‐Door Supply Cabinet Housekeeping Cart Top‐Track Shelving System, 19' Long Top‐Track Shelving System, 12' Long Mobile Equipment Cart Basket/File Cart Modular Procedure "L" Cart Double‐Wide Procedure/Supply Cart Closed Surgical Case Cart Solid Roll‐Out Shelf for Case Cart Wire Roll‐Out Shelf for Case Cart 11/20/2012 ADD#7
130-202 Korbel
Manufacturer
(Manufacturer Not Identified) Sysmex Corp. of America Dade Behring, Inc./Siemens Beckman Coulter Instruments Beckman Coulter Instruments Beckman Coulter Instruments Beckman Coulter Instruments Siemens Med. Sol.Diag. Adeza Biomedical Adeza Biomedical Becton Dickinson Microbiology Dade Behring, Inc./Siemens Becton Dickinson Microbiology Becton Dickinson Microbiology Dynacon Inc. bioMérieux Vitek, Inc. Roche Diagnostics Roche Diagnostics Bayer Corp. Diagnostics/Siemen
IRIS International, Inc. IRIS International, Inc. IRIS International, Inc. Ortho‐Clinical Diagnostics Ortho‐Clinical Diagnostics Biosite Incorporated Roche Diagnostics Roche Diagnostics Siemens HC Diagnostics (Lab) Ortho‐Clinical Diagnostics Immucor, Inc. Ohaus Corporation Fulcrum Inc. Lab‐Line‐Barnstead/Thermolyne Lab‐Line‐Barnstead/Thermolyne Baxter Healthcare Thermo Fisher Scientific Helmer Labs, Inc. Helmer Labs, Inc. Helmer Labs, Inc. Thermo Forma Workplace Systems Inc. Sunbeam Oster (Manufacturer Unknown) (Manufacturer Unknown) (Manufacturer Unknown) (Manufacturer Unknown) Quartet Manufacturing Company Geerpres Inc. Custom Comfort Medtek (Manufacturer Unknown) Fisher Scientific Justrite Manufacturing Company
Justrite Manufacturing Company
Justrite Manufacturing Company
W.W. Grainger Inc. InterMetro Industries Corp. VWR Scientific Lyon Metal Products, Inc. Geerpres Inc. InterMetro Industries Corp. InterMetro Industries Corp. Patterson (Sammons Preston) W.A. Charnstrom Herman Miller for Healthcare InterMetro Industries Corp. Suburban Surgical Company Inc.
Suburban Surgical Company Inc.
Suburban Surgical Company Inc.
Furnished Installed Mounting
Model
Part
By
By
O
O
CA‐1500 O
O
Counter PFA‐100 B4170‐00 O
O
Counter ACL TOP 500 CTS O
O
Counter Monitor O
O
Counter CPU O
O
Counter Cart O
O
FloorStd
RapidPoint 400 O
O
Counter TLiQ‐01202 O
V
Counter TLiQ O
V
Counter Bactec FX 441385 (Top) & 441386 (Bottom)
O
C
FloorStd
O
O
Counter BD MicroProbe Processor 250100 O
O
Counter BD MicroProbe Lysis Block O
O
Counter Innova O
C
FloorStd
52‐1210 O
O
Counter Cobas 6000 O
C
FloorStd
Cobas 6000 O
V
FloorStd
Clinitek 500 O
O
Counter iQ200 Elite O
V
Counter O
V
Counter Arkray Aution Max AX‐4280 iQ200 O
V
Counter ID‐Micro Typing System MT‐5150‐60 O
O
Counter Micro Typing Systems DG‐225 MTS9680 O
O
Counter Triage Meter Plus O
O
Counter AccuData GTS Advantage System 03000249001 O
O
Counter O
O
Portable
Accu‐Chek Professional System Advia 2120 with Autosampler O
C
Cart‐Mtd
ProVue MTS213784 O
O
Cart‐Mtd
Powerware 9120 700 O
O
FloorStd
Harvard Trip 1454‐SD (Thomas Scientifc # 1368‐D40) O
O
Counter Torbal DRX‐3 formerly by Vertex Industries O
O
Counter 16500 16525 O
O
Counter 26103 O
O
Counter 145800 O
O
Counter 181 2827 O
O
Counter DH8 O
O
Counter DT1 500606‐1 O
O
Accssry O
O
Accssry CT8 400276‐1 2032 O
O
Counter R‐04‐151‐02G Stainless St Top O
C
FloorStd
OSTERIZER POWERBLEND BLENDERS 4105‐8 (PRICE PER EACH/4 PACK)
O
O
Counter (based on Claridge S1882X3LCS)
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
(based on Claridge 751F) O
C
Wall‐Mtd
(based on Peter Pepper #CC) O
C
Wall‐Mtd
(based on Claridge Products) O
C
Wall‐Mtd
S535 O
C
Wall‐Mtd
2223 Stainless Steel Round Bucket O
O
FloorStd
Custom‐Built Cart similar to SC6065, except 36"h
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Counter 17‐987‐410 Eagle # 1903 O
C
FloorStd
Sure‐Grip EX 891200 (Replaces 25710) O
C
FloorStd
Sure‐Grip EX 890400 (Replaces 25040) O
O
Counter Sure‐Grip EX 892300 (Replaces 25730) O
C
FloorStd
6YG17 (Eagle Mfg # 1992) O
C
FloorStd
Metro Starsys SXSGS2 O
O
FloorStd
S/P Universal Filing System O
O
FloorStd
1081 (Unassembled) 1000 Series Storage Cabinets O
C
FloorStd
Escort RX 3661 (fully equip) O
O
FloorStd
Top‐Track System O
V
FloorStd
Top‐Track System O
V
FloorStd
Z Cart/Laser Cart/Equip. Cart 561010 O
O
FloorStd
M106 O
O
FloorStd
CO212FF L Cart O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
Starsys SXDGS4 "TOTE‐AL" 105494‐00 O
O
FloorStd
220341‐00 O
O
FloorStd
220331‐00 O
O
FloorStd
OSHPD Width
Depth
Height
31.2
9
43
14
7.5
60
11.5
6.9
4.5
24.5
38
11
4.5
60
3.5
121
32
14.8
21
21
8
13.5
10.8
6.3
11
3.8
55.5
39.4
6.2
14
11.8
11.8
13.3
15
8
18.5
3
20
15.1
35
3
19
30
16
8.9
7
34.3
29
9.5
3.5
49.5
6.5
41
32
12.8
24
21
19
19.3
12.5
8.5
8.8
1.4
26.8
23.6
16.2
8.5
6
9
13.3
13.5
9.5
22
3
20
14.2
29
17
17.5
32
21.5
3
6
78.3
28
6
1.5
71
3
51
30.5
84
10.3
36
48
96
24
60
17
20
9.5
17.5
23.2
17
35
43
22.8
15.8
36
25
229
145
19
21.5
23
42
33.8
16.4
50
7.3
0.8
1
5
2
17
20
16.3
18
18
17
22
34
24.9
19
18
47.8
75
75
17
40
22.3
27
27.4
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
11 70 00 - 1
11.1
22
21
17
5.8
4.3
2.8
4
7.6
33.8
36.5
9.6
10.5
8
3.5
3.5
3.3
9.5
15.5
4
6
16.3
37.4
14.8
24
36
48
36
36
17
36
15.3
22.3
35
22
35.5
65
76
5
78
42.5
86
86
29
36.8
36
43
39.4
Weight (lbs.)
OSHPD Approval
Not Applicable 171.6
Not Applicable 24
Not Applicable 312
Not Applicable Not Applicable 37
Not Applicable 100
Not Applicable 34
Not Applicable 1.2
Not Applicable Not Applicable 994
Pre‐Approved 375
Not Applicable 18
Not Applicable Not Applicable 1100
Make Provision Not Applicable 1947
Make Provision 165
Not Applicable 16.3
Not Applicable 100
Not Applicable 110
Not Applicable 111
Not Applicable 14
Not Applicable 11
Not Applicable 1.5
Not Applicable 5
Not Applicable Not Applicable 425
Make Provision 191.8
Not Applicable 29
Not Applicable 5.5
11
Not Applicable 9
Not Applicable 6.5
Not Applicable 15
Not Applicable 12
Not Applicable 74
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable 79
Not Applicable 850
Not Applicable 8.3
Not Applicable 9
Not Applicable 24
Make Provision 133
Make Provision 36
Make Provision Make Provision 16
Not Applicable 125
Not Applicable Not Applicable 70
Not Applicable 129
Not Applicable 28
Not Applicable 190
Not Applicable 475
Make Provision 239
Make Provision 17
Not Applicable 130
Make Provision 110
Not Applicable 949
Pre‐Approved 949
Pre‐Approved 30
Not Applicable 54
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Electrical
Detail OPA Number Reference
HVAC
Plumb
Volts
Y
117
115
120
120
120
120
120
OPA‐1810 120
115
120
4/S8.10‐EQ
Y
6/S8.10‐EQ
120
120
Y
6/S8.10‐EQ
Y
Y
120
120
120
120
120
120
110
120
120
120
120
6/S8.10‐EQ
120
120
115
120
115
Y
120
120
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
R‐0220 R‐0220 5/S8.10‐EQ
5/S8.10‐EQ
~
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
Hz Phase
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
Single
Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
Amps
Watts
Data
Equip ID
D
ALLOI11 720 VA R
ANACO16 D
ANACO20 1.5 110 10 1150 VA M ANACO30 1.8 V
ANACO30A
V
ANACO30B
3.5 690 VA N
ANACO30C
150 VA D
ANAEL13 16 D
ANAFF01 V
ANAFF01A
7.0 D
ANALB51 10 D
ANALM04 1 U
ANALM30 U
ANALM30A
8 D
ANALM40 2.8 N
ANALM52 D
ANAPR24 1298 D
ANAPR24A
0.6 72 VA max D
ANAUR08 150 V
ANAUR15 250 V
ANAUR15A
240 D
ANAUR15B
3 max. 330 N
ANBGS01 1 110 N
ANBGS01B
0.5 D
ANBNP02 D
ANGLU05 N
ANGLU07 6 D
ANHEM32 650 U
ANLZB01 490 D
ANLZB02C
N
BALAN14 N
BALAN16 3.8 450 N
BATHD04 2.5 300 N
BATHT03 700 N
BATHT07 2.0 225 N
BATHW07 10 N
BATHW14 N
BATHW14A
N
BATHW14B
11 N
BATHW17 N
BENWK22 400 N
BLEND04 N
BOARD01 N
BOARD03 N
BOARD08 N
BOARD19 N
BOARD22 N
BUCKM03 N
CABBE09 N
CABBL01 N
CABFL03 N
CABFL06 N
CABFL13 N
CABFL14 N
CABFL24 N
CABMO58 N
CABSL03 N
CABSU03 N
CARHK11 N
CARSY24 N
CARSY25 N
CARTE40 N
CARTF04 N
CARTP03 N
CARTP51 N
CARTS23 N
CARTS23A
N
CARTS23B
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG TRMT BLDG
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Size
Equip ID
CARTT01 CARTU01 CARTU03 CARTU05 CARTU10 CARTU17 CARTU35 CARTU74 CASEP09 CENCY05 CENTC09 CENTC18 CENTC20 CENTC40 CENTM23 CENTR09 CENTR11 CENTR52 CENTR56 CENTR59 CENTU01 CHAIP02 CHAIP04 CHAIP40 CLOCM06 CLOCM06A
CLOCM06B
CLOCM06D
CLOCT03 COFFE15 COFFE15A
COFFE15B
CONIV20A
COOLW05 COPIE12 COPIE35 COPIF51 COPIF66 CREDT03 CRYOS09 DICTA10 DISNA07A
DISNA07B
DISNA07C
DISNA40 DISNA59 DISPG23 DISPG26 DISPG33 DISPP01 DOSEP01 DRYER04 DVDVC03 DVDXX07 DVDXZ50 EMBED08 EQUIP00 ESRSY04 FACSI11 FACSM01 FACSM21 FACSM45 FACSM46 FILEC01 FILEL05 FREBB02 FREEU07 FREEU52 Equipment Name
Fiberglass Waste Truck Stainless Steel Utility Cart Light‐Duty SS Utility Cart Molded 3‐Shelf Utility Cart Utility Cart, Stainless Steel Three‐Shelf Utility Cart Small Plastic Utility Cart Three‐Tier Plastic Utility Cart Pharmacy Department Casework Cytology Centrifuge Immunohematology Centrifuge Countertop Centrifuge Small Countertop Centrifuge Countertop Centrifuge Micro Centrifuge Refrigerated Countertop Centrifuge Refrigerated Countertop Centrifuge Countertop Centrifuge Countertop Centrifuge Countertop Centrifuge Ultracentrifuge Phlebotomy Chair Phlebotomy Chair Wide Phlebotomy Chair Wireless GPS Analog Wall Clock Transmitter for GPS Wireless Clock Sys Repeater for GPS Wireless Clock System Digital Event Timer Time System Badge Terminal Coffeemaker, Plumbed‐In Glass Decanters, Black Handle Glass Decanters, Orange Handle Cylinder Tank, "H" Size Hot and Cold Water Cooler Copier Copier Copier, 25000 Copies/Mo. Floorstanding Copier, 120,000 copies/mon
Credit Card Verification ‐ POS Cryostat with Microtome Dictation/Transcription Unit Single Auxiliary Narcotics Vault Double Auxiliary Narcotics Vault Double Integrated Main Narcotics Vault Meds Dispenser, Refrigerated Pyxis Central Computer Console Vertical Stack Triple Glove Box Holder Quadruple Glove Box Holder Triple Glove Box Holder Paraffin Heater/Dispenser Unit Dose Packaging System Glassware Dryer DVD / VCR Combination Deck DVD Player Wall Mount for DVD/VCR Players Tissue Embedding Center Room Contains No Equipment Erythrocyte Sedimentation Rate Analyzer Facsimile Machine Facsimile Machine MultifunctionFacsimile Machine Facsimile Machine Facsimile Machine 5‐Drawer Vertical File Cabinet 5‐Drawer Lateral File Cabinet Blood Bank Freezer Medical Grade Undercounter Freezer ‐20°C
Upright Lab Freezer 11/20/2012 ADD#7
130-202 Korbel
Manufacturer
McClure Industries Inc. Lakeside Manufacturing Inc. Lakeside Manufacturing Inc. Rubbermaid Products (Manufacturer Unknown) InterMetro Industries Corp. Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Lionville (now InterMetro) Thermo Electron (Shandon) Baxter Scientic Products Div. VWR Scientific StatSpin Inc., An Iris Company
Fisher Scientific Cardinal Health/Carefusion Beckman Coulter Instruments Heraeus Instruments (Kendro) The Drucker Company Thermo Fisher Scientific The Drucker Company Beckman Coulter Inc. Custom Comfort Medtek Custom Comfort Medtek Custom Comfort Medtek Primex Wireless Inc. Primex Wireless Inc. Primex Wireless Inc. Primex Wireless Inc. Kronos Bloomfield Industries Bloomfield Industries Bloomfield Industries (Manufacturer Unknown) Oasis Corporation Savin Corporation Savin Corporation Sharp Electronics Corporation Toshiba Copiers Hypercom Corporation Leica Inc. Lanier Worldwide‐Voice Product
Pyxis Corporation/Carefusion Pyxis Corporation/Carefusion Pyxis Corporation/Carefusion Talyst Pyxis Corporation/Carefusion Northern Acrylics Inc. MarketLab Northern Acrylics Inc. Thermo Electron (Shandon) Medical Packaging Products Steris Corporation Sony Corporation of America Sony Corporation of America Peerless Industries Inc. SAKURA Finetek U.S.A. Inc. (Manufacturer Unknown) Clinical Data Inc. Toshiba Copiers Toshiba Copiers Canon USA Inc. Toshiba America Consumer Prod.
Toshiba America Consumer Prod.
(Manufacturer Unknown) (Manufacturer Unknown) Helmer Labs, Inc. Follett Corporation Helmer Labs, Inc. Model
TC‐35FL 411 311 3424‐88 Utility Cart BC2636‐3D 4500‐88 9T65‐71 (budget allowance) Cytospin 4 A78300002 Dade Immufuge II Heraeus Megafuge 1.0 StatSpin MP 05‐101‐7 StatSpin Express 3, SSX3 Allegra X‐22R Multifuge 3 S‐R 853VES Multifuge 1 S 842VES Airfuge CLS Ultracentrifuge 1201‐LAH 1201‐LU Blood Draw Chair 14155 14000 Transmitter w/GPS Recvr 14006 Satellite Transmitter 14203E 4500 Badge Terminal Integrity 9012 89__ 89__ B1SRHS 9210 9022 AR‐275 E‐STUDIO 352 T7 Plus CM 1850 VoiceWriter 210 C II SAFE‐NV (Single Wide) C II SAFE‐NV (Double Wide) AutoCool MedStation 3500 ClearView Triple Box ML1053 New 225 Auto‐Print II Reliance 1024 SLV‐D370P DVP‐NS77H Multi‐Mount PM600 Tissue‐Tek TEC 5 Excyte 40 TF‐251 TF861 Laser Class 710 e‐Studio 170F DP85F i Series 125 FZR5 Horizon Series HLF120 Part
Sani‐Trux 086876173802 75003491 (VWR # 20300‐016) SSMP Thermo Scientific # 004260F B8900‐85 392187 75004371 Horizon Plasmafuge‐12 75004315 Horizon Plasmafuge‐6 362781‐03 (old NP1201‐LAH) (old NP1201‐LU) NP 1201‐LXL/XT with Receiver Switch M2A4N M2A8N 1100‐1575 1100‐18375 (Replaced by 3120069) 5100 EX‐10316 Based on Steelcase 100 Series IPF125‐8 Furnished Installed Mounting
By
By
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Portable
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
C
Maj Inst
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
C
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Wall‐Mtd
O
V
Counter O
V
Counter O
O
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Counter O
O
Portable
O
O
Portable
O
O
Counter O
C
FloorStd
O
V
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Counter O
V
FloorStd
O
V
FloorStd
O
V
FloorStd
O
V
FloorStd
O
V
FloorStd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
C
FloorStd
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
Counter O
O
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
OSHPD Weight (lbs.)
1000
42
29
27.5
Width
54
27.7
27.5
33.7
30
38.8
34.2
16.3
Depth
31
16.8
16.3
18.7
18
27
17.4
31.5
Height
47
33.4
32.2
37.8
32.5
41.5
32.6
36
16
10
18.1
6.7
14
10.5
18.1
28.9
12.5
19.7
11
11
35
35
44
12.5
17
17
23.3
10.8
8.6
24.5
12
20.5
6.7
16
10
27.8
26.2
15.5
24.2
13.5
15
23
24
29
2
12
12
3
4
18
9.5
9
15.3
5.3
11
7
14.6
14.3
8.5
14.4
8
8
34
36
41
12.5
1.9
1.9
8
11.8
18.8
26.5
17
121
5.5
24.2
8.8
172
288
30
203
23
23
95
85
110
12.6
44
48
25.5
26
5.2
26.4
7.6
31
52
52
31
30
10.5
10
18.8
12.6
23
24
23
29.8
10
27.4
9.4
28
28
27
38.5
24
3.8
4.3
4.1
54
42
41
25.5
46.5
2.5
45.9
2.6
79.5
79.5
76
82
49
15.8
24
9.9
36
36
16.9
16.9
20
35.6
15
32
11.3
8.3
13.5
25.3
14
80
3.3
1.7
8.3
14.8
33
163
141
92
270.1
1.5
288.2
3.1
320
600
600
750
153
6
8
6
13
65
650
7.9
4.2
45
105
13
12.3
25
19.7
19.3
18.7
15
36
30.8
23.8
30.8
12.3
9.5
21
19.7
33.5
27.8
28.5
18
38.5
27.5
32.5
7.9
4
15
18.2
17.1
17.1
60
63.6
80
34.1
80
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
11 70 00 - 2
46.5
31
26.5
7.8
7.8
6.5
5
32
11
61.7
51
35.3
39.7
136
600
145
455
OSHPD Approval
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Electrical
Detail OPA Number Reference
HVAC
Plumb
120
120
120
115
120
100
120
230
115
120
115
120
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Pre‐Approved Pre‐Approved Pre‐Approved Pending Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Pre‐Approved Not Applicable Not Applicable Make Provision Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Not Applicable Make Provision Volts
Y
Y
Y
OPA‐0517 OPA‐0517 OPA‐0517 OPA‐1328 120
120
120
115
120
115
120
115
120
115
120
2/S8.10‐EQ
2/S8.10‐EQ
2/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
120
120
120
117
115
115
6/S8.10‐EQ
115
115
208
120
120
115
Y
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
100
120
115
110
110
120
230
115
208
~
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
Hz Phase
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Three
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
Amps
Watts
150VA Data
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
3 N
6 1000 N
1.5 35 N
1.5 N
3 N
10.5 N
1550 N
200 N
1200 N
200 N
1 120 N
N
N
N
W
0.4 W
0.4 W
150 mA W
1.5 D
15 1800 N
N
N
N
5.5 N
15 1200 N
>15 N
12 1500 P
D
15 1500 max M
D
18 N
1.0 D
1.0 D
1.71 D
20 I
10 D
N
N
N
5.5 650 N
5.0 N
16 N
25 M
12 M
W
11 N
N
0.75 D
U
7.7 D
13 M
1000 max M
620 max M
N
N
8 FLA U
8.0 N
6 FLA U
Equip ID
CARTT01 CARTU01 CARTU03 CARTU05 CARTU10 CARTU17 CARTU35 CARTU74 CASEP09 CENCY05 CENTC09 CENTC18 CENTC20 CENTC40 CENTM23 CENTR09 CENTR11 CENTR52 CENTR56 CENTR59 CENTU01 CHAIP02 CHAIP04 CHAIP40 CLOCM06 CLOCM06A
CLOCM06B
CLOCM06D
CLOCT03 COFFE15 COFFE15A
COFFE15B
CONIV20A
COOLW05 COPIE12 COPIE35 COPIF51 COPIF66 CREDT03 CRYOS09 DICTA10 DISNA07A
DISNA07B
DISNA07C
DISNA40 DISNA59 DISPG23 DISPG26 DISPG33 DISPP01 DOSEP01 DRYER04 DVDVC03 DVDXX07 DVDXZ50 EMBED08 EQUIP00 ESRSY04 FACSI11 FACSM01 FACSM21 FACSM45 FACSM46 FILEC01 FILEL05 FREBB02 FREEU07 FREEU52 SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG TRMT BLDG
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Size
Equip ID
FREEZ65 FREEZ65A
FREEZ65B
FREEZ65C
FREEZ90 GLVBX02 GLVBX02A
HAMPE30 HEATB04 HEATB06 HEATB10 HOODA03 HOODB46 HOODB46B
HOODB51A
HOODB51B
HOODB51C
HOODB60 HOODB60A
HOODB71 HOODB75 HOODB75A
HOODF12 HOODF12A
HOODF50 HOODH07 ICEDR01 IDBKC01 INCUB30 INCUB61 INCUB77 INCUB79 INCUP09 INSTT04 LAMMA01 LAMMA01A
LAMMA02 LBGRS10 LBGRS10A
LBGRS10B
LIGEX03 LIGHF01 LIGMG02 LIGUV08 MATAF03 MICRT12 MICRT15 MIXDF09 MIXLB01 MIXVI01 MIXVO01 MIXWB07 MONIV78 MONIW01 MOUNT03 OSMOM05 OVEND07 OVENM37 OVENM48 OVENU03 OVENU16 PHLEB80 PHMET07 PLATE01 POWRS11 POWRS30 POWRS47 POWRS48 Equipment Name
Two‐Door Pharmacy Freezer Temperature Chart Recorder Alarm/Monitor Remote Monitor/Battery Backup Tissue Freezing Histobath 2 Anaerobic Glove Chamber Floor Stand for Anaerobic Glove Box Linen Hamper without Lid Heating Block Heating Block Heating Block Fume Adsorber Workstation 3' Biological Safety Cabinet Telescoping Stand for Biosafety Cabinet IV Bar for Biological Safety Cabinet UV Light for Biological Safety Cabinet Optional Telescoping Stand for Hood 4' Negative Pressure Barrier Isolator Exhaust Canopy Transition 4' Biological Safety Cabinet, Vert. Flow
Barrier Isolation Hood Motorized Base Stand for Isolation Hood Fume Hood‐ 36"w Allowance‐ Blower/Accessories Bench Top Vent. Hood Horizontal Laminar Flow Hood, 74"w Dry Ice Maker Bookcase Microbiology Incubator Large C02 Incubator Laboratory Incubator Air‐Jacketed Automatic CO2 Incubator Platelet Incubator Large Instrument Table, 60"w x 24"d Magnification Lamp Edge Clamp for Magnification Lamp Magnification Lamp 5' Grossing Station ALL Accessories for Grossing Station Seismic Anchor Kit Gooseneck Exam Light Wall‐Mounted Flashlight Magnifier Light Handheld UV Lamp Anti‐Fatigue Matting, 60"x 36" Motorized Rotary Microtome Rotary Microtome Chemical Proportioning Unit Lab Mixer Activation Device for Definity Vial Vortex Mixer Whole Blood Tube Mixer/Shaker 42" Flat Panel Plasma Display 52" Professional LCD Monitor Flat Panel Wall Mount (Up to 26") Micro‐Osmometer Drying Oven Commercial Microwave Oven Compact Microwave Oven Lab Utility Oven Lab Utility Oven Wheelchair Phlebotomy Arm pH Benchtop Meter Hot Plate Uninterruptible Power Source Uninterruptible Power Source Uninterruptible Power Source Uninterruptible Power Source 11/20/2012 ADD#7
130-202 Korbel
Manufacturer
Gem Scientific Gem Scientific Gem Scientific Gem Scientific Thermo Electron (Shandon) Sheldon Manufacturing Inc. Sheldon Manufacturing Inc. Centicare Corporation Barnstead International Lab‐Line‐Barnstead/Thermolyne Techne (Bibby Scientific US) Hacker Instruments Inc. The Baker Company The Baker Company The Baker Company The Baker Company The Baker Company NuAire NuAire The Baker Company NuAire NuAire Fisher Hamilton Inc Fisher Hamilton Inc Kewaunee Scientific Corp. NuAire Bel‐Art Products (Manufacturer Unknown) Precision Scientific Inc. Lab‐Line‐Barnstead/Thermolyne Thermo Electron Corp Lab‐Line‐Barnstead/Thermolyne Helmer Labs, Inc. Blickman Health Industries Luxo Lamp Corporation Luxo Lamp Corporation Luxo Lamp Corporation Mopec Inc. Mopec Inc. Mopec Inc. Philips Burton Black & Decker Dazor Manufacturing Corp. UVP Inc. Cactus Mat Manufacturing Co. Microm (div. of Richard‐Allan)
Leica Inc. Hydro Systems Company VWR Scientific Lantheus Medical Imaging Barnstead International Barnstead International Fujitsu Sharp Electronics Corporation Chief Manufacturing Inc. Advanced Instruments Inc. Lindberg / Blue M Amana (div of Maytag Corp) Best Buy Corp./Commercial Boekel Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Custom Comfort Medtek Thermo Fisher Scientific Fisher Scientific American Power Conversion American Power Conversion PowerWare Tripp Lite Model
2DF GTR GMS Temp. Monitor Histobath 2 Bactron II STDII 3300D Thermolyne Dri‐Bath‐17600 Lab‐line 2093 DB‐3 Down Draft Fume Extractor SterilGARD III Advance SG303 IV Bar UV Light Hood Stand NU‐NR797‐400 NU‐916‐797 SterilchemGARD III Advance Pharmagard 797 Pharmagard 797 SafeAire 54L586 Visionaire View 2010 NU‐301‐630 (AireGard 301) Frigimat 30M 393 Lab‐Line Imperial III 302 490 Horizon Series Howard 7836SS (w/ Lower Shelf)
The Wave Plus 30" Reach: K‐Arm
50001 KFM‐2/FE 3D MB600 MB600 SA100 for MB600 Pearl Light SPOT LITER 8MC‐200 Circline Magnifier Blak Ray UVL‐56 Cushion Comfort C Style HM 355 S RM2125 TaskMizer Dual Select S8220‐1 VIALMIX Maxi‐Mix II, Type 37600 Labquake P42HCA51WH (old P42HCA11WH) PN‐525U FWD‐110 Dual Arm Wall Mount Micro‐Osmometer 3300 OV‐8A RCS10MP GE Model JES735BF 107800 Precision 3051 BB5905 Orion 2 Star Ceramic Top Hotplate 400 SUA750XL PW5115 1000 USB SMART750XL Furnished Installed Mounting
Part
By
By
O
C
FloorStd
O
O
Accssry O
O
Accssry O
O
Wall‐Mtd
2431030 O
O
Counter O
C
Counter O
C
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
DB17615 Type 17600 O
O
Counter O
O
Counter 1081400 O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
SG403ATX O
C
FloorStd
NU‐PR797‐400 O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
Maj Inst
O
C
Maj Inst
O
O
Counter O
C
FloorStd
ScienceLab.com # 60‐388780010 O
O
Counter (based on Hon 1870 Series) O
C
FloorStd
3971 O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Counter PC100h O
O
Counter 0117836000 O
O
FloorStd
17846 O
O
Counter O
O
Counter 17253 O
O
Counter O
C
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
0183010CH O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
Counter 95‐0006‐02 O
O
Counter Style 1075 O
O
FloorStd
905480 O
O
Counter 14045737988 O
O
Counter 48792 O
V
Wall‐Mtd
(Replaced by #58799‐945) O
O
Counter 515030‐1201 O
O
Counter M37615 O
O
Counter 415110 O
O
Counter O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
Wall‐Mtd
C
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter UPC 042159050697 O
O
Counter O
O
Counter PR305165‐G O
O
Counter O
C
Wall‐Mtd
1111000 O
O
Counter 11‐501‐7H O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
Width
62.3
Depth
34.3
Height
82.5
OSHPD Weight Detail (lbs.)
OSHPD Approval
OPA Number Reference
900
Make Provision 7/S8.10‐EQ
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable 55
Not Applicable 690
Make Provision 6/S8.10‐EQ
180
Make Provision 50
Not Applicable 2.5
Not Applicable Not Applicable 13
Not Applicable 48
Not Applicable 397
Pending OPA‐2240‐07 1/S8.10‐EQ
110
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable 100
Not Applicable 700
Pending 1/S8.10‐EQ
19.3
62.5
61.5
18.5
8
12
10.2
25
35.7
31.5
13.5
32.5
30
20
9
11
11
19
30.7
27.9
14.8
29.5
31
33.5
4
8
4.1
16
63.3
28.5
50
32.5
36.6
51.8
53.7
50
54.3
36
25
74
12
36
36
42
16
27.3
21.3
60
9
30.6
32.5
32.5
31.3
19.7
25
32
6.5
12
30
35
21
26.8
16.3
24
6
100.9
51.5
33
60.8
25.8
30
72.8
5
72
88
91
29.5
34
25
35
30
685
1020
75
245
105
200
11
60
29
86.3
37
800
5
6
42
14.9
36
20.5
18.5
6.8
5
7.7
7
4
3.3
5.9
15.9
14
16
19.8
13.5
13.5
23.5
24
8.8
9.6
14.5
17.3
13.2
16.8
9.5
596
425
150
485
245
40
430
12
15
3.2
60
16.1
11.6
11
6
7.7
4.5
18.5
40.7
49.4
13
10.5
13
21.8
19
13.8
25.8
26
6.7
9
4.7
6.7
5.9
6.8
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
11 70 00 - 3
2.5
0.5
11
15.7
18
4
6.3
6
6
25.2
29.2
12.2
15
18
14.3
11
16.5
39.3
3.7
5
6.6
8.5
7.6
8.8
15
2
15
79.4
64
4
9
8.3
7
4
65
97
8
14
50
25
25
140
2
5
21.6
53
27.8
45.5
Pending OPA‐2240‐07 1/S8.10‐EQ
Pending 1/S8.10‐EQ
Not Applicable Make Provision 6/S8.10‐EQ
Not Applicable Not Applicable Pre‐Approved OPA‐0536 1/S8.10‐EQ
Not Applicable Make Provision 6/S8.10‐EQ
Make Provision 6/S8.10‐EQ
Make Provision 6/S8.10‐EQ
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Make Provision 6/S8.10‐EQ
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Electrical
HVAC
Y
Plumb
Volts
230
115
120
120
115
120
115
115
115
Y
115
115
120
120
115
115
Y
120
120
120
120
115
110
120
115
120
110
115
115
Y
Y
115
120
120
120
120
120
110
120
120
120
120
120
Y
110
120
120
~
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
Hz Phase
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
Amps
11 4.2 9.17 .63 2 3 9.0 6 9 6 6.0 Watts
1100 75 200 650 426 460 50 754 15 12.1 1450 11.7 1400 2.5 300 7.1 850 8 FLA 0.009 7 22 20 60 0.38 1.8 6 1.6 72 3 330 VA .52 62 0.5 4.4 325 .8 100 525 13.8 1700 700 660 11 1320 0.5 9.2 1100 600 Data
U
N
N
M
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
R
R
N
N
N
N
N
U
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
V
D
N
D
N
I
N
N
N
N
R
N
U
M
M
M
Equip ID
FREEZ65 FREEZ65A
FREEZ65B
FREEZ65C
FREEZ90 GLVBX02 GLVBX02A
HAMPE30 HEATB04 HEATB06 HEATB10 HOODA03 HOODB46 HOODB46B
HOODB51A
HOODB51B
HOODB51C
HOODB60 HOODB60A
HOODB71 HOODB75 HOODB75A
HOODF12 HOODF12A
HOODF50 HOODH07 ICEDR01 IDBKC01 INCUB30 INCUB61 INCUB77 INCUB79 INCUP09 INSTT04 LAMMA01 LAMMA01A
LAMMA02 LBGRS10 LBGRS10A
LBGRS10B
LIGEX03 LIGHF01 LIGMG02 LIGUV08 MATAF03 MICRT12 MICRT15 MIXDF09 MIXLB01 MIXVI01 MIXVO01 MIXWB07 MONIV78 MONIW01 MOUNT03 OSMOM05 OVEND07 OVENM37 OVENM48 OVENU03 OVENU16 PHLEB80 PHMET07 PLATE01 POWRS11 POWRS30 POWRS47 POWRS48 SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG TRMT BLDG
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Size
Equip ID
PREPC02 PRFXC21 PRFXC40 PRINB28 PRINB34 PRINF04 PRINL80 PRINS03 PRINS04 PRINT88 PRINU03 PRINU52 PRINU71 PRINU74 PRINU83 PRINV34 PRINV38 PRINV39 PRINV40 PRINV71 PRINV88 PRINV91 PRINX14 PRINX21 PRINX30 PRINX31 PRINX61 PRINX66 PRINX71 PRINX75 PRINX82 PRINX91 PROCT09 PROJV20 PROJV20A
PUMPP14 PUMPP14A
PUMPR01 PUMPR03 PUNCH01 RACKG12 RACKM04 RACKM04A
READB02 RECBH07 RECBH13 RECCT07 RECRC07 RECSH02 RECSH02A
RECSH10 RECSH11 RECSH11B
RECSH12 RECSH33 RECSH33B
RECSH51 REFBB17 REFBB18 REFBB30 REFON39 REFRZ09 REFRZ45 REFTH08 REFTH11 REFTW29 REFTW31 REFTW40 Equipment Name
Cytology Prep System Fax/Copier/Printer Combo Unit Color Printer/Copier/Fax/Scan Direct Thermal Label Printer Barcode Label Printer Forms Printer Line Printer with Cabinet Lab Slide Printer & Unload Station Lab Cassette Printer & Unload Station Dot Matrix Printer Dot Matrix Printer Personal Laser Printer Inkjet Color Printer Dot Matrix Printer Desktop Laser Printer Laser Printer, Black & White Laserjet Printer Laserjet Printer Color Laser Printer Dot Matrix Printer Black & White Laser Printer Monochrome Laser Printer Laser Printer Desktop Laser Printer Color Inkjet Printer Bubble Jet Printer Network Laser Printer Graphic Laser Printer Network Laser Printer Desktop Printer Laser Printer Laser Printer Tissue Processor, Benchtop LCD Video Projector Ceiling Mount for LCD Video Projector Pharmacy (PN) Compounder‐ Control Unit Pharmacy (PN) Compounder‐ Pump Unit Repeater Pharmacy Pump Pharmacy Pump Electric 3‐Hole Punch, Commercial Rack for 4 H/T Gas Cylinders Mop Rack / Closet Organizer, 34"w Hook Set for Mop Rack Blood Bank Tube Viewer Biohazardous Waste Container Hazardous Waste Receptacle, 2 Gallon Hazardous Waste Receptacle Mobile Recycle Receptacle w/ Lid, 50 Gal
Sharps Receptacle, 8 Gallon Mobile Floor Bracket for Sharps Recep. Sharps Receptacle ‐ 3 Gallon Sharps Receptacle 9 Gallon Receptacle Trolley Sharps Receptacle ‐ 18 Gallon/67 Litres Wall Enclosure for 8‐Quart Sharps 8‐qt. Sharps Receptacle Liner Sharps Container‐ 6‐Gallon One‐Door Blood Bank Refrigerator Two‐Door Blood Bank Refrigerator Undercounter Blood Bank Refrigerator 1‐Door Laboratory Refrigerator Refrigerator/Freezer 17 cf Refrigerator/Freezer, w/o Icemaker
Three‐Door Lab Refrigerator Three‐Door Pass‐Through Refrigerator Two‐Door Lab Refrigerator with Monitor Two‐Door Pass‐Through Refrigerator Two‐Door Pharmacy Refrigerator 11/20/2012 ADD#7
130-202 Korbel
Manufacturer
Cytyc Div. of Hologic Sharp Electronics Corporation Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Cognitive Solutions Inc. Datasouth Computer Lexmark, An IBM Alliance Co. Printronix Leica Inc. Leica Inc. Okidata Okidata Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. AMT Datasouth Corporation Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Epson America, Inc. Xerox Business Systems Lexmark, An IBM Alliance Co. Lexmark, An IBM Alliance Co. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Canon USA Inc. Lexmark, An IBM Alliance Co. Brother International Corp. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. SAKURA Finetek U.S.A. Inc. NEC Technologies Inc. Chief Manufacturing Inc. Baxter Healthcare‐IV Sys. Div.
Baxter Healthcare‐IV Sys. Div.
Baxa Corporation Baxa Corporation Acco Brands Inc Anthony Welded Products Inc. Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Fisher Scientific White Mop Wringer now AMP Fisher Scientific Hospitec Inc. Rubbermaid Products Covidien (formerly Kendall) Covidien (formerly Kendall) Stericycle Corporation Fisher Scientific BD Medical Systems BD Medical Systems Covidien (formerly Kendall) Covidien (formerly Kendall) VWR Scientific Helmer Labs, Inc. Helmer Labs, Inc. Follett Corporation Helmer Labs, Inc. Sears Contract & Indus. Sales Sears Contract & Indus. Sales Kendro (formerly Revco) Gem Scientific Helmer Labs, Inc. Gem Scientific Gem Scientific Model
ThinPrep 2000 AR‐235 Imager HP OfficeJet 7310 All‐In‐One Blaster Advantage BD422003‐C07
Fastmark 4602 2481 P7215 IP S IP C Microline 520 MICROLINE 320 Turbo, ML320T LaserJet 1100 Series DeskJet 6122 AMT ACCEL‐6310 d LaserJet 4100n HP LaserJet 4350n LaserJet 4250n LaserJet 2430tn LaserJet 2600n DFX‐9000 Phaser 3500 E250DN E323 LaserJet 4300n DeskJet 5650 BJC‐250 T640dn HL‐5150D LaserJet 5200dtn DeskJet 6122 LaserJet P3005 LaserJet 4200tn Tissue Tek VIP 5 NP1000 RPA‐1065 Automix 3+3 Automix 3+3 095 Repeater Pump 099 Swingline 74525 MCR‐400 1993 (Closet Org/Tool Holder) 1994 (Value Kit) BD # 420630 13605‐6 (Red) (old 1362536) Kendall 8602RC Haz‐Butler MBT‐600P‐2 9W27‐73 8980AC 8992H BD 305423 BD 305616 305556 In‐Room System 85321 BD305457 iB125 iB256 REF5‐BB Horizon #HLR125 Kenmore 46‐33721 Kenmore 46‐61752 REL‐7504A Model 65 Pass‐Thru iLR256 2DR Pass‐Thru 45 Pass‐Thru Part
Q5562A 62411601 C8954B Q5407A Q5401A Q5961A Q6455A C11C605001 C6490E 20G0130 Q7546A C8954B Q7812A Q2427A 5214 H938 099 3 SWI74525 (price per one; sold 4/pack) 22‐252‐490 22‐031‐376 (Sold per 6; Prices per each) (old 9W27‐06) (Price per one; sold 3/case) 14‐823‐70 85301H 500907‐1 (Replaced by 46‐36642) (old 46‐60752, 46‐31642) (with sliding doors) Swinging Doors Furnished Installed Mounting
By
By
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Cart‐Mtd
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
C
Ceiling O
O
Accssry O
O
Accssry O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Accssry O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Portable
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
C
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
OSHPD Weight (lbs.)
41
92.2
26.2
3.9
24.6
21.6
275
94.9
97.1
17.6
15.4
16
13.5
48
45.7
45
45
48.5
40.5
75
38
25
19.9
46
11.7
5.5
49.1
37
73
14.8
35.7
60
352
16.1
Width
18
24.5
21.6
6.8
9.8
25
27
21.6
21.6
17
15.7
14.5
17.9
19
15.4
16.5
16.5
16.7
16.1
27.6
15.6
15.6
15.4
16.4
17.7
14.2
16.6
15
19.3
17.9
16.7
16.4
47.2
15.7
5.5
18.5
20.5
7
8.3
16.5
29
34
Depth
15
23
17.2
9.4
16
11.4
29
21.7
21.7
15
13.6
12.8
14.9
16.8
19.9
17.8
17.8
15.7
17.8
14.9
18.6
14.1
14.2
16.9
14.6
8.5
25.1
15.8
23.6
17.3
16.1
16.9
23.6
14.1
5.5
6
12.5
10
12.8
6
20
4.3
Height
19.5
25.5
11.4
6.1
10.2
7.7
41
25.8
25.8
6.5
4.6
14.9
7.3
11.4
13.6
14.8
14.8
15.7
14.6
14.3
13.9
10.2
8.7
14.4
5.7
6.8
15.6
13.9
15.9
7.3
12.2
19.2
27.5
6.6
1.8
7.5
21.5
10
9.8
10
30
3.3
5
18
10.5
17
23.4
15.3
20.3
14.5
17.8
24
8
18
7.3
12
28.5
10.8
11.3
24.8
11.8
15.5
12
30
10
23
36.5
17.3
19
31.8
18.5
22
14.5
6.5
17.5
21.8
13.2
27.2
5.2
14.8
22
29.2
2
12.5
29
59.3
23.8
29
28
28
85
78
59
62.1
54
8.5
36
38.5
27.5
36
30.8
31.4
33.5
31.5
36
35.8
31.5
17.5
79.8
79.8
34
79.5
64.2
65.1
77.5
71
78.5
82
71
559
890
205
476
210
190
805
1100
793
800
840
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
11 70 00 - 4
7
31
30
24.2
12
56
10.9
0.7
7
46
OSHPD Approval
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Make Provision Make Provision Not Applicable Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Electrical
Detail OPA Number Reference
HVAC
Y
Y
Y
Plumb
Volts
120
120
120
120
110
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
110
120
120
110
110
110
120
120
120
120
120
100
120
120
120
110
120
120
120
115
120
115
115
120
120
120
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
6/S8.10‐EQ
Y
Y
Y
Y
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
120
115
120
120
~
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
Hz
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
Phase
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Amps
Watts
Data
Equip ID
2 N
PREPC02 12.5 D
PRFXC21 75 max D
PRFXC40 40 D
PRINB28 2.5 D
PRINB34 38 D
PRINF04 390 D
PRINL80 700 VA D
PRINS03 700 VA D
PRINS04 70 VA D
PRINT88 100 maximum D
PRINU03 200 N
PRINU52 35 D
PRINU71 2.5 V
PRINU74 4 D
PRINU83 790 V
PRINV34 10 675 V
PRINV38 325 V
PRINV39 190 D
PRINV40 200 D
PRINV71 6.5 D
PRINV88 500 D
PRINV91 3.5 375 D
PRINX14 450 max. D
PRINX21 22 D
PRINX30 0.5 V
PRINX31 D
PRINX61 8 675 460 M PRINX66 600 D
PRINX71 35 D
PRINX75 600 D
PRINX82 580 D
PRINX91 11 N
PROCT09 4.6 365 M PROJV20 N
PROJV20A
45 D
PUMPP14 M PUMPP14A
200 N
PUMPR01 200 VA N
PUMPR03 1 N
PUNCH01 N
RACKG12 N
RACKM04 N
RACKM04A
0.5 N
READB02 N
RECBH07 N
RECBH13 N
RECCT07 N
RECRC07 N
RECSH02 N
RECSH02A
N
RECSH10 N
RECSH11 N
RECSH11B
N
RECSH12 N
RECSH33 N
RECSH33B
N
RECSH51 7.6 R
REFBB17 11.5 R
REFBB18 8 D
REFBB30 7.5 M REFON39 4.75 480 N
REFRZ09 4.5 N
REFRZ45 16 N
REFTH08 11 N
REFTH11 11.5 D
REFTW29 11 N
REFTW31 11 N
REFTW40 SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG TRMT BLDG
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Size
Equip ID
REFUN10 REFUN51 REFUN69 REGIS11 ROTAT13 ROTAT21 SAFEX03 SCALE16 SCAND12 SCAND35 SCOPE39 SCOPE40 SCOPE41 SCOPE46 SCOPE49 SCOPE67 SCOPE69 SCOPE73 SCOPZ04 SCREN01 SCREP04 SEALH06 SHELF01 SHELF02 SHELF04 SHELF10 SHELF46 SHELF64 SHELP06 SHELP12 SHELV40 SHELV69 SHELW48 SHIEL01 SHIEL25 SHRPA56 STAIN04 STAIN16A
STAIN22 STAIN30 STAIN30A
STAIN52 STEPS01 STEPS25 STIRH05 STOOL03 STOSU03 STRTP10 STRTR04 TABLF02 TEGXX02 TELEF14 TELEV97 TELEZ11 TELEZ12 TERMC01 TERMF15 TERMF17 TERMF19 TERMF20 TERMF21 TERMF24 TERMP08 TERMW01 TERMW01A
TERMW01B
TERMW05 TERMW05A
Equipment Name
Undercounter Refrigerator/Freezer Med Grade Underctr. Refrig‐ ADA Height Lab/Pharmacy Undercounter Refrigerator ADL Cash Register Rotator Lab Rotators Security Safe Patient Scale Document Scanner Document Scanner Clinical Lab Microscope Phase Polarizing Microscope Clinical Microscope, Dual Side‐by‐Side Microscope Clinical Microscope, Dual Face‐to‐Face Ergonomic Microscope Clinical Microscope Stereomicroscope Microscope Camera Folding Privacy Screen Ceiling‐Mtd Electric Projection Screen Impulse Heat Sealer Mobile Wire Shelving, 4 Tiers Mobile Wire Shelving, 60"w x 18"d Mobile Chrome Wire Shelving, 4 Tiers Mobile Wire Shelving, 4 Tiers Six‐Tier Filing Unit with Flipper Doors S/S Mobile Shelving Unit Pharmacy Shelving Unit Allow. Pharmacy Shallow‐Depth Shelving Unit Chrome Wire Shelving, 36"w x 18"d Chrome Wire Shelving, 60"w x 18"d Mobile Wire Shelving, 48"w x 24"d Splash Shield Benchtop Adjustable Splash Shield Confidential Paper Collection Box Hematology Slide Stainer Accessories for Staining Module Automatic Slide Stainer Automatic Staining Module Bulk Fluid Module for Staining System Automatic Linear Stainer Rolling Step Stool Step Stool with Handrail Hot Plate Utility Stool without Back Hydraulic Surgical Stool with Round Seat
Procedure/Recovery Stretcher PACU/Recovery Stretcher Folding Conference Table, 84"w x 18"d Thrombelastograph (TEG) Coag Analyzer 52" Widescreen LCD HDTV 42" Plasma Television Wall Mt for Flat Screen 32" to 56" TV Wall Mount for Flat Screen‐ 37" to 60" Computer CPU 15" Flat Panel Monitor 17" Flat Panel Monitor 19" Flat Panel Monitor 20" Flat Panel Monitor 21" Flat Panel Monitor 24" Flat Panel Monitor w/ Stand Pocket PC Wall Mount for CPU, Monitor, & Keyboard Wall Mount LCD Arm Track Mount Bracket Kit Wall Mount for CPU, Monitor, & Keyboard Articulating Arm for Flat Panel Displays
11/20/2012 ADD#7
130-202 Korbel
Manufacturer
Marvel Scientific Follett Corporation Helmer Labs, Inc. Sharp Electronics Corporation Fisher Scientific Barnstead International Gardall Safe Corporation Detecto div Cardinal Scale Mfg
Hewlett‐Packard Business Sys. Fujitsu Leica Inc. Olympus America Inc. Olympus America Inc. Olympus America Inc. Olympus America Inc. Olympus America Inc. Nikon Inc., Instrument Group American Optical Nikon Inc., Instrument Group Winco Incorporated Da‐Lite Screen Company Uline Shipping Supply InterMetro Industries Corp. InterMetro Industries Corp. InterMetro Industries Corp. InterMetro Industries Corp. Holga Inc. (see HONCO) InterMetro Industries Corp. Herman Miller Inc. (Furniture)
(Manufacturer Unknown) InterMetro Industries Corp. InterMetro Industries Corp. InterMetro Industries Corp. Datar, Inc. VWR Scientific (Manufacturer Unknown) Bayer Corp. Diagnostics/Siemen
Ventana Medical Systems, Inc. Leica Inc. Ventana Medical Systems, Inc. Ventana Medical Systems, Inc. SAKURA Finetek U.S.A. Inc. Cramer Inc. Pedigo (Manufacturer Unknown) Pedigo Stryker Medical Stryker Medical Stryker Medical Berco Tableworks Ltd Haemoscope Corporation Sharp Electronics Corporation Philips Electronics Peerless Industries Inc. Peerless Industries Inc. (Manufacturer Unknown) (Manufacturer Unknown) (Manufacturer Unknown) (Manufacturer Unknown) (Manufacturer Not Identified) (Manufacturer Unknown) (Manufacturer Unknown) Symbol Technologies, Inc. Ergotron Inc. Ergotron Inc. Ergotron Inc. GCX Corporation GCX Corporation Model
6CRF REF4‐ADA (31.3"h for ADA ctop)
iLR105 ER‐A330 Clinical Rotator 341 2314Q RC1228C Depository Safe 439 ScanJet 5300Cxi fi‐5120C DM LS (LSR B CL HP) BX40 BX40 BH2 BX41 w/ Dual‐View Attachment BX45 Eclipse 50i 1810 FX‐35WA 3130 Senior Electrol 70 X 70 H‐963 Mobile 3 Wire Tiers & 1 Solid 5 Tiers: 4 Wire, Bottom Solid N356BC #74UP(4), #5MP(4), #A2448NC(4)
Stem Caster Cart, 6 Tiers SH‐200 16667‐110 Hema‐Tek 2000 (4488) Autostainer XL NexES Special Stains NexES Special Stains Tissue‐Tek Prisma The Original Kik‐Step P‐10‐A American Dade Tek‐Plate 20 P‐35 830‐1 Surgistool II 1550 Synergy Series 1500 Consta‐Care I Proteus Plus PF‐1884 TEG 5000 Thrombelastograph Aquos HD Series 42" Plasma SmartMount ST650 SmartMount ST660 (Info Sys Dept to Specify) (Info Sys Dept to Specify) (Info Sys Dept to Specify) (Info Sys Dept to Specify) (Info Sys Dept to Specify) (Info Sys Dept to Specify) (Info Sys Dept to Specify) SPT 1800 Series LX Wall Mount, 45‐238‐194 45‐180‐194 97‐091 VHC Variable Height Channel M‐Series 8"x8" Articulating Ar
Furnished Installed Mounting
Part
By
By
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Counter 14‐252Q O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
7693A O
O
Counter O
V
Counter 501095/501055/501062/506094 O
O
Counter O
O
Counter Dual‐Viewing Microscope O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter MBA85020 O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Accssry (Old 313) O
O
FloorStd
40584 O
C
Ceiling O
O
Counter O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
SEE ACCESSORIES O
C
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
1836NC (x5); 74P (x4) O
C
FloorStd
1860NC (x5); 74P (x4) O
C
FloorStd
O
C
FloorStd
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter (Receptacle‐ not a Shredder) O
O
FloorStd
(formerly Miles Diagnostics) O
O
Counter O
O
Counter ST 5010 O
O
Counter N750‐NXSS‐M (SM 850‐000) O
O
Counter N750‐NXSS (BFM 850‐001) O
O
Counter Automated Slide Stainer O
C
Counter 1001 O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
H2140‐1 O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
Extended Stay Stretcher O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Counter LC‐52D64U O
C
Wall‐Mtd
42PF9936D/37 O
O
Counter O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
Special O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Cart‐Mtd
O
O
Counter O
O
Wall‐Mtd
(typical of Dell) O
O
Counter TRG80400 O
O
Counter (Replaces LX 28‐518‐194) O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
FWM‐0001‐13 O
C
Wall‐Mtd
FLP‐0009‐05 O
C
Wall‐Mtd
OSHPD Weight (lbs.)
90
175
188
37
7
17
160
38
8.1
8.4
19.8
25.3
25.3
Width
23.9
24
24
17
8
13.6
14.5
16.3
12
11.9
11.5
11.1
11.1
10
11.2
11.1
7.2
7
Depth
24
25.5
29
17
10.5
12.5
13
21
20
6.6
15.6
17.4
17.4
15
24.4
18
15.1
10.5
Height
34.5
31.3
33.5
14
4.5
4.4
25
59
4
6.2
17
15.7
15.7
18
17
21.3
14.1
23
82
93
3
60
60
48
48
36
9.5
20
24
18
18
24
13.5
69
11.3
8
69
68
69
80
78
48
30
36
60
48
14
12
19
18.5
15.5
7
18
18
24
12
15
19
14.5
79
84
74.6
74.6
80
20
38
40
9
42.9
16
13.5
62
16
16
4.5
14
26.4
20
14.5
28
16
12
4.5
14
20.1
13.5
13.5
24.7
14
38.5
5
27
143.4
40
30
330
8.3
20
5
20
84
33
84
9.8
45.7
47.9
30.9
34.1
7.1
14.4
14.8
16.3
17.6
18.4
22.1
3.6
34
84
18
10.2
12.8
3.6
2.6
2.6
15
8
7.6
8.5
9.7
10.2
8.5
7
22
325
290
30
11.4
32.9
26
18.5
18.5
14.2
14
15.6
16.5
25
18.6
19.6
1
24
6.5
1.2
16.5
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
11 70 00 - 5
49
25.3
9
25
133
12.7
112
108
72
90
63.5
101
35
13.2
74.9
95
7.9
8.2
24.2
9
11
19.5
18.7
20.9
21.8
10.6
49
11
1
12
5.5
OSHPD Approval
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Electrical
Detail OPA Number Reference
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Make Provision Not Applicable Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Make Provision Not Applicable Make Provision Pre‐Approved OPA‐0556 Pre‐Approved OPA‐0556 Make Provision Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable HVAC
Plumb
Volts
120
115
115
120
115
120
115
100
115
120
120
115
120
120
120
120
120
115
5/S8.10‐EQ
5/S8.10‐EQ
5/S8.10‐EQ
5/S8.10‐EQ
5/S8.10‐EQ
5/S8.10‐EQ
5/S8.10‐EQ
5/S8.10‐EQ
3/S8.10‐EQ
3/S8.10‐EQ
120
Y
110
120
120
Not Applicable Not Applicable 120
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Pre‐Approved Pre‐Approved Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Pre‐Approved Not Applicable Not Applicable Pre‐Approved 120
120
120
120
OPA‐1546 OPA‐1546 120
115
120
115
120
115
120
OPA‐2338‐07 OPA‐1665‐07 ~
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
Hz
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
Phase
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Amps
Watts
2.5 8.0 5.0 FLA 0.3 38 0.026 .4 50 19 max. 34 30 80 VA 80 VA 20 30 80 VA 0.9 29 2.5 310 0.6 70 4 8 9 3.3 7.0 0.42 46 290 450 3 typical 300 25 70 55 55 65 2 max Data
N
U
D
N
N
N
N
N
D
D
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
U
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
D
U
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
V
M
D
N
N
D
N
N
N
V
N
V
W
N
N
N
N
N
Equip ID
REFUN10 REFUN51 REFUN69 REGIS11 ROTAT13 ROTAT21 SAFEX03 SCALE16 SCAND12 SCAND35 SCOPE39 SCOPE40 SCOPE41 SCOPE46 SCOPE49 SCOPE67 SCOPE69 SCOPE73 SCOPZ04 SCREN01 SCREP04 SEALH06 SHELF01 SHELF02 SHELF04 SHELF10 SHELF46 SHELF64 SHELP06 SHELP12 SHELV40 SHELV69 SHELW48 SHIEL01 SHIEL25 SHRPA56 STAIN04 STAIN16A
STAIN22 STAIN30 STAIN30A
STAIN52 STEPS01 STEPS25 STIRH05 STOOL03 STOSU03 STRTP10 STRTR04 TABLF02 TEGXX02 TELEF14 TELEV97 TELEZ11 TELEZ12 TERMC01 TERMF15 TERMF17 TERMF19 TERMF20 TERMF21 TERMF24 TERMP08 TERMW01 TERMW01A
TERMW01B
TERMW05 TERMW05A
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG TRMT BLDG
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Size
Equip ID
TERMW05B
TERMW05C
TERMW05D
TERMW05E
TIMER05 TIMER08 TIMER11 TURBI01 VIEWM01 WARMC03 WARMS02 WASBH21 WASHC01 WASTE01 WASTE03 WASTE04 WASTE04A
WASTE04B
WASTE40 WASTE44 WASTE53 WASTE58 WASTF02 WORKC15 WORKC15A
WORKC15B
WORKC15C
WORKC48 Equipment Name
Articulating Arm w/ Swivel Only Head Keyboard Tray for Mounting System Fold up Keyboard Bracket CPU Holder with Wall Channel Lab Multiple Test Timer Programmable Multi‐Timer Time Recorder Turbidity Meter Microdilution Viewer Contrast Media Warmer Slide Warming Table Biohazardous Waste Receptacle, 44 Gallon
Cell Washer, Blood Bank Fire‐Resistant Waste Receptacle, 28 Qt Waste Receptacle, 23 Gallon Waste Receptacle, 44 Gallon Dolly for Waste Receptacle Cover for Waste Receptacle Recycling Container for Paper, 23‐Gallon
Waste Receptacle, Bullet Shape Recycling Container, 23 Gallon Recycling Container, 28 Quart 95‐Gallon Waste Container Mobile Computer Cart LCD Arm Keyboard Arm Keyboard Tray Variable Height Wall Mounted CPU Wrkstn Manufacturer
GCX Corporation GCX Corporation GCX Corporation GCX Corporation Baxter Scientic Products Div. Fisher Scientific Amano Electronics of America VWR Scientific Dade Behring, Inc./Siemens Merry X‐Ray Lab‐Line‐Barnstead/Thermolyne Rubbermaid Products Kendro Laboratory Products Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Rubbermaid Products Ergotron Inc. Ergotron Inc. Ergotron Inc. Ergotron Inc. GCX Corporation Model
M‐Series 8"x8" Articulating Ar
Keyboard Tray 25.75" Fold up Keyboard Bracket CPU Mount with Wall Channel (vendor # C6541) Model 151 Typical of NS‐5100 VWR # 66120‐200 Micro Scan B1010‐6 Mallinckrodt 1550‐CW 26005 Slide Warmer 2643 Brute (44 Gallon) CW2 2543 (priced per 1; sold per 6
3540 Slim Jim 2643 Brute 2640 Brute Dolly 2645‐60 Brute Lid Slim Jim 3540‐75 8160‐88 Marshal 3569‐07 (old 3569‐06) 2956‐06 (Green) or 9W22 see planner notes 45‐007‐099 45‐006‐099 77‐050‐180 Part
WMM‐0005‐05 WM‐0023‐32 WM‐0010‐65 WM‐0007‐41/WC‐0002‐01 Catalog No. 06‐657‐50 Model 800 Turbidity Meter 406387 (priced per 1; sold per 4) 04500 Grainger # 5M74x (priced per 1; sold per 4) (priced per 1; sold per 2) (priced per 1; sold per 4) (Replaces 3540‐06 Slim Jim) (priced per 1; sold per 4) 2956‐73 (Blue) Furnished Installed Mounting
By
By
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
C
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Wall‐Mtd
O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Counter O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Accssry O
O
Accssry O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Portable
O
O
FloorStd
O
O
Accssry O
O
Accssry O
O
Accssry O
C
Wall‐Mtd
OSHPD Width
Depth
Height
25.8
8.5
14
11
8.3
7
6.7
10
20
14
24
12.5
14.5
20.4
27
18.5
26.8
20
4.5
7.5
11
5
9.3
11
17
14
24
14
10.5
11.4
27
18.5
26.8
11
14.5
14.4
27.3
27
22.9
14.5
10.3
36
27
14
6
4.5
7.8
3.2
6.5
15.3
3.5
31.5
22.5
15.3
30
38.1
6.6
1.5
30
36.5
28
15
45.5
55
37
37.7
37
Weight (lbs.)
4.5
7
2
25
3
3.8
5.1
4
25.5
14
36
4
8
14
13.1
4
7
1.8
36
72
13
12
7
35.4
OSHPD Approval
Detail OPA Number Reference
Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Pre‐Approved OPA‐0079‐07 Electrical
HVAC
Plumb
Volts
115
120
120
120
120
120
120
115
~
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
Hz Phase
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
60 Single
Amps
.2 .08 Watts
30 max 0.5 0.75 3 1.3 2 250 160 200 Data
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Equip ID
TERMW05B
TERMW05C
TERMW05D
TERMW05E
TIMER05 TIMER08 TIMER11 TURBI01 VIEWM01 WARMC03 WARMS02 WASBH21 WASHC01 WASTE01 WASTE03 WASTE04 WASTE04A
WASTE04B
WASTE40 WASTE44 WASTE53 WASTE58 WASTF02 WORKC15 WORKC15A
WORKC15B
WORKC15C
WORKC48 GENERAL NOTES:
A.
FOR WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT OVER 20 POUNDS, PROVIDE ANCHORAGE AND BACKING PLATES AS SHOWN ON A10.07.
B.
SEE MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION.
C.
REFER TO EQUIPMENT CUT SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
D.
REFER TO A3 SERIES PLANS FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS AND QUANTITIES.
E.
REFER TO A9 SERIES INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS.
F.
CABSU03: CONTRACTOR TO ASSEMBLE UNITS FURNISHED BY OWNER, AND INSTALL ANCHORAGE DETAILS INDICATED.
LEGEND
C
O
V
Y
CONTRACTOR
OWNER
VENDOR
YES
DATA COLUMN
D NETWORK CONNECTION (DATA)
N
NO
R
RS232 PORT
U
UNDETERMINED
V
NETWORK CONNECTION (VIDEO AND DATA)
W
WIRELESS
11/20/2012 ADD#7
130-202 Korbel
I
P
M
POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE WITH WIRELESS
PHONE
NETWORK CONNECTION
ATTACHMENT A
HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
11 70 00 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG TRMT BLDG
SECTION 21 13 13
WET PIPE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1.
Design, fabricate, install and secure necessary approvals for a new Automatic
Wet Fire Sprinkler system for the new four level Diagnostic & Treatment Center
Building at the Sharp Grossmont Hospital located in La Mesa, California. Install
complete fire protection systems in accordance with the provisions of the Office
of Statewide Health Planning & Development (OSHPD), the currently adopted
2010 edition of NFPA 13 as modified by the CSFM and the OSHPD, the specific
design requirements of this specification, and be acceptable to the Authorities
Having Jurisdiction (OSHPD) for the proposed system.
2.
Provide all materials and equipment, and perform all labor required to design and
install a complete fire protection system from a fire service water utility
connection shown on the civil engineer’s site utility plan five feet from the new
D&T Building , and continuing throughout the building in accordance with
OSHPD requirements and this specification.
3.
Provide personnel and materials to perform all acceptance tests, and to
assist in inspections. Tests to be witnessed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
4.
Provide all fire stopping material and installation labor, using UL Listed fire
blocking systems, at all fire sprinkler system penetrations of fire rated
assemblies.
5.
Install supervisory tamper switches on all system control valves.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractors and Manufacturers: The performance of the work described in this Section is
restricted to established Contractors and Manufacturers specializing in automatic fire
sprinkler systems that have satisfactorily completed jobs of this size and type. The
Contractor shall hold a valid California C-16 contractor’s license. The Contractor shall
demonstrate satisfactory installations of a minimum of three comparable systems within the
proceeding three years, and shall supply references.
B. Design responsibility:
1.
The Contractor is hereby advised that the responsibility for the design and
installation of the fire protection system is totally that of the Contractor, and that
all designs and resolutions proposed in the Shop Drawings, calculations, and
related documentation must be demonstrated not only in the test procedure but
also throughout the guarantee period.
2.
The System specified herein is for defining design intent and minimum
performance requirements and may not be downgraded without written consent
of the Architect, Owner and Authority Having Jurisdiction.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
130-202 KMD
WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
21 13 13 - 1
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.
See Architect’s Construction Documents for location requirements of fire
sprinkler system.
C. Testing laboratories: All material and equipment used in the installation of the fire protection
systems shall be listed as approved by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., List of Fire
Protection Equipment and Materials, or approved by other appropriate, nationally recognized
testing laboratories for use in sprinkler systems, and shall be the latest design of the
manufacturer.
D. Requirements of regulatory agencies: Obtain necessary approvals from, have all materials
approved by, and comply with requirements of all Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
E. Coordinate and secure installation of fire service line and connect to fire service lateral as
required.
F. Comply with all current recommendations of the OSHPD, the 2010 edition of the CFC, the
currently adopted editions of NFPA Standards 13, 24, 72 (as modified by the CSFM and
OSHPD) and the special provisions of this specification.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Complete materials list of items with available finishes proposed to be provided
under this Section. The quality of materials required for this installation shall be that which
comply with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and the 2010 edition of
NFPA 13. All materials must be UL Listed for fire protection. All piping shall be free from rust.
B. Shop Drawings:
1.
Prior to submitting shop drawings to the OSHPD, obtain drawings of floor plans
from Architect. Indicate locations of the following items and submit to Architect
and Owner for review:
a.
Sprinkler heads in finished rooms:
b.
Grills and registers:
c.
Light fixtures, speakers and smoke detectors:
d.
Structural elements occurring above ceilings:
e.
All underground fire service piping, backflow assemblies, thrust blocks,
and related appurtenances require installation details.
2.
Required locations:
a.
Corridors and halls: Align heads symmetrically so as not to conflict with
other ceiling items.
b.
Rooms: Center heads in-line with other ceiling devices.
c.
Acoustical tile or panel ceilings: Locate heads in center of tile or panel.
3.
Architect will review layout and may relocate or add sprinkler heads to achieve
an orderly pattern of ceiling elements, at the Contractors sole expense.
4.
If required by Architect, meetings will be held at their office to coordinate
locations of heads with other ceiling elements.
5.
After obtaining Architect approval of sprinkler head locations, prepare final shop
drawings and product submittals for review by the Architect. Indicate all
elements indicated in paragraph 1.3, B, 1 above, and any other required
information.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
130-202 KMD
WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
21 13 13 - 2
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
6.
Contractor to provide drawings, calculations and product submittals to the
OSHPD for approval and permitting. Include fully engineered shop drawings and
submittals for the system.
7.
Submit proposed changes or revisions of shop drawings to Architect for review
and approval prior to work. Include details and sections as required to clearly
define and clarify the design.
C. Project Record Documents:
a.
Submit three (3) copies of Project Record Documents
b.
Contractor to provide a completed and signed NFPA 13 Contractors
Material and Test Certificate upon acceptance of the system by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
D. Operation and maintenance data:
1.
Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance,
deliver to the Owner and the Architect (3) copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
2.
Include in each copy of the Manual of a copy of the Project Record Documents.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work of this section with all other trades that will be affected by the installation
of the fire sprinkler system.
B. The cost of any field revisions to work in place due to incomplete or inaccurate coordination
with other trades will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN
A. Underground Piping; Provide a design which is complete in all regards including, but not
necessarily limited to:
1.
Provide underground fire service piping per site water line specification, site utility
drawings and the provisions of NFPA 24.
2.
Connections from new underground fire service to base of riser shall be as
shown on the civil drawings, but shall be a minimum of 6” in size. Piping shall
terminate in a flanged fitting 6 inches above finished floor/grade.
3.
The design of the sprinkler system shall include provisions for a reduction in the
available water pressure of 10%. The design/contracting firm is responsible for
conducting a fire flow test or confirming the available water supply in writing prior
to submitting the design drawings and hydraulic calculations to the OSHPD for
plan approval.
4.
When using approved PVC piping for underground supply piping, a transition
shall be made to ferrous pipe shall be accomplished at the following locations:
a.
A minimum distance of five feet from a 90-degree elbow designed to
supply a sprinkler riser.
b.
A minimum distance of five feet from the underground elbows on the
supply and service side of an above ground exterior check valve and
other above grade exposed piping, fittings, connections or valves.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
130-202 KMD
WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
21 13 13 - 3
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
c.
d.
A minimum distance of five feet prior to entering a building.
A minimum distance of five feet prior to passing under or through a
footing or retaining wall.
B. Above Grade Piping – All Pipe Shall Be Made in the USA Domestic
1.
Flanged fittings shall be used at above grade exterior locations.
2.
Risers shall be sized per hydraulic calculations from riser base through the
fittings to cross-mains serving the topmost story.
3.
Connections and fittings shall be threaded, flanged, grooved, or welded.
Grooveless clamp or saddle fittings are not acceptable. Fittings and couplings
shall be Class 125 (standard) weight minimum.
4.
Reducing fittings shall be tapered cast metal products. Where grooved couplings
are used, there shall be a separate coupling for each connection to the reducing
fitting.
C. Design Criteria:
1.
The automatic sprinkler systems must be designed in accordance with the
provisions of OSHPD, the 2010 Edition of NFPA 13 as modified by the CSFM
and OSHPD, and in accordance with any additional requirements of the
Authorities Having Jurisdiction for the proposed systems, and the special project
conditions described herein.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. The quality of materials required for this installation shall be that which is required by the
Authorities Having Jurisdiction and the requirements of the currently adopted edition of NFPA
13, except that all piping shall be free from rust.
B. Sprinkler heads
1.
In soffits and interior acoustic tiled ceilings: Viking Mirage Quick
Response Concealed Pendent (finish selected by architect) or approved equal.
2.
In hard ceilings: Viking Microfast Semi-Recessed Quick Response Pendent
(finish selected by architect) or approved equal.
3.
Sidewall interior sprinkler in non-dwelling areas to be Viking Microfast
Quick Response Pendent HSW (finish to be selected by Architect) or approved
equal.
4.
Concealed spaces and/ roof level attics: Viking Microfast Quick
Response Upright Sprinklers (finish selected by architect) or approved equal.
C. Automatic fire sprinkler system:
1.
Pipe sized 1” thru 2”: Use Schedule 40 UL Listed black steel pipe with threaded,
banded cast or malleable iron fittings, or equivalent.
2.
Pipe sized 2 ½” thru 6”: Use Schedule 10 UL Listed black steel pipe with welded
and/or grooved cast iron fittings of required pressure rating.
3.
Piping sized 8” and larger to be Schedule 10, UL Listed steel piping.
D. Fire Department Connection
1.
Provide appropriate sized (four inch or larger, depending on system design)
freestanding pipe mount, cast brass FDC with 2-1/2-inch individually clappered
fire department inlet connections with breakable cast iron domed caps, one-inch
cast lettering. The Fire Department Connection shall be Potter Roemer Standard
No. 5500 series, UL listed with a finish as selected by the Architect.
2.
Fire department connections shall be located where indicated on the Civil Plans.
Note: Where conditions do not permit, the fire department connections shall be
placed where readily accessible in case of fire and not liable to injury or fire
exposure. All fire department connection locations shall be approved by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
130-202 KMD
WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
21 13 13 - 4
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.
4.
5.
Where subject to mechanical injury, protection shall be provided. The means of
protection shall be approved and shall be arranged in a manner, which will not
interfere with the connection to inlets.
Maintain a 36-inch clear radius around the fire department connection. Grade
variation within this radius shall not exceed 1:12. The fire department connection
shall be arranged so that hose lines can be readily and conveniently attached to
inlets without interference from any nearby objects including buildings, fences,
posts, or other fire department connections.
The fire department connection shall be clearly visible from the street and
provided with identification sign as approved by the OSHPD.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Supervisory switch: Designed so that it will operate between the first and second revolution of
the valve control wheel or when the stem moves no more than one fifth of the distance from
its normal position or if the unit is removed from its mounting.
B. Flow switch: All wetted parts of brass or stainless steel. Flow indicator to be complete with
retard chamber providing 20 second delay before actuating.
C. Valves: U.L. listed Kennedy, Nibco or Stockham. Valves shall be rated for working pressure
zones.
D. Pressure gauge: Bourdon spring pressure type with non-corrodible movements, set in cast
iron case with black flange and with rings of pressed brass, flared type construction. Cases
and rings black enamel finish. Gauges shall have 4-1/2” dials with white background, black
lines and figures, calibrated for 2 times working pressure. Installation: Each gauge
connected to its respective pipe line located where shown and at inlet and outlet of each
pump, by means of suitable brass pipe, pigtails and fittings containing a brass cock, Ashcroft,
U.S. Gauge Company or Crosby.
E. Piping Seismic Separation Joints, where required, shall be Metraloop-Fireloop UL Listed
Flexible Expansion Loops, as manufactured by the Metraflex Company Chicago, Illinois.
2.4 SPRINKLER CABINET
A. Provide cabinet containing spare sprinkler heads in an accessible location as directed by
Architect. Provide 6 heads of each type used in the installation, with sprinkler wrenches.
B. The cabinet shall be distinctly labeled, designating the type and quantity of equipment it
contains.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION – ABOVEGROUND PIPING
A. Installation shall not be started until the submittal is approved by the OSHPD. The component
submittal shall be stamped and signed by the manufacturer’s/fabricators qualified engineer
registered in the State of California prior to submitting to OSHPD for review and approval.
B. Piping and sprinkler locations indicated on contract documents is for design intent only. Install
the work of this Section in strict accordance with the reviewed Shop Drawings and the
requirements of the OSHPD. Relocate any heads not aligned with other ceiling fixtures or
outlets at Contractor’s sole expense.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
130-202 KMD
WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
21 13 13 - 5
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
C. Coordinate routing of sprinkler piping with all other trades that will be affected by the
installation of the fire sprinkler system so as to avoid interferences. The cost of any field to
work in place due to incomplete or inaccurate coordination revisions with other trades will be
the responsibility of the Contractor
D. Install drains on main risers and auxiliary drains in accordance with standard practices and
local ordinances. Install one Inspector’s Test drain on each system and discharge to an
approved location.
E. Access: Do not locate any device requiring access in walls or above ceilings of public areas
without Architect’s prior approval. Provide access doors complying with specifications and
signs for all concealed devices.
F. Piping, Hangers, Supports, Anchors and Sleeves: Install in complete accordance with
OSHPD requirements, using UL Listed components by Tolco, or approved equal.
G. Install all horizontal piping so as to run parallels to or perpendicular with the building walls
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or approved by the Architect. Do not install
sprinkler piping that obstructs any of the door openings.
H. Guide and support all vertical risers or piping in accordance with standard practice. Fabricate
and construct pipe joints so that they produce a true alignment of the pipe. Ream all pipe
ends. Construct welded pipe joints in accordance with applicable codes.
I.
Run all piping in such a manner as to provide appropriate flexibility with respect to expansion
and contraction. In general, accomplish this with a flexible coupling, expansion loops and/or
leads from mains with proper lengths and appropriate fittings. Anchor piping is required.
J.
The depth of the bottom of all horizontal piping below grade shall not exceed the level
distance measured from the pipe centerline to the nearest top edge of any adjacent building
footing, unless approved by the Architect, and shall have not less than 3 foot earth coverage.
K. Where exposed piping penetrates the floors, walls, or ceiling of finished areas, provide
chromium plated pipe escutcheons at the penetrations.
L. Provide pipe sleeves through partitions, walls, slabs and outside walls for piping furnished
and installed under this Section. Extend all vertical pipe sleeves in floor 6” above the finish.
Provide Drawings showing openings for proper installation of the work specified.
M. Provide all hangers and supports required for the installation. Perforated extension bar
hangers and expansion bolts used in the bottom of slabs or beams will not be acceptable to
supporting pipe in any part of this project.
N. Use hot dipped galvanized materials in any exterior or open spaces such as canopies or
covered walkways.
O. Clean pipe and fittings and keep interiors clean throughout installation. Provide caps on ends
of cleaned piping.
P. Use full pipe lengths; random lengths joined by couplings will not be accepted.
Q. Provide for expansion and contraction of all pipes and for seismic movement. Provide
reducing fittings for all changes in pipe size; provide fittings for all changes in pipe direction.
Riser piping shall be installed plumb with offset fittings used where alignment adjustment is
necessary.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
130-202 KMD
WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
21 13 13 - 6
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
R. Provide unions for pipe sizes below two-inch and flanged or grooved fittings for sizes twoinch and above to permit disconnection of equipment and fixtures.
S. Prepare all piping having welds for Authority Having Jurisdiction inspection prior to
installation.
T. On-site fire code welding permits shall be obtained from the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
U. Piping arrangement shall avoid beams, columns, ducts, lighting fixtures, doors, windows, and
similar obstructions for openings.
V. All piping that penetrates fire rated construction shall be firestopped in accordance with these
specifications and project drawings.
W. Underground
1. All bolts, nuts, washers and rodding used for the installation of underground piping,
valves and fittings from the riser flange back to, and including all parts of the water main
tap shall be stainless steel conforming ASTM A194 Grade 8M or ASTM A320 Grade
B8M. All of the above materials shall be thoroughly coated with bituminous mastic. After
coating, all valves and ferrous fittings shall be wrapped in 8-mil polyethylene film and
securely taped in place with underground tape. The above materials shall be left visible
for inspection by the Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to backfilling.
2. Install in accordance with referenced standards, codes, manufacturer’s instructions, and
this specification.
3. Piping shall have a minimum cover of three feet under driveways, fire lanes, roads,
streets, and two and one half feet of cover in open areas. Cover shall be measured from
finished grade to top of pipe. Provide a six-inch bed of sand below pipe and twelve-inch
cover of sand above piping with locator tape on top of the sand.
4. Tracer wire shall be wrapped and taped to non-metallic piping at maximum 20-foot
intervals.
5. When the system riser is close to a foundation or footing, underground fittings of proper
length shall be used to avoid pipe joints located in or under the wall or footing. When the
connection passes through a foundation or footing below grade, a one to three inch
clearance shall be provided around the pipe, and the annular space filled with asphalt
mastic or similar flexible waterproofing material.
6. After underground work is complete and has been tested in accordance with referenced
standards, the contractor shall complete a NFPA 24 Contractor’s Material and Test
Certificate for Private Fire Service Mains and provide it to the OSHPD inspector and the
Owner.
3.2 THRUST BLOCKS
A. Installation of underground water piping shall include concrete thrust blocks and anchors
where vertical or horizontal deflection is 45 degrees or more, or at the intersection lines.
Thrust block locations, design, and installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 24.
3.3 FIRE-STOPPING
A. Firestop all holes or voids created by penetrations of the Fire Sprinkler System piping through
fire rated construction, with UL Listed Fire Stop / Block Systems.
3.4 TESTING
A. All tests described and referenced in these specifications shall be performed by the
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
130-202 KMD
WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
21 13 13 - 7
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
Contractor in the presence of the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and the Owner’s
Representative. Tests and inspections shall apply to all water-sourced fire protection
systems, including fire hydrants, sprinklers, standpipes, and all underground piping that is
installed to supply these systems and devices.
B. Hydrostatic Test Preparation
1. New interior piping shall be filled with water for two (2) hours preceding hydrostatic
testing.
2. Piping shall be purged of all air and other gasses prior to hydrostatic testing.
3. Underground piping shall be center loaded and all fittings, joints, strapping, and thrust
blocking shall be exposed for hydrostatic pressure testing and inspection.
4. All above grade and interior piping, fittings, sprinkler heads and supports shall be
exposed for inspections and hydrostatic testing.
5. A hydrostatic pre-test shall be conducted for both new aboveground and new underground
piping prior to calling for Authority Having Jurisdiction final acceptance test. Written
confirmation of passed 100% pre-test shall be given to the inspector of record prior to
calling for final. All cost associated with delays caused by failure to complete 100%
operational pre-test shall be borne by the contractor. A Contractors Material and Test
Certificate shall be filled out upon completion of testing.
C. Fire department connections and piping shall be included in hydrostatic testing and shall be
back flushed until clear water is observed.
D. Underground mains and supply connections to sprinkler risers shall be flushed thoroughly
before connections to sprinkler systems.
E. Tests of drainage facilities shall be conducted by opening each drain valve while the system
control valves are open to the supply.
F. All water level sensors, alarm and supervisory signals, tanks and automatic valves shall be
performance tested.
G. Water remaining in normally dry piping shall be evacuated at completion of testing.
H. Contractor to provide to the Owner completed copies of the forms depicted in Figure 24.1
“Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Above Ground Piping” of the 2010 Edition of
NFPA 13, upon completion of the system installation and approval by OSHPD.
END OF SECTION 15550
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
130-202 KMD
WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
21 13 13 - 8
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 21 31 13
ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic Performance:
Fire pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
B.
1.04
In-line fire pumps.
Fire-pump accessories and specialties.
Flowmeter systems.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum unless higher
pressure rating is indicated.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, performance curves, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: For fire pumps, motor drivers, and fire-pump accessories and specialties.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
1.05
A.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Seismic Qualification Certificates:
manufacturer.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
For fire pumps, accessories, and components, from
ELECTRIC-DRIVE,
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
21 31 13 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.
2.
3.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
B.
Product Certificates: For each fire pump, from manufacturer.
C.
Source quality-control reports.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
1.06
A.
1.07
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire pumps to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
NFPA Compliance:
Protection."
1.08
A.
Comply with NFPA 20, "Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
IN-LINE FIRE PUMPS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
C.
1.
A-C Fire Pump Systems; a business of ITT Industries.
2.
Corcoran Piping System Co.
3.
Patterson Pump Company; a subsidiary of the Gorman-Rupp Company.
4.
Peerless Pump, Inc.
Pump:
1.
2.
Standard: UL 448, for in-line pumps for fire service.
Casing: Radially split case, cast iron with ASME B16.1 pipe-flange connections.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
ELECTRIC-DRIVE,
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
21 31 13 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.
4.
5.
Impeller: Cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft.
Wear Rings: Replaceable bronze.
Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
a.
b.
6.
Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.
Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided
yarn and bronze packing gland.
Mounting: Pump and driver shaft is vertical, with motor above pump and pump on base.
D.
Coupling: None or rigid.
E.
Driver:
1.
2.
F.
Standard: UL 1004A.
Type: Electric motor; NEMA MG 1, polyphase Design B.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rated Capacity: 300 gpm.
Total Rated Head: 106 feet or psig.
Inlet Flange: Class 125.
Outlet Flange: Class 125.
Suction Head Available at Pump:
Motor Horsepower: 40.
Motor Speed: 3550.
Electrical Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
9.
10.
2.02
Volts: 460.
Phase: Three.
Hertz: 60.
Full-Load Amperes:
Minimum Circuit Ampacity:
Maximum Overcurrent Protection:
Pump-Start, Pressure-Switch Setting:
Pump-Stop, Pressure-Switch Setting:
FIRE-PUMP ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A.
Automatic Air-Release Valves: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation in fire-pump casing.
B.
Circulation Relief Valves: UL 1478, brass, spring loaded; for installation in pump discharge
piping.
C.
Relief Valves:
1.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
BERMAD Control Valves.
b.
CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
ELECTRIC-DRIVE,
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
21 31 13 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.
c.
Kunkle Valve; a part of Tyco International Ltd.
d.
OCV Control Valves.
e.
Watts Regulator Company; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
Description: UL 1478, bronze or cast iron, spring loaded; for installation in firesuppression water-supply piping.
D.
Inlet Fitting: Eccentric tapered reducer at pump suction inlet.
E.
Outlet Fitting: Concentric tapered reducer at pump discharge outlet.
F.
Discharge Cone: Closed or open type.
G.
Hose Valve Manifold Assembly:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 20.
Header Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized steel with ends threaded
according to ASME B1.20.1.
Header Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.4, galvanized cast-iron threaded fittings.
Automatic Drain Valve: UL 1726.
Manifold:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
6.
Manifold:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.03
A.
Test Connections: Comply with UL 405 except provide outlets without clappers
instead of inlets.
Body: Flush type, brass or ductile iron, with number of outlets required by
NFPA 20.
Nipples:
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with ends
threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.
Adapters and Caps with Chain: Brass or bronze, with outlet threaded according to
NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads.
Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; rectangular.
Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and
matching local fire-department threads.
Exposed Parts Finish: Rough.
Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."
Test Connections: Comply with UL 405 except provide outlets without clappers
instead of inlets.
Body: Exposed type, brass, with number of outlets required by NFPA 20.
Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; round.
Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and
matching local fire-department threads. Include caps and chains.
Exposed Parts Finish: Rough.
Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."
FLOWMETER SYSTEMS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
ELECTRIC-DRIVE,
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
21 31 13 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
Emerson Process Management; Rosemount Division.
2.
Fire Research Corp.
3.
Gerand Engineering Co.
4.
Hydro Flow Products, Inc.
5.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
6.
Meriam Process Technologies.
7.
Preso Meters; Division of Racine Federated Inc.
8.
Reddy-Buffaloes Pump Company.
9.
Victaulic Company.
C.
Description: UL-listed or FM-Approved, fire-pump flowmeter system with capability to indicate
flow to not less than 175 percent of fire-pump rated capacity.
D.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
E.
Sensor: Annubar probe, orifice plate, or venturi unless otherwise indicated. Sensor size shall
match pipe, tubing, flowmeter, and fittings.
F.
Permanently Mounted Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor; with dial not less than 4-1/2
inches in diameter. Include bracket or device for wall mounting.
1.
G.
2.04
Tubing Package: NPS 1/8 or NPS 1/4 soft copper tubing with copper or brass fittings and
valves.
Portable Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor; with dial not less than 4-1/2 inches in
diameter and with two 12-foot- long hoses in carrying case.
GROUT
A.
Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydrauliccement grout.
B.
Characteristics: Nonshrink and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.05
A.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Testing: Test and inspect fire pumps according to UL 448 requirements for "Operation Test"
and "Manufacturing and Production Tests."
1.
Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to UL 448.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
ELECTRIC-DRIVE,
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
21 31 13 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
Fire pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine equipment bases and anchorage provisions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and for conditions affecting performance of fire pumps.
B.
Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before fire-pump installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Fire-Pump Installation Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of fire pumps, relief
valves, and related components.
B.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
2.
3.
Install fire pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements
for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete." Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in
Section 21 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and
Equipment."
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 21 05 48.13
"Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."
C.
Install fire-pump suction and discharge piping equal to or larger than sizes required by
NFPA 20.
D.
Support piping and pumps separately so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.
E.
Install valves that are same size as connecting piping. Comply with requirements for fireprotection valves specified in Section 21 13 13 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems."
F.
Install pressure gages on fire-pump suction and discharge flange pressure-gage tappings.
Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 21 13 13 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler
Systems."
G.
Install piping hangers and supports, anchors, valves, gages, and equipment supports according
to NFPA 20.
H.
Install flowmeters and sensors. Install flowmeter-system components and make connections
according to NFPA 20 and manufacturer's written instructions.
I.
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not factory
mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram submittals to electrical Installer.
J.
Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
ELECTRIC-DRIVE,
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
21 31 13 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.03
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping and valves specified in Section 21 12 00 "Fire-Suppression
Standpipes." Section 21 13 13 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems." Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to pumps and equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect relief-valve discharge to drainage piping or point of discharge.
D.
Connect flowmeter-system meters, sensors, and valves to tubing.
E.
Connect fire pumps to their controllers.
3.04
A.
3.05
IDENTIFICATION
Identify system components. Comply with requirements for fire-pump marking according to
NFPA 20.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test each fire pump with its controller as a unit. Comply with requirements for electric-motordriver fire-pump controllers specified in Section 21 39 00 "Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers."
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
After installing components, assemblies, and equipment including controller, test for
compliance with requirements.
Test according to NFPA 20 for acceptance and performance testing.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
E.
Components, assemblies, and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests
and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
G.
Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or other acceptable
location to dispose of fire-pump test water. Hoses are for tests only and do not convey to
Owner.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
ELECTRIC-DRIVE,
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
21 31 13 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.06
A.
STARTUP SERVICE
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
3.07
A.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain fire pumps.
END OF SECTION
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
ELECTRIC-DRIVE,
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
21 31 13 - 8
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 21 34 00
PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Section:
1.
1.03
A.
1.04
Multistage, pressure-maintenance pumps.
Section 21 39 00 "Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers" for pressure-maintenance-pump
controllers.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum unless higher
pressure rating is indicated.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, performance curves, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: For pumps, accessories, and specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data:
manuals.
For pumps to include in operation and maintenance
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
130-202 KMD
21 34 00 - 1
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.07
A.
1.08
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MULTISTAGE, PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
A-C Fire Pump Systems; a business of ITT Industries.
C.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, multistage, barrel-type vertical pump as defined in
HI 2.1-2.2 and HI 2.3; designed for surface installation with pump and motor direct coupled and
mounted vertically.
D.
Pump Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
E.
Barrel: Stainless steel.
Suction and Discharge Chamber: Cast iron with flanged inlet and outlet.
Pump Head/Motor Mount: Cast iron.
Impellers: Stainless steel, balanced, and keyed to shaft.
Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.
Seal: Mechanical type with carbon rotating face and silicon-carbide stationary seat.
Intermediate Chamber Bearings: Aluminum-oxide ceramic or bronze.
Chamber-Base Bearing: Tungsten carbide.
O-Rings: EPDM or NBR.
Motor: Single speed with permanently lubricated ball bearings and rigidly mounted to pump
head. Comply with requirements in Section 21 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for Fire
Suppression Equipment."
1.
Power Cord: Factory-connected to motor for field connection to controller and at least 10
feet long.
F.
Nameplate: Permanently attached to pump and indicating capacity and characteristics.
G.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Rated Capacity: 8 gpm.
Total Dynamic Head: 120 psig.
Working Pressure: 300 psig.
Inlet and Outlet Size: NPS 1-1/4.
Discharge and Suction Flanges: Class 250.
Suction Head Available at Pump:
Motor Horsepower:
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
130-202 KMD
21 34 00 - 2
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
8.
9.
Motor Speed:
Electrical Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
10.
11.
2.02
A.
Volts: 460.
Phases: Three.
Hertz: 60.
Full-Load Amperes:
Minimum Circuit Ampacity:
Maximum Overcurrent Protection:
Pump-Start, Pressure-Switch Setting: 110 psig.
Pump-Stop, Pressure-Switch Setting: 120 psig.
MOTORS
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 21 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements
for Fire Suppression Equipment."
1.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven load will
not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of pressure-maintenance pumps.
B.
Base-Mounted Pump Mounting: Install pumps on concrete bases. Comply with requirements
for concrete bases specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Section 03 30 53
"Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
3.02
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Attach pumps to equipment base using anchor bolts.
Install multistage, pressure-maintenance pumps according to HI 1.4.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
130-202 KMD
21 34 00 - 3
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
D.
Pressure-maintenance pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.03
ADJUSTING
A.
Lubricate pumps as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable pressure-switch ranges as indicated.
END OF SECTION
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
130-202 KMD
21 34 00 - 4
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 21 39 00
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE-PUMP DRIVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.03
Full-service, full-voltage controllers rated 600 V and less.
Limited-service controllers rated 600 V and less.
Controllers for pressure-maintenance pumps.
Remote alarm panels.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ATS: Automatic transfer switch(es).
B.
ECM: Electronic control module.
C.
MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
D.
N.O.: Normally open.
1.04
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic Performance: Fire-pump controllers and alarm panels shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
1.05
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work, including required clearances and service
spaces around controller enclosures.
1.
Show tabulations of the following:
a.
Each installed unit's type and details.
b.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 2.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
130-202 KMD
PUMP DRIVERS
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
21 39 00 - 1
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
1.06
Factory-installed devices.
Nameplate legends.
Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of integrated unit.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices.
Specified modifications.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
Schematic and Connection Diagrams: For power, signal, alarm, and control wiring and
for pressure-sensing tubing.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For each type of product indicated, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of product indicated, from manufacturer.
D.
Manufacturer's factory test reports of fully assembled and tested equipment.
E.
Source quality-control reports.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
1.07
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product indicated to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.08
A.
Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status
and alarm points.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming
microprocessor-based logic controls.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color of lens installed; two of each type and size
of lamp installed.
Auxiliary Contacts: One for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed.
Power Contacts: Three for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed.
Contactor Coils: One for each size and type of magnetic controller installed.
Relay Boards: One for each size and type of relay board installed.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
PUMP DRIVERS
21 39 00 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
6.
1.09
Operator Interface: One Insert number microprocessor board(s), complete with display
and membrane keypad.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of an NRTL.
B.
Source Limitations:
source or producer.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials and installation.
E.
Comply with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70.
F.
IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand
seismic forces defined in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."
1.10
Obtain fire-pump controllers and all associated equipment from single
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and
physical damage.
B.
If stored in areas subject to weather, protect controllers from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive
substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside
controllers; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per controller.
1.11
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations:
1.
2.
B.
1.12
Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 40 deg F and not exceeding 122 deg F
unless otherwise indicated.
Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 6600 feet unless otherwise indicated.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Notify Construction Manager Owner no fewer than
seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service, and comply with NFPA 70E.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of controllers with other construction including conduit, piping,
fire-pump equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and
equipment access doors and panels. Ensure that controllers are within sight of fire-pump
drivers.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
PUMP DRIVERS
21 39 00 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
FULL-SERVICE CONTROLLERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
C.
General Requirements for Full-Service Controllers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Firetrol Products.
Comply with NFPA 20 and UL 218.
Listed by an NRTL for electric-motor driver for fire-pump service.
Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation.
Factory assembled, wired, and tested; continuous-duty rated.
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment.
Method of Starting:
1.
Pressure-switch actuated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Water-pressure-actuated switch and pressure transducer with independent highand low-calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-suppression
piping.
System pressure recorder, electric ac driven, with spring backup.
Programmable minimum-run-time relay to prevent short cycling.
Programmable timer for weekly tests.
Magnetic Controller: Across-the-line type.
Solid-State Controller: Full Voltage type.
Emergency Start: Mechanically operated start handle that closes and retains the motor
RUN contactor independent of all electric or pressure actuators.
E.
Method of Stopping: Automatic and nonautomatic shutdown after automatic starting.
F.
Capacity: Rated for fire-pump-driver horsepower and short-circuit-current (withstand) rating
equal to or greater than short-circuit current available at controller location.
G.
Method of Isolation and Overcurrent Protection: Interlocked isolating switch and nonthermal
MCCB; with a common, externally mounted operating handle, and providing locked-rotor
protection.
H.
Door-Mounted Operator Interface and Controls:
1.
2.
Monitor, display, and control the devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in
NFPA 20 as required for drivers and controller types used.
Method of Control and Indication:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Microprocessor-based logic controller, with multiline digital readout.
Membrane keypad.
LED alarm and status indicating lights.
Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
PUMP DRIVERS
21 39 00 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
5.
I.
Audible alarm, with silence push button.
Nonautomatic START and STOP push buttons or switches.
Optional Features:
1.
Extra Output Contacts:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
J.
One N.O. contact(s) for motor running condition.
One set(s) of contacts for loss-of-line power.
One each, Form C contacts for high and low reservoir level.
Local alarm bell.
Door-mounted thermal or impact printer for alarm and status logs.
Operator Interface Communications Ports: USB, Ethernet, and RS485.
ATS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Complies with NFPA 20, UL 218, and UL 1008.
Integral with controller as a listed combination fire-pump controller and power transfer
switch.
Automatically transfers fire-pump controller from normal power supply to alternate power
supply in event of power failure.
Allows manual transfer from one source to the other.
Alternate-Source Isolating and Disconnecting Means: Integral molded-case switch, with
an externally mounted operating handle.
Alternate-Source Isolating and Disconnecting Means: Mechanically interlocked isolation
switch and circuit breaker rated at a minimum of 115 percent of rated motor full-load
current, with an externally mounted operating handle; circuit breaker shall be provided
with nonthermal sensing, instantaneous-only short-circuit overcurrent protection to
comply with available fault currents.
Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.02
Controller power on.
Motor running condition.
Loss-of-line power.
Line-power phase reversal.
Line-power single-phase condition.
Normal source available.
Alternate source available.
In normal position.
In alternate position.
Isolating means open.
Audible alarm, with silence push button.
Nonautomatic (manual, nonelectric) means of transfer.
Engine test push button.
Start generator output contacts.
Timer for weekly generator tests.
CONTROLLERS FOR PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
PUMP DRIVERS
21 39 00 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.
C.
General Requirements for Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Controllers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Type: UL 508 factory assembled, -wired, and tested, across-the-line; for combined
automatic and manual operation.
Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2 for wall-mounting.
Factory assembled, wired, and tested.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint.
Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.03
ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Firetrol Products.
Fusible disconnect switch.
Pressure switch.
Hand-off-auto selector switch.
Pilot light.
Running period timer.
REMOTE ALARM PANELS
A.
General Requirements for Remote Alarm Panels: Comply with NFPA 20 and UL 218; listed by
an NRTL for fire-pump service.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Firetrol Products.
2.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
3.
Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Industrial Controls.
4.
Joslyn Clark Corporation.
5.
Master Control Systems, Inc.
6.
Metron, Inc.
D.
General Requirements for Remote Alarm Panels: Factory assembled, wired, and tested.
E.
Supervisory and Normal Control Voltage: 120-V ac; single source.
F.
Audible and Visual Alarm and Status Indications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Driver running.
Loss of phase.
Phase reversal.
Supervised power on.
Common trouble on the controller.
a.
6.
Local/Remote.
Controller connected to alternate power source.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
PUMP DRIVERS
21 39 00 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
G.
Audible and Visual Alarm and Status Indications: Manufacturer's standard indicating lights;
push-to-test.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Engine running.
Controller main switch turned to the off or manual position.
Supervised power on.
Common trouble on the controller or engine.
Common pump room trouble.
Controller connected to alternate power source.
H.
Audible alarm, with silence push button.
I.
Pump REMOTE START push button.
1.
2.04
A.
Normal-suction pressure.
ENCLOSURES
Fire-Pump Controllers, ATS, Remote Alarm Panels, and Low-Suction-Shutdown Panels:
NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed locations and NFPA 20.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: Type 1 (IEC IP10).
Indoor Locations Subject to Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 2 (IEC IP11).
Outdoor Locations: Type 3R (IEC IP14).
Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: Type 4 (IEC IP56).
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
Type 12 (IEC IP12).
B.
Enclosure Color: Manufacturer's standard "fire-pump-controller red".
C.
Nameplates: Comply with NFPA 20; complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals, listings,
and other pertinent data.
D.
Optional Features:
1.
2.
3.
2.05
A.
Floor stands, 12 inches high, for floor-mounted controllers.
Space heater, 120-V ac.
Tropicalization.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Testing: Test and inspect fire-pump controllers according to requirements in NFPA 20 and
UL 218.
1.
Verification of Performance: Rate controllers according to operation of functions and
features specified.
B.
Fire-pump controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
PUMP DRIVERS
21 39 00 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and surfaces to receive equipment, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine equipment before installation. Reject equipment that is wet or damaged by moisture
or mold.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
CONTROLLER INSTALLATION
A.
Install controllers within sight of their respective drivers.
B.
Connect controllers to their dedicated pressure-sensing lines.
C.
Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install controllers on walls with disconnect operating handles not
higher than 79 inches above finished floor, and bottom of enclosure not less than 12 inches
above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight
structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks
complying with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
D.
Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install controllers on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete bases,
using floor stands high enough so that the bottom of enclosure cabinet is not less than 12
inches above finished floor. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in
Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
E.
Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
F.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
G.
Comply with NEMA ICS 15.
3.03
A.
STANDALONE ATS INSTALLATION
Wall-Mounting ATS: Install ATS on walls with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79
inches above finished floor, and bottom of enclosure not less than 12 inches above finished
floor unless otherwise indicated. Bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel
channels bolted to wall. For ATS not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with
Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
PUMP DRIVERS
21 39 00 - 8
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
Floor-Mounting ATS: Install ATS on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete bases, using floor
stands high enough so that the bottom of enclosure cabinet is not less than 12 inches above
finished floor. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Section 03 30 00
"Cast-in-Place Concrete." Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
C.
Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
3.04
A.
3.05
A.
3.06
REMOTE ALARM AND LOW-SUCTION-SHUTDOWN PANEL INSTALLATION
Install panels on walls with tops not higher than 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise
indicated. Bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For
ATS not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and
Supports for Electrical Systems."
POWER WIRING INSTALLATION
Install power wiring between controllers and their services or sources, and between controllers
and their drivers. Comply with requirements in NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and Section 26 05 19 "LowVoltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
CONTROL AND ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between controllers and remote devices and facility's central monitoring system.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage
Electrical Power Cables."
B.
Install wiring between remote alarm and low-suction-shutdown panels and controllers. Comply
with requirements in NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage Electrical
Power Cables."
C.
Install wiring between controllers and the building's fire-alarm system.
Comply with
requirements specified in Section 28 31 11 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System."
D.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
E.
Connect remote manual and automatic activation devices where applicable.
3.07
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Comply with requirements in NFPA 20 for marking fire-pump controllers.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
PUMP DRIVERS
21 39 00 - 9
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
3.08
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification in NFPA 20 and as specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
Inspect and Test Each Component:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Verify and Test Each Electric-Driver Controller:
a.
b.
3.
4.
E.
Inspect wiring, components, connections, and equipment installations. Test and
adjust components and equipment.
Test insulation resistance for each element, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuits.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus 10 or minus 1 percent of
motor nameplate rated voltages, with motors off. If outside this range for any
motor, notify Construction Manager before starting the motor(s).
Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
Field Acceptance Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not begin field acceptance testing until suction piping has been flushed and
hydrostatically tested and the certificate for flushing and testing has been submitted to
Architect Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Prior to starting, notify authorities having jurisdiction of the time and place of the
acceptance testing.
Engage manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative to be present during the
testing.
Perform field acceptance tests as outlined in NFPA 20.
F.
Controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.09
A.
STARTUP SERVICE
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
PUMP DRIVERS
21 39 00 - 10
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.
3.10
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust controllers and battery charger systems to function smoothly and as recommended by
manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, and timers.
C.
Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event
recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to
Substantial Completion.
D.
Set field-adjustable pressure switches.
3.11
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.
B.
Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to
Substantial Completion.
3.12
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain controllers, remote alarm panels , low-suction-shutdown panels.
END OF SECTION
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 - ADD#4
130-202 KMD
CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE
PUMP DRIVERS
21 39 00 - 11
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 22 11 16
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Provide new domestic water service from 5'-0" outside the building as shown on drawings,
complete with shutoff valves, all in accordance with requirements of the municipality.
B.
Provide plumbing piping to serve all fixtures and equipment, as shown on drawings.
C.
Domestic water piping.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Plumbers shall be fully qualified and licensed by State authorities.
B.
The manufacturer's mark or name shall be attached to each length of pipe, fitting or device
employed in the piping system.
C.
Products made of, or containing lead, asbestos, mercury, or other known toxic or hazardous
materials are not acceptable for installation under this Section. Any such products installed
as part of the work of this Section shall be removed and replaced with all costs for removal
and replacement shall be borne solely by the Contractor(s).
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
B.
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
C.
ASTM B813, Water-flushable lead-free flux
D.
ASTM B32, Lead-free alloy solder
E.
ASTM B828, Procedures for soldered joints
SUBMITTALS
E.A. Submit shop drawings on all equipment provided under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Exterior Utilities:
1.
Water Services - 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: (No fittings below slab)
a.
Type "K" soft copper, ASTM B88, with brazed joints.
2.
Water Service - 3 Inch and Larger:
a.
Ductile iron pipe, ANSI A21.51, Grade 60-42-10, with thickness classifications
as noted below:
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
DOMESTIC
WATER PIPING
22 11 16 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.
2.2
8 Ft. Cover
12 Ft. Cover
16 Ft. Cover
Size
Class
Size
Class
Size
Class
3"-12"
2
3"-12"
2
3"-12"
2
Cast iron or ductile iron fittings, ANSI A21.20; Class 250 for 12 inch and smaller;
Class 150 for 14 inch and larger. Mechanical joints, ANSI A21.11. Pipe and fittings tar
coated outside and cement lined inside, ANSI A21.4.
PIPING WITHIN BUILDING
A.
Domestic Water Piping:
a.
2.
Below Grade - 3 Inch and Larger:
a.
Match material specified by Civil Engineer for Site Water Distribution.
3.
Above Grade - 2 Inch and Smaller:
a.
Type "L" hard temper copper tubing with wrought copper fittings, assembled
with 95/5 (antimony), 94/6 or 96/4 (silver), or 97/3 (copper).
4.
Above Grade – 2-1/2 Inch to 10 Inch:
a.
Grooved Copper Piping System, 150 PSIG and Less:
1)
Copper tubing system from 2-1/2" through 8" shall be installed using
mechanical piping couplings of a bolted type, with a central cavity design
pressure-responsive gasket along with grooved end copper or bronze
fittings as available, as manufactured by Victaulic Company of America.
2)
Copper tube, ASTM B-88 (Type K, L, M, or DWV) - Roll grooved only in
accordance to Victaulic current listed standards.
3)
Mechanical Couplings - Shall be Style 606 rigid couplings for copper
consisting of a ductile iron cast housing coated with copper colored alkyd
enamel, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressureresponsive FlushSeal® design, with plated nuts and bolts to secure unit
together.
4)
Mechanical Fittings – Shall be wrought copper, conforming to ASTM B75 or B-152, or bronze sand castings, conforming to ASTM B-584-87.
Fittings shall be manufactured to copper tubing sizes, with grooved ends
designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings of the same
manufacturer. (Flaring of tube and fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not
allowed.)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SEISMIC RESTRAINT
A.
Fabricate and support piping in accordance with specifications herein, and latest edition of
CPC. Provide seismic restraint in accordance with a current OSHPD pre-approved system
that carries a current OSHPD OPA Number. For seismic restraint, see Section 23 05 48.
B.
Install seismic separation assemblies at building seismic joints.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
DOMESTIC
WATER PIPING
22 11 16 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.2
SIZE OF FIXTURE SUPPLIES, WASTE AND VENTS
A.
3.3
3.4
Size of fixture supplies, wastes and vents shall be as noted in plumbing schedule on
drawings.
PREPARATION OF PIPING
A.
Ream pipe ends to remove burrs. Make joints smooth and unobstructed inside. Remove any
obstructions or debris inside piping, blowing it out with compressed air or otherwise cleaning
it internally immediately prior to assembly.
B.
Cap or cover open piping during erection to prevent entry of foreign objects.
GENERAL
A.
All excavation and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 20 00.
B.
No lead bearing solders shall be used for assembly of piping specified under this Section.
Flux shall be water-flushable and lead-free.
C.
Install horizontal piping parallel with adjacent walls and partitions unless otherwise shown.
All risers shall be plumb. Springing or forcing piping into place will not be permitted unless
specifically called for.
D.
Nipples shall be the same material, composition and weight classifications as the pipe with
which they are installed. Close or running thread nipples shall not be used.
E.
Take branches and riser arms off the top of mains at a 45 degree angle, unless otherwise
shown.
F.
Use a minimum of two field fabricated or installed fittings or joints when connecting piping to
equipment or prefabricated piping assemblies.
G.
Pitch horizontal drainage and vent piping 1/4 inch per foot minimum for sizes smaller than 3
inch and 1/8 inch for sizes 3 inch and larger, unless indicated otherwise.
H.
Provide manual drain valves at low points, end of each main, and bottom of each riser, of
domestic water piping. Drains to be 2 inch ball valves for piping 4 inch and larger and 3/4
inch for smaller piping. Drain valves shall be ball valves with hose adapters and caps.
I.
Run piping to pumps lines size as close as possible to pump connections. Pump shut-off
valves, check valves and strainers shall be line size. Provide eccentric reducer, flat on top, at
pump suction to reduce from line size to pump suction connection size, except where suction
diffusers are used. Provide concentric increaser at pump discharge to increase from pump
discharge connection to line size. Long radius reducing elbows may be substituted for
reducers and increasers if radius of turn is in the vertical plane.
J.
Pump seal cavities or pump base plates shall be piped to drain, except when drawings or
specifications indicate no drain piping, as for small in-line mounted or floor mounted pumps
which have mechanical seals.
K.
Piping in finished portions of the building, except in mechanical equipment rooms where
otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be concealed.
L.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and for access to valves, drains and unions.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
DOMESTIC
WATER PIPING
22 11 16 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.5
3.6
3.7
M.
Install same type of underground piping material specified for inside building to 5 feet outside
of building.
N.
Do not install piping within 3 feet in horizontal direction from electrical panels or equipment.
Coordinate with Division 26 contractor.
O.
Rigidly secure drop elbow ears to structure.
P.
Test piping systems after erection and before concealing or covering. Arrange and pay for all
tests of mechanical systems as required by code and as herein specified. Replace any
materials or workmanship found faulty and retest the system.
Q.
Repair any damage resulting from leakage of piping during testing or guarantee periods
without any expense to Owner.
R.
Perform tests in the presence of the proper inspectors or an authorized representative of
Architect/Engineer.
S.
With remodeling projects, where it is not possible to isolate new piping for testing, take
special care in the installation and in the inspection for leaks after connecting into an existing
system. Where it is possible to isolate new piping, perform tests as required by governing
codes or requirements hereinafter specified.
T.
Furnish certificates to Architect/Engineer that tests have been satisfactorily completed.
INSPECTION OF PLUMBING PIPING
A.
All plumbing systems shall be inspected at completion of each phase while under tests
required by the Administrative Authorities, prior to concealment.
B.
Below Grade: All piping installed below grade shall be inspected prior to burial by the
Architect, the Owner’s Representative or the Engineer. Contractor must notify Architect or
Engineer no less than 24 working hours prior to the desired inspection time. Should the
piping be buried prior to inspection the contractor may be requested to uncover the pining at
no delay to the project and at no cost to the Owner.
C.
Above Grade: All piping installed above grade shall be made available for inspection upon
completion and prior to finish of walls and ceiling. Contractor must notify Architect or
Engineer no less than 24 working hours prior to the desired inspection time. Should the
piping be hidden prior to inspection the contractor may be requested to uncover the pining at
no delay to the project and at no cost to the Owner
TESTING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A.
Provide final test with fixtures in place with 1 inch water column air pressure.
B.
Test domestic water piping, tanks, etc., with hydrostatic pressure of 125 psig for a period of
2 hours.
CLEANING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A.
Upon completion of the installation of the domestic water system, disinfect the system in
accordance with the requirements of the State Department of Health and the local
municipality. The minimum requirements for cleaning the system are as follows:
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
DOMESTIC
WATER PIPING
22 11 16 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.8
3.9
B.
Any water piping system or parts thereof installed or repaired shall be filled with a solution
containing 50 parts per million of available chlorine and allowed to stand for 24 hours before
flushing. This shall be done prior to building occupancy.
C.
Deionized Water System (Local Lab Use): Clean piping by flushing with system deionized
water.
GROOVED CONNECTIONS
A.
Couplings, fittings, valves and pipe shall be assembled in accordance with latest published
instructions of the manufacturer and local codes.
B.
All grooved couplings, fittings and valves shall be the products of a single manufacturer.
Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.
C.
Pipe shall be checked to be certain it is free of indentations, projections, grooves, weld
seams or roll marks on the exterior of the pipe over the entire gasket seating area to assure
a leak-tight seal. Pipe ends must be square cut and in accordance with manufacturer's
standards.
D.
Gaskets shall be of the central cavity pressure responsive design. Gasket style and grade
shall be checked to be certain gasket supplied is suited for the intended service.
E.
Thorough lubrication of the gasket exterior including the lips and/or pipe ends and housing
exterior is essential to prevent pinching of the gasket. Lubricants shall be of type
recommended by the gasket manufacturer for the intended use.
F.
Grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained field representative shall provide on-site
training for contractor’s field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools, application of
groove, and installation of grooved piping products.
G.
Factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the product installation. Contractor
shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.
CORROSION PROTECTION FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING
A.
After testing of underground piping, apply one heavy coat of a coal tar bituminous material,
equal to Bitumastic 50, to stainless steel, aluminum, cadmium plated or galvanized steel
bolts, rods, banding and other items constructed of these materials.
3.10 EXPANSION OF PIPING
A.
Provide expansion loops where shown on drawings or required to prevent damage to piping
and equipment due to thermal expansion in the piping system.
B.
Where loops are shown, the height and width dimensions shall be adhered to where
possible. If adjustments are necessary because of interferences with other work, obtain
Engineer's approval before proceeding with fabrication of the loop.
C.
Install loops with "cold spring" so that loop will have 1/2 of the calculated expansion during
normal operation.
D.
Where space does not permit installation of expansion loops, provide expansion joints as
described in Section 22 11 19, Domestic Water Piping Specialties.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
DOMESTIC
WATER PIPING
22 11 16 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
E.
Anchor pipe in an approved manner at points shown on drawings, using U-bolt or iron bar
clamps secured to the building construction.
F.
Install guides to maintain the position and alignment of piping.
G.
Install runouts from mains and/or risers with swing joints of sufficient length to absorb vertical
expansion or contraction of risers and horizontal expansion or contraction of mains.
H.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, equipment
or fixtures.
I.
Install piping connected to equipment to provide flexibility for thermal stresses and for
vibration. Adequately support and anchor pipe so that strain from weight and thermal
movement of piping is not imposed on the equipment.
J.
Provide piping passing through seismic, expansion, and construction joints with minimum 6
inch deflection capabilities in all directions. Anchor piping on both sides of joint so that
building movement will not cause structural stress on piping supports. Use multiple flexible
pipe connectors or seismic separation assemblies to achieve deflection capabilities
indicated.
3.11 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide connections to water services as noted on the drawings in accordance with local
utility or municipality requirements.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
DOMESTIC
WATER PIPING
22 11 16 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 22 13 16
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Sanitary waste and vent piping
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Plumbers shall be fully qualified and licensed by State authorities.
B.
The manufacturer's mark or name shall be attached to each length of pipe, fitting or device
employed in the piping system.
C.
Cast iron pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil
Institute (CISPI) and manufactured trademark.
D.
Products made of, or containing lead, asbestos, mercury, or other known toxic or hazardous
materials are not acceptable for installation under this Section. Any such products installed
as part of the work of this Section shall be removed and replaced with all costs for removal
and replacement shall be borne solely by the Contractor(s).
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
B.
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
C.
ASTM B828, Procedures for soldered joints
D.
CISPI 301, Latest Issue, Cast Iron Piping
E.
ASTM C564, Hubless Coupling Gaskets
F.
ASTM A74 and 888, Latest Issue, Cast Iron Piping
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings on all equipment provided under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: AB & I, Tyler Pipe and Charlotte Pipe. Manufactured by a
CISPI Member company. Pipe and fittings shall bear the collective trademark of the CISPI.
B.
No-Hub Fittings: Anaco, Clamp-All, Husky, Mission, Tyler, or approved equal.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
SANITARY WASTE
AND VENT PIPING
22 13 16 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.2
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
No-hub Fittings:
1.
2.3
Sanitary sewer – above grade: Equal to Husky SD4000 or Clamp-All Hi Torque 125
no-hub coupling with a shield constructed of 304 corrugated stainless steel with a
minimum thickness of 0.016 inches. Coupling sizes 1-1/2 through 4 inches shall have
four bands and sizes 5 through 10 inches shall have 6 bands. The worm gear drive
clamps shall have a hexagon head to accept a 3/8 inch socketed torque wrench.
Clamps shall be tightened to a minimum of 80 inch pounds. Gaskets shall be
manufactured using neoprene rubber meeting the requirements of ASTM C-564.
Sealing rings shall be molded into the gasket and positioned under each torquing
band. Coupling shall meet the performance requirements of standard FM 1680 Class
1. Smooth shielded couplings shall have a 304 stainless steel shield with a minimum
shield thickness of 24 gauge. Coupling sizes 1-1/2 through 4 inches shall have two
bands and sizes 5 through 10 inches shall have four bands. The coupling shall be
torqued to between 115 and 125 inch pounds.
PIPING WITHIN BUILDING
A.
B.
C.
Sanitary Waste Piping:
1.
Below Grade:
a.
Bell and spigot cast iron with neoprene compression joints.
2.
Above Grade:
a.
Hubless cast iron pipe with no-hub fittings.
Vent Piping:
1.
Below Grade:
a.
Bell and spigot cash iron with neoprene compression joints.
2.
Above Grade:
a.
Hubless cast iron pipe with no-hub fittings.
Condensate Drain and Drain Piping:
1.
Type "L" or "M" hard drawn copper tubing and wrought copper fittings assembled with
95/5 (antimony), 94/6 (silver), 97/3 (copper) or Harris "Brigit" non-lead bearing solder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
SEISMIC RESTRAINT
A.
Fabricate and support piping in accordance with specifications herein, and latest edition of
CPC. Provide seismic restraint in accordance with a current OSHPD pre-approved system
that carries a current OSHPD OPA Number. For seismic restraint, see Section 23 05 48.
B.
Install seismic separation assemblies at building seismic joints.
SIZE OF FIXTURE WASTE AND VENTS
A.
Size of fixture wastes and vents shall be as noted in plumbing schedule on drawings.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
SANITARY WASTE
AND VENT PIPING
22 13 16 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.3
3.4
PREPARATION OF PIPING
A.
Ream pipe ends to remove burrs. Make joints smooth and unobstructed inside. Remove any
obstructions or debris inside piping, blowing it out with compressed air or otherwise cleaning
it internally immediately prior to assembly.
B.
Cap or cover open piping during erection to prevent entry of foreign objects.
GENERAL
A.
All excavation and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 20 00.
B.
No lead bearing solders shall be used for assembly of piping specified under this Section.
Flux shall be water-flushable and lead-free.
C.
Install horizontal piping parallel with adjacent walls and partitions unless otherwise shown.
All risers shall be plumb. Springing or forcing piping into place will not be permitted unless
specifically called for.
D.
Nipples shall be the same material, composition and weight classifications as the pipe with
which they are installed. Close or running thread nipples shall not be used.
E.
Take branches and riser arms off the top of mains at a 45 degree angle, unless otherwise
shown.
F.
Use a minimum of two field fabricated or installed fittings or joints when connecting piping to
equipment or prefabricated piping assemblies.
G.
Pitch horizontal drainage and vent piping 1/4 inch per foot minimum for sizes smaller than 3
inch and 1/8 inch for sizes 3 inch and larger, unless indicated otherwise.
H.
Piping in finished portions of the building, except in mechanical equipment rooms where
otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be concealed.
I.
Install same type of underground piping material specified for inside building to 5 feet outside
of building.
J.
Do not install piping within 3 feet in horizontal direction from electrical panels or equipment.
Coordinate with Division 26 contractor.
K.
Rigidly secure drop elbow ears to structure.
L.
Test piping systems after erection and before concealing or covering. Arrange and pay for all
tests of mechanical systems as required by code and as herein specified. Replace any
materials or workmanship found faulty and retest the system.
M.
All vertical and horizontal offsets in sanitary waste and rainwater piping shall be restrained in
a manner satisfactory to the engineer regardless of their location in the piping system or the
height of the system. In addition, when any stack in a piping system exceeds five (5) floors
or 65 feet in height (whichever is greater), all joints including cleanouts in any pipe
associated with that piping system shall be restrained. As a minimum, each restrained joint
shall have an individual two (2) two-bolt riser clamp on each side of each joint with washer
welded to one half of each riser clamp for piping 10" and smaller and for all larger piping
provide a four (4) bolt riser clamp (two bolts on each arm of each riser clamp) on each side
of each joint. In all cases, the riser clamps across a joint shall be connected by all thread
rods on each side of the riser clamps. The rods shall be extended between the riser clamp
arms outside of the bolts on each arm for 10" and smaller piping and between the bolts on
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
SANITARY WASTE
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
AND VENT PIPING
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
130-202 KMD
22 13 16 - 3
each arm for 12" and larger piping with nuts and washers on both sides of the riser clamp
arms. Submit the proposed restraint detail for each type of joint or fittings to the engineer for
review.
3.5
3.6
N.
Repair any damage resulting from leakage of piping during testing or guarantee periods
without any expense to Owner.
O.
Perform tests in the presence of the proper inspectors or an authorized representative of
Architect/Engineer.
P.
With remodeling projects, where it is not possible to isolate new piping for testing, take
special care in the installation and in the inspection for leaks after connecting into an existing
system. Where it is possible to isolate new piping, perform tests as required by governing
codes or requirements hereinafter specified.
Q.
Furnish certificates to Architect/Engineer that tests have been satisfactorily completed.
INSPECTION OF PLUMBING PIPING
A.
All plumbing systems shall be inspected at completion of each phase while under tests
required by the Administrative Authorities, prior to concealment.
B.
Below Grade: All piping installed below grade shall be inspected prior to burial by the
Architect, the Owner’s Representative or the Engineer. Contractor must notify Architect or
Engineer no less than 24 working hours prior to the desired inspection time. Should the
piping be buried prior to inspection the contractor may be requested to uncover the pining at
no delay to the project and at no cost to the Owner.
C.
Above Grade: All piping installed above grade shall be made available for inspection upon
completion and prior to finish of walls and ceiling. Contractor must notify Architect or
Engineer no less than 24 working hours prior to the desired inspection time. Should the
piping be hidden prior to inspection the contractor may be requested to uncover the pining at
no delay to the project and at no cost to the Owner
TESTING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A.
Test sanitary, and vent piping with air pressure of 5 psig for a period of 15 minutes.
B.
Provide final test with fixtures in place with 1 inch water column air pressure.
C.
3.7
CORROSION PROTECTION FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING
A.
3.8
After testing of underground piping, apply one heavy coat of a coal tar bituminous material,
equal to Bitumastic 50, to stainless steel, aluminum, cadmium plated or galvanized steel
bolts, rods, banding and other items constructed of these materials.
SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide connections to sanitary services as noted on the drawings in accordance with local
utility or municipality requirements.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
SANITARY WASTE
AND VENT PIPING
22 13 16 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 22 14 16
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Provide plumbing piping to serve all fixtures and equipment, as shown on drawings.
B.
Storm sewer piping
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Plumbers shall be fully qualified and licensed by State authorities.
B.
The manufacturer's mark or name shall be attached to each length of pipe, fitting or device
employed in the piping system.
C.
Cast iron pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil
Institute (CISPI) and manufactured trademark.
D.
Products made of, or containing lead, asbestos, mercury, or other known toxic or hazardous
materials are not acceptable for installation under this Section. Any such products installed
as part of the work of this Section shall be removed and replaced with all costs for removal
and replacement shall be borne solely by the Contractor(s).
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
B.
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
C.
CISPI 301, Latest Issue, Cast Iron Piping
D.
ASTM C564, Hubless Coupling Gaskets
E.
ASTM A74 and 888, Latest Issue, Cast Iron Piping
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings on all equipment provided under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: AB & I, Tyler Pipe and Charlotte Pipe. Manufactured by a
CISPI Member company. Pipe and fittings shall bear the collective trademark of the CISPI.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
22 14 16 - 1
130-202 KMD
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.2
B.
Grooved Piping Systems: Victaulic or approved equal.
C.
No-Hub Fittings: Anaco, Clamp-All, Husky, Mission, Tyler, or approved equal.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
No-hub Fittings:
1.
2.3
Storm sewer – above grade: Equal to Husky SD4000 or Clamp-All Hi Torque 125 nohub coupling with a shield constructed of 304 corrugated stainless steel with a
minimum thickness of 0.016 inches. Coupling sizes 1-1/2 through 4 inches shall have
four bands and sizes 5 through 10 inches shall have 6 bands. The worm gear drive
clamps shall have a hexagon head to accept a 3/8 inch socketed torque wrench.
Clamps shall be tightened to a minimum of 80 inch pounds. Gaskets shall be
manufactured using neoprene rubber meeting the requirements of ASTM C-564.
Sealing rings shall be molded into the gasket and positioned under each torquing
band. Coupling shall meet the performance requirements of standard FM 1680 Class
1. Smooth shielded couplings shall have a 304 stainless steel shield with a minimum
shield thickness of 24 gauge. Coupling sizes 1-1/2 through 4 inches shall have two
bands and sizes 5 through 10 inches shall have four bands. The coupling shall be
torqued to between 115 and 125 inch pounds.
PIPING WITHIN BUILDING
A.
Rainwater Piping:
1.
Below Grade:
a.
Bell and spigot cast iron with neoprene compression joints.
2.
Above Grade:
a.
Hubless cast iron pipe with no-hub fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
SEISMIC RESTRAINT
A.
Fabricate and support piping in accordance with specifications herein, and latest edition of
CPC. Provide seismic restraint in accordance with a current OSHPD pre-approved system
that carries a current OSHPD OPA Number. For seismic restraint, see Section 23 05 48.
B.
Install seismic separation assemblies at building seismic joints.
PREPARATION OF PIPING
A.
Ream pipe ends to remove burrs. Make joints smooth and unobstructed inside. Remove any
obstructions or debris inside piping, blowing it out with compressed air or otherwise cleaning
it internally immediately prior to assembly.
B.
Cap or cover open piping during erection to prevent entry of foreign objects.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
22 14 16 - 2
130-202 KMD
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.3
GENERAL
A.
All excavation and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 20 00.
B.
No lead bearing solders shall be used for assembly of piping specified under this Section.
Flux shall be water-flushable and lead-free.
C.
Install horizontal piping parallel with adjacent walls and partitions unless otherwise shown.
All risers shall be plumb. Springing or forcing piping into place will not be permitted unless
specifically called for.
D.
Nipples shall be the same material, composition and weight classifications as the pipe with
which they are installed. Close or running thread nipples shall not be used.
E.
Take branches and riser arms off the top of mains at a 45 degree angle, unless otherwise
shown.
F.
Use a minimum of two field fabricated or installed fittings or joints when connecting piping to
equipment or prefabricated piping assemblies.
G.
Pitch horizontal drainage piping 1/8 inch per foot minimum for sizes 3 inch and larger, unless
indicated otherwise.
H.
Piping in finished portions of the building, except in mechanical equipment rooms where
otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be concealed.
I.
Install same type of underground piping material specified for inside building to 5 feet outside
of building.
J.
Do not install piping within 3 feet in horizontal direction from electrical panels or equipment.
Coordinate with Division 16 contractor.
K.
Rigidly secure drop elbow ears to structure.
L.
Test piping systems after erection and before concealing or covering. Arrange and pay for all
tests of mechanical systems as required by code and as herein specified. Replace any
materials or workmanship found faulty and retest the system.
M.
All vertical and horizontal offsets in rainwater piping shall be restrained in a manner
satisfactory to the engineer regardless of their location in the piping system or the height of
the system. In addition, when any stack in a piping system exceeds five (5) floors or 65 feet
in height (whichever is greater), all joints including cleanouts in any pipe associated with that
piping system shall be restrained. As a minimum, each restrained joint shall have an
individual two (2) two-bolt riser clamp on each side of each joint with washer welded to one
half of each riser clamp for piping 10" and smaller and for all larger piping provide a four (4)
bolt riser clamp (two bolts on each arm of each riser clamp) on each side of each joint. In all
cases, the riser clamps across a joint shall be connected by all thread rods on each side of
the riser clamps. The rods shall be extended between the riser clamp arms outside of the
bolts on each arm for 10" and smaller piping and between the bolts on each arm for 12" and
larger piping with nuts and washers on both sides of the riser clamp arms. Submit the
proposed restraint detail for each type of joint or fittings to the engineer for review.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
22 14 16 - 3
130-202 KMD
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.4
3.5
3.6
N.
Repair any damage resulting from leakage of piping during testing or guarantee periods
without any expense to Owner.
O.
Perform tests in the presence of the proper inspectors or an authorized representative of
Architect/Engineer.
P.
Furnish certificates to Architect/Engineer that tests have been satisfactorily completed.
INSPECTION OF PLUMBING PIPING
A.
All plumbing systems shall be inspected at completion of each phase while under tests
required by the Administrative Authorities, prior to concealment.
B.
Below Grade: All piping installed below grade shall be inspected prior to burial by the
Architect, the Owner’s Representative or the Engineer. Contractor must notify Architect or
Engineer no less than 24 working hours prior to the desired inspection time. Should the
piping be buried prior to inspection the contractor may be requested to uncover the pining at
no delay to the project and at no cost to the Owner.
C.
Above Grade: All piping installed above grade shall be made available for inspection upon
completion and prior to finish of walls and ceiling. Contractor must notify Architect or
Engineer no less than 24 working hours prior to the desired inspection time. Should the
piping be hidden prior to inspection the contractor may be requested to uncover the pining at
no delay to the project and at no cost to the Owner
TESTING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A.
Test storm piping with air pressure of 5 psig for a period of 15 minutes.
B.
Provide final test with fixtures in place with 1 inch water column air pressure.
CORROSION PROTECTION FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING
A.
3.7
After testing of underground piping, apply one heavy coat of a coal tar bituminous material,
equal to Bitumastic 50, to stainless steel, aluminum, cadmium plated or galvanized steel
bolts, rods, banding and other items constructed of these materials.
SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide connections to storm services as noted on the drawings in accordance with local
utility or municipality requirements.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
22 14 16 - 4
130-202 KMD
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 05 16
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Chilled water piping
B.
Hot water heating piping
C.
Underground insulated piping
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding materials and labor shall conform to ASME Code and applicable State labor
regulations.
B.
Use welders fully qualified and licensed by State authorities. Welders shall be certified for
ASME procedures for high pressure systems where applicable.
C.
The manufacturer's mark or name shall be attached to each length of pipe, fitting, and/or
device employed in the piping system.
D.
Underground Piping
1.
Provide the services of a certified manufacturer’s representative to instruct the
contractor on the installation procedures of the piping, and to be present on site to
assist during critical stages of installation and testing. The representative must be a
direct employee of the manufacturer who is certified to provide Field Technical
Assistance (FTA).
2.
One (1) day of FTA shall be provided for each 500 feet of trench with a minimum of
FIVE (5) days required. These FIVE days shall not be consecutive days and must be
spread out over the duration of the installation. It is the installing contractors
responsibility to schedule these days, with enough advance notice, to facilitate the
manufacturer’s representative. The FTA representative shall observe critical periods
of the installation including the following:
a.
Initial inspection of the trench and initial pipe placement
b.
Initial field joint closure instruction and inspection
c.
Any field modification to the piping system.
d.
Initial backfill of piping in trench
3.
Include a report consisting of the installation log indicating actual installed conditions
and test certification signed by the manufacturer’s representative above, the
contractor, and the Architect’s representative.
Include certification by the
manufacturer’s representative that the installation is in conformance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.
Pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall provide testing on the polyurethane foam as
indicated within these specifications.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute).
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
HYDRONIC PIPNG
23 05 16 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.4
B.
ASME (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers).
C.
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials).
D.
ASTM B813, Water-flushable lead-free flux
E.
ASTM B32, Lead-free alloy solder
F.
ASTM B828, Procedures for soldered joints
SUBMITTALS
F.A.
Submit shop drawings on all equipment provided under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Grooved piping systems: Tyco-Grinnell, Victaulic or approved equal.
B.
Fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe: Smith Fiberglass Products, Bondstrand or approved
equal.
C.
Underground insulated piping: Perma-Pipe/ Ric Wil Poly Therm, Urecon, or approved equal.
PIPING AND FITTINGS
A.
Chilled Water, Hot Water Heating:
1.
Above Grade:
a.
Black steel, ASTM A-53 Type F or A-53 Type ERW Grade B or A-106
seamless; 10 inch and smaller - Schedule 40: 12 inch and larger - 0.375 inch
minimum wall thickness. All sizes with welded and flanged joints.
b.
Option for 2” and smaller: Type "L" hard temper copper tubing with wrought
brazed copper fittings, joined with equal to Thermacote Welco 5 solder and flux.
c.
d.
Pipe Fittings for 125 psig Working Pressure:
1)
2-1/2 inch and Smaller: Class 125 cast iron or 300 pound ductile iron,
screwed.
2)
2 inch and Smaller: Precision cold drawn austenitic stainless steel, Type
304/304L, complete with synthetic rubber O-rings. (Grade to suit the
intended service.)
3)
2-1/2 inch and Larger: Ductile iron, conforming to ASTM A536; forged
steel, conforming to ASTM A234; or fabricated from carbon steel pipe,
conforming to ASTM A53; with grooved ends conforming to ANSI/AWWA
C606.
4)
3 inch and Larger: Welding fittings, ANSI B16.9, with wall thickness and
material identical to pipe in which installed. Flanges shall be Class 150,
ANSI B16.5, forged steel, screwed, welding neck or slip-on type.
Pipe Fittings for 250 psig Working Pressure:
1)
2-1/2 inch and Smaller: 250 pound cast iron or 300 pound ductile iron,
screwed.
2)
3 2 inch and Larger: Welding fittings, ANSI B16.9, with wall thickness
and material identical to pipe in which installed. Flanges shall be Class
300, forged steel, screwed, welding neck or slip-on type, ANSI B16.5.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
HYDRONIC PIPNG
23 05 16 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
e.
f.e.
B.
Mechanical grooved couplings and fittings are acceptable, equal to TycoGrinnell Figure 772, 705, 707 or Victaulic Style 07, 75, or 77.
1)
Grooved joint fittings shall be manufactured of ductile iron, conforming to
ASTM A536; forged steel, conforming to ASTM A234; or fabricated from
carbon steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A53; with grooved ends
conforming to ANSI/AWWA C606.
2)
Grooved joint couplings shall consist of ductile iron housings, conforming
to ASTM A536, complete with pressure responsive synthetic rubber
gasket. (Grade to suit the intended service.)
a)
Rigid Type: Coupling housings cast with universal housings shall
be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in
accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9. Tyco-Grinnell Figure 772
or Victaulic Style 07.
b)
Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and
stress relief are required. Flexible couplings may be used in lieu
of flexible connectors at equipment connections. Three couplings
shall be placed in close proximity to the vibration source. TycoGrinnell Figure 705/707 or Victaulic Style 75/77.
c)
Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class
125/150 flanged components. Tyco-Grinnell Figure 71 or Victaulic
Style 741.
Gasket material and flange bolting materials shall be suitable for the service
and pressure class intended.
Underground Insulated Piping:
1.
All underground Chilled Water distribution lines, as shown on the contract drawings,
shall be factory pre-engineered, pre-fabricated and pre-insulated.
All straight
sections, fittings, and other accessories shall be factory prefabricated to job
dimensions, and designed to minimize the number of field welds. The system design
shall be in strict conformance with ANSI B31.1 latest edition, and stamped by a
registered professional engineer employed by the pre-insulated piping system
manufacturer.
2.
Service Pipe shall be Foreign or Domestic Standard Weight, A53, Grade B ERW. All
joints shall be butt-welded for sizes 2 ½ inches and greater, and socket welded for 2
inches and below. Where possible, straight sections shall be supplied in 40 foot
random lengths with 6 inches of piping exposed at each end for field joint fabrication.
20' Sticks are acceptable on jobs that would increase the freight unnecessarily.
3.
Sub-Assemblies, fittings and end seals shall be designed and factory prefabricated
onto the longest practical pipe. Field insulation of fittings shall not be allowed.
4.
The service pipe insulation shall be polyurethane foam with 2 lb/ft³ minimum density,
90% minimum closed cell content, Insulation Compressive Strength of 40 psi, and
maximum initial thermal conductivity of 0.16 Btu-in/hr-ft²-Fº. The insulation shall
completely fill the annular space between the service pipe and the jacket and shall be
bonded to both. Systems using open cell insulation or a nonbonded design shall not
be allowed. The polyurethane foam insulation shall be tested by the manufacturer for
mechanical and thermal properties to assure compliance with the above values. All
test samples will be taken from production material, identified, tagged and tested in
accordance with the table below. Test reports showing results will be furnished to the
owner and/or engineer for approval. Data supplied by the polyurethane foam
chemical supplier is not acceptable.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
HYDRONIC PIPNG
23 05 16 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
ASTM
Sample
STD
Frequency
D 1622
Once per Batch
> 2.0 lb/ft³
Insulation
Compression
Strength
D 1621
Once per Batch
> 40 PSI
Insulation Closed
Cell Content
D 2856
Once per Batch
> 90%
Insulation Thermal
Conductivity
C 518
Once per Batch
< 0.16 BTUinch/hr/ft²/ºF
Attribute
Insulation
Density
Requirement
All insulation shall be provided to a minimum thickness of one & one half (1½) inch
5.
The outer protective jacket shall be either fiberglass (FRP) filament wound directly
onto the urethane foam insulation or Fiberglass pipe with a minimum wall thickness of
.085" with poured or injected urethane insulation systems. Thermoplastic casing
material PVC or Polyethylene, shall not be allowed for direct buried piping. All
straights and fittings shall be factory pre-insulated and jacketed. Jackets over fittings
shall be either chopped spray-up FRP or joined with fiberglass hand layups with
thicknesses equal to the thickness of the FRP jacket on the straight lengths.
No
taping, gluing or shrink wraps shall be allowed on fitting fabrication.
6.
Pipe, valves, fittings and specialties within vaults are not part of the prefabricated
system and shall be furnished uninsulated by the contractor and then field insulated
by the insulation subcontractor.
7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
SEISMIC RESTRAINT
A.
Fabricate and support piping in accordance with specifications herein, and latest edition of
CMC. Provide seismic restraint in accordance with a current OSHPD pre-approved system
that carries a current OSHPD OPA Number. For seismic restraint, see Section 23 05 48.
B.
Install seismic separation assemblies at building seismic joints.
PREPARATION OF PIPING
A.
Ream pipe ends to remove burrs. Make joints smooth and unobstructed inside. Remove any
obstructions or debris inside piping, blowing it out with compressed air or otherwise cleaning
it internally immediately prior to assembly.
B.
Cap or cover open piping during erection to prevent entry of foreign objects.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
HYDRONIC PIPNG
23 05 16 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.3
GENERAL
A.
No lead bearing solders shall be used for assembly of piping specified under this Section.
Flux shall be water-flushable and lead-free.
B.
Nipples shall be the same material, composition and weight classification as the pipe with
which they are installed. Close or running thread nipples shall not be used.
C.
Install horizontal piping parallel with adjacent walls and partitions unless otherwise shown.
All risers shall be plumb. Springing or forcing piping into place will not be permitted unless
specifically called for.
D.
Take branches and riser arms off the top of mains at a 45 degree angle, unless otherwise
shown.
E.
Use a minimum of two field fabricated or installed fittings or joints when connecting piping to
equipment or prefabricated piping assemblies.
F.
Grade piping for drainage using 1 inch drop per 40 feet of run, except where otherwise
indicated. Hot water heating and chilled water piping shall pitch upward in direction of flow.
G.
Provide manual drain valves at low points and bottom of risers in chilled water and hot water
heating piping.
H.
Where air pockets or water traps cannot be avoided, provide means for drainage of low
points in water piping, with 3/4 inch drain valve. Provide manual air vents for all air pockets
and high points of water piping systems, with 1/2 inch tubing and boiler drain valve installed
in accessible location. Where it is necessary or where indicated, provide automatic air vents.
Install ball valve shut-off ahead of each automatic air vent that does not contain an integral
shutoff valve.
I.
Arrange piping to provide access to coils in piping or ductwork, manholes and access
openings, and to permit convenient removal of heads and coils and pulling of tubes.
Removal of heads and coils and pulling of tubes shall be accomplished without disturbing
equipment shutoff valves and by the removal of a minimum amount of piping between
shutoff valves and equipment. Provide additional flanges or unions as required to provide
these features.
J.
Run piping to pumps line size as close as possible to pump connections. Pump shut-off
valves, check valves, [flexible connections] and strainers shall be line size. Provide eccentric
reducer, flat on top, at pump suction to reduce from line size to pump suction connection
size, except where suction diffusers are used. Provide concentric increaser at pump
discharge to increase from pump discharge connection to line size. Long radius reducing
elbows may be substituted for reducers and increasers if radius of turn is in the vertical
plane.
K.
Pump seal cavities or pump base plates shall be piped to drain, except when drawings or
specifications indicate no drain piping, as for small in-line mounted or floor mounted pumps
which have mechanical seals.
L.
All control valves shall be set by this Contractor. Piping to control valves shall be run line
size as close as possible to valve connections. Concentric increasers at valve outlets may
be used. Use eccentric reducers at valve inlets, flat on top. Strainers shall be line size.
Provide unions, grooved joint couplings or flanges at automatic control valves for servicing.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
HYDRONIC PIPNG
23 05 16 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.4
3.5
M.
Piping in finished portions of the building, except in mechanical equipment rooms or where
otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be concealed.
N.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and for access to valves, air vents, drains and
unions.
O.
Install same type underground piping material specified for inside building to 5 feet outside of
building.
P.
Do not install piping within 3 feet in horizontal direction from electrical panels or equipment.
Coordinate with Division 26 contractor.
WELDED CONNECTIONS
A.
All welding shall be done in accordance with Chapter V of the American Standard Code for
Pressure Piping, ASA B31.3 (as amended to date) unless otherwise noted.
B.
Make welded joints with continuous welds, without backing rings, and with pipe ends
beveled before welding. Gas cuts shall be true and free from burned metal. Before welding,
welding surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned. Piping shall be carefully aligned and no weld
metal shall project inside the pipe.
C.
Use seamless butt-welding fittings at all elbows, tees and reducers. Mitered or fabricated
elbows will not be permitted. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the grooved
coupling manufacturer.
D.
Branch lines at least two pipe sizes smaller than the main may be connected by means of
3000 psig forged steel couplings or "Threadolets" in lieu of welding tees.
E.
Where branch lines are at least two pipe sizes smaller than the main and the main is larger
than 3", direct welding to the main may be permitted using a "Threadolet". The welder shall
demonstrate to the Owner and/or Engineer, acceptable workmanship with this procedure,
including proper matching of branch pipe ends to wall contour of the main.
GROOVED CONNECTIONS
A.
Couplings, fittings, valves and pipe shall be assembled in accordance with the latest
published instructions of the manufacturer and local codes.
B.
Pipe shall be checked to be certain that it is free of indentations, projections, grooves, weld
seams or roll marks on the exterior of the pipe over the entire gasket seating area to assure
a leak-tight seal. Pipe ends must be square cut and in accordance with the manufacturer's
standards.
C.
Gaskets shall be of the central cavity pressure responsive design. Gasket style and grade
shall be checked to be certain that the gasket supplied is suited for the intended service.
Visual inspection of the gasket is required to ensure proper gasket seating.
D.
Thorough lubrication of the gasket exterior including the lips and pipe ends and housing
exterior is essential to prevent pinching of the gasket. Lubricants shall be of type
recommended by the gasket manufacturer for the intended use.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
HYDRONIC PIPNG
23 05 16 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
E.
All grooved couplings, fittings, valves and specialties shall be the products of a single
manufacturer. Grooved products shall carry a ten year limited warranty provided by the
manufacturer.
F.
Grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained field representative shall provide on-site
training for contractor’s field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools, application of
groove, and installation of grooved piping products.
G.F. Factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the product installation. Contractor
shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.
3.63.5 MECHANICALLY FORMED TEE CONNECTIONS
A.
Mechanically extracted collars shall be formed in a continuous operation consisting of drilling
a pilot hole and drawing out the tube surface to form a collar having a height of not less than
three times the thickness of the tube wall. The collaring device shall be fully adjustable as to
insure proper tolerance and complete uniformity of the joint.
B.
The branch shall be notched to conform with the inner curve of the run tube and dimpled to
insure penetration of the branch tube into the collar is of sufficient depth for brazing and that
the branch tube does not obstruct the flow in the main line tube.
C.
All joints shall be brazed in accordance with the Copper Development Association Copper
Tube Handbook using B-cup series filler metal. Soft soldered joints will not be permitted.
D.
Mechanically formed branch collars shall be listed by National Standard Plumbing Code,
BOCA, IAMPO, SBCC, HUD, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Underwriters Laboratory, and
shall be acceptable to governing authorities.
3.73.6 TESTING OF HEATING WATER, CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS
A.
Test these systems under a hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig or 1-1/2 times normal operating
pressure, whichever is greater, for a period of 4 hours.
B.
Apply tests to all piping and equipment that is part of these systems, including tanks, pumps,
and valves, except items that might be damaged because of excessive pressures.
C.
Start heating and cooling systems, following a procedure that will remove all air from the
piping systems.
3.83.7 CLEANING OF HEATING WATER, CHILLED WATER PIPING
A.
After all equipment and piping has been installed, clean piping systems as follows:
1.
Circulate a solution containing 1 pound of trisodium phosphate per 50 gallons of water
for 24 hours, at maximum temperature for each system. Operate all system pumps for
a minimum of 50% of the cleaning time.
2.
Drain system and thoroughly flush with water.
3.
Fill, operate and drain system repeatedly until clean. Remove mesh elements of
strainers at pumps, control valves and elsewhere and clean or replace repeatedly until
system can operate continuously with no buildup of dirt on strainer mesh elements.
4.
After pipe cleaning is completed, flush and inspect all mechanical seals and pump
impellers for wear and/or damage and replace same with new parts, if defective.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
HYDRONIC PIPNG
23 05 16 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.93.8 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING
A.
3.103.9
After testing of underground piping, apply one heavy coat of coal tar bituminous material,
equal to Bitumastic 50, to stainless steel, aluminum, cadmium plated or galvanized steel
bolts, rods, banding and other items constructed of these materials.
EXPANSION OF PIPING
A.
Provide expansion loops where shown on drawings or required to prevent damage to piping
and equipment due to thermal expansion in the piping system.
B.
Where loops are shown, the height and width dimensions shall be adhered to where
possible. If adjustments are necessary because of interferences with other work, obtain
Engineer's approval before proceeding with fabrication of the loop.
C.
Expansion loops shall be all welded steel construction, utilizing long radius elbows.
D.
Use flexible type grooved mechanical couplings on expansion loops, in accordance with the
latest Victaulic recommendations for expansion joints.
E.
Install loops with "cold spring" so that loop will have 1/2 of the calculated expansion during
normal operation.
F.
Anchor pipe in an approved manner at points shown on drawings, using U-bolt or iron bar
clamps secured to the building construction.
G.
Install guides to maintain the position and alignment of piping.
H.
Install runouts from mains and/or risers with swing joints of sufficient length to absorb vertical
expansion or contraction of risers and horizontal expansion or contraction of mains.
I.
Where space does not permit installation of expansion loops, provide expansion joints as
described in Section 23 05 19, Hydronic Specialties.
J.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, equipment
or fixtures.
K.
Install piping connected to equipment to provide flexibility for thermal stresses and for
vibration. Adequately support and anchor pipe so that strain from weight and thermal
movement of piping is not imposed on the equipment.
L.
Provide piping passing through seismic, expansion, and construction joints with minimum 9
inch deflection capabilities in all directions. Anchor piping on both sides of joint so that
building movement will not cause structural stress on piping supports. Use multiple flexible
pipe connectors or seismic separation assemblies to achieve deflection capabilities
indicated.
3.113.10
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A.
Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for the installation of mechanical work
in accord with Division 2. Repair pipelines and other work damaged during excavation and
backfilling.
B.
All piping shall be fully bedded on sand. Place a minimum 4-inch deep layer on the leveled
trench bottom for this purpose.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
HYDRONIC PIPNG
23 05 16 - 8
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
C.
The trench shall be evenly backfilled with similar materials as the bedding in 6 inch
compacted layers to a minimum height of 6 inches above the top of the insulated piping
system. The remaining trench shall be evenly and continuously backfilled in uniform layers
with suitable excavated soil as required by the contract documents. Earth backfill shall be
free of rocks over 2" in diameter and foreign matter. Disposal of excess materials as
directed.
D.
The installing contractor shall handle the system in accordance with the directions furnished
by the manufacturer and as approved by the architect and engineer. The steel casings shall
be air tested at 15 psig and the service piping shall be hydrostatically hammer tested to 150
psig or 1 1/2 times the operating pressure, or as specified in the contract documents. The
test pressure shall be held for not less than one hour.
3.123.11
UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Slope all piping as to vent and drain to building or Vaults.
B.
Utility Marking Tape shall be installed over the entire length of the underground piping.
Install plastic detector tape above each pipe at the elevation of approximately 12 inches
above the top of pipe line.
C.
All underground piping systems must be inspected by the Owner’s representative prior to
backfilling.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
HYDRONIC PIPNG
23 05 16 - 9
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 05 23
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Furnish and install valves shown on drawings and specified for the isolation or servicing of
mechanical systems and equipment.
B.
Install valves furnished with equipment specified under other sections of the specifications.
C.
Coordinate the actuator installation and hookup of any motorized valves with the
Temperature Control Contractor or Division 26 contractor as required for a complete and
functioning system.
VALVES INCLUDED
A.
Ball valves
B.
Butterfly valves
C.
Check valves
D.
Drain valves
E.
Gate valves
F.
Globe valves
G.
Plug valves
K.
Test Plugs
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings for all valves. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for shop drawing preparation
requirements.
B.
Provide complete parts list for all valves in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Product
data, including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end
connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required
clearances, and installation instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Ball Valves: Apollo, Hammond, Jamesbury, Milwaukee, Tyco-Grinnell, Victaulic, Watts, W-KM.
B.
Ball Valves (plastic): Chemtrol, Fischer George (FG), GSR, Hayward.
C.
Butterfly Valves: Centerline, DeZurik, Grinnell, Jamesbury, Mueller, Nibco, Tyco-Grinnell,
Victaulic.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
VALVES
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
23 05 23 - 1
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
130-202 KMD
2.2
D.
Butterfly Valves (plastic): Fischer George (FG), Chemtrol or approved equal.
E.
Check Valves: Apollo, Clow, Hammond, Metraflex, Pokorney, Stockham, Technocheck,
TRW-Mission, Tyco-Grinnell, Victaulic, Nibco, Milwaukee, Meuller.
F.
Drain Valves: Apollo, Chicago Faucet, Hammond, Watts, Nibco.
G.
Gate Valves: Stockham, Crane, Grinnell, Hammond, Powell, Nibco, Milwaukee.
H.
Globe Valves: Stockham, Crane, Grinnell, Hammond, Nibco, Powell, Milwaukee.
I.
Automatic Flow Control Devices Assemblies: Flow Design, Griswold or Approved Equal.
L.
Test Plugs: Peterson Engineering, Trerice or Approved Equal.
GENERAL
A.
Manufacturer's name and model, figure or drawing numbers as specified are for
identification of type, quality and construction.
B.
Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible.
C.
Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of
body.
D.
Ball valves shall be constructed to permit repacking without removal of the valve body from
the line and stem shall not blow out under pressure. Valves used for chilled water; heating
hot water; and domestic tempered, hot, and cold water service shall be insulated as detailed
on the drawings.
E.
2-1/2 inch through 4 6 inch butterfly valves shall have lever infinite position (throttling) type
operators with memory stop and position lock. Valves 6" and larger shall have enclosed selflocking, waterproof, factory lubricated worm gear operators with built-in adjustable
mechanical memory stop position with lock and position indicator. Provide chain operators
with chain cleats for all valves more than 7'-0" above the floor (hereinafter specified).
Manufacturer shall certify compliance with bubble tight shutoff requirements at a differential
pressure of not less than 200 psi and temperature specified with the downstream flange
removed with flow in either direction. In addition, valves used for balancing shall be provided
with adjustable stops and certified suitable for continuous throttling service. Butterfly valves
installed in horizontal piping shall be mounted with the stem in the horizontal position and
rotation so that the bottom of the dish lifts in the direction of flow.
F.
Valves shall be for not less than 150 psig water working pressure, and in any event shall be
compatible in working pressure to the pipe and fittings to which they are attached. Valves
shall be designed for the service for which they are installed with all components suitable for
operation with the fluid flowing in the system.
G.
Gate valves shall be used for on-off service only.
H.
Except as otherwise specified or shown on plans, valves 2-1/2 inch and smaller shall have
screwed end connections and valves 3 inch and larger shall have flange end construction.
I.
All valves utilized for fuel oil or gas service shall be U.L. listed for that service.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
VALVES
23 05 23 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.3
PLUMBING, CHILLED WATER, HOT WATER HEATING)
A.
Ball Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Equal to "Apollo-3" Series 82-100, Threaded 3-piece
full-port ball valve with 600 psig w.o.g. bronze body, chrome plated ball and blow-out proof
stainless steel stem, and reinforced Teflon packing seals, and seats. All balls shall be made
solid material and drilled. Valve utilizing hollow balls are not acceptable. Valve shall comply
with MSS SP-110. Where valves are used for balancing purposes, provide balancing stops.
When valves are installed in insulated piping, provide a protective sleeve that allows
operation of the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the insulation, provide
extended stems of sufficient length to elevate the operator handle and the mechanical
memory and position lock device above the insulation. Valves shall be provided by the
manufacture cleaned and bagged for Oxygen service.
B.
C.B. Ball Valves - 3 inches and Larger: Equal to W-K-M Dynaseal 310 or Nibco 7515-CS-F-66/75
ball valve with a full bore, carbon steel body; stainless steel ball and stem; and TFE seat.
Valves 6 inches and smaller used for shut-off service shall have latch-lock handle and when
used for throttling service shall have infinite throttling handle with indicator disc adjustable
stop. Valve shall comply with MSS SP-85. Valves 8 inches and larger shall have a worm
screw, enclosed operator with positive indicator and, when used for throttling service, an
adjustable stop. Where valves are to be installed in insulated piping, provide a protective
sleeve that allows operation of the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the
insulation, provide extended stems of sufficient length to elevate the operator handle, and
memory and position locking device above the insulation.
D.C. Grooved Ball Valves – 2-1/2 inches through 6 inches: Equal to Tyco-Grinnell Model BV835
or Victaulic Series 726 ball valve with standard bore ductile iron body, chrome plated carbon
steel ball and stem; and TFE seat. Valves 6 inches and smaller used for shut-off service
shall have latch-lock handle and when used for throttling service shall have infinite throttling
handle with indicator disc adjustable stop.
E.D. Butterfly Valves - 2 inches and Larger: Nibco - LD2000-3 Butterfly valves shall have drilled
and tapped lugs rated for 150 psig positive at minimum temperature of 150oF bubble tight
shut off when fully closed. Valves shall have ductile iron bodies with bronze disc, Type 416
stainless steel stem, self-lubricating bushings, and an EPDM seat suitable for at least 250oF.
continuous operation with forced hot water. Valves 6 inches and smaller used for shut off
service shall have latch-lock handle and, when used for throttling service, an infinite throttling
handle with indicator disc adjustable stop. Valves 8 inches and larger shall have worm
screw, enclosed operator with positive indicator and, when used for throttling service, an
adjustable stop. Where valves are to be installed in insulated piping, provide extended stems
of sufficient length to elevate the operator handle, and memory and position locking device
above the insulation.
F.
Grooved Butterfly Valves. The operators shall be as specified hereinbefore:
1.
Butterfly Valves – 2-1/2 inches to 12 inches: Equal to a Tyco-Grinnell Model B302 or
Victaulic Series Vic®-300. Butterfly Valves, 300 PSIG with grooved ends and
polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) coated, ductile iron (ASTM A-536) body rated for bubble
tight (deadend or bi-directional) service. The disc shall be synthetic rubber
encapsulated ductile iron for the intended service. The seats shall be tested to MSDSSP-67. Memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing service. Handles available,
Gear Operator, 2 Position handle, Chain Wheel option, Locking Device, and Lever
Lock handle.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
VALVES
23 05 23 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.1.
Butterfly Valves - 14 inches and Larger: Equal to a Tyco-Grinnell Model B308 or
Victaulic Series 709 Butterfly Valve, 175 PSI with grooved ends, a polyphenylene
sulfide (PPS) coated ductile iron (ASTM A-536) body, ductile iron disc, and two-piece
design 17-4 PH stainless steel stem. The seat and seal material shall be suitable
intended service. The valves shall have Type 304 stainless steel disc shoulder and
seal retaining screws, reinforced teflon bearings, gear operator, electric or pneumatic.
Seat shall be tested in accordance with MSS-SP-67. The valves shall be rated for
bubble tight (dead-end or bi-directional) service with memory stop for throttling,
metering or balancing service. Handles available, Gear Operator, 2 Position handle,
Chain Wheel option, Locking Device, and Lever Lock handle.
G.E. Check Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Equal to Stockham Figure B-319 or Nibco T413B,
ANSI Class 125 (rated for a minimum 150 psig w.o.g. at 150°F.) bronze, swing check valve
with screwed ends and bronze disc.
H.F. Check Valves - 3 inches and Larger: Equal to Stockham Figure AG-931 or Nibco F918B,
ANSI Class 125 (rated for a minimum 150 psig w.o.g. at 150°F.) check valve with a 3
percent nickel cast iron body and disc, a stainless steel seat and pin, and flanged
connections.
I.G.
Non-Slam Check Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Equal to Clow Figure 329 or Nibco
F918B, ANSI Class 125 (rated for a minimum 150 psig w.o.g. at 150°F.) silent check valve
with Buna-N inserts.
J.H.
Non-Slam Check Valves - 3 inches and Larger: Equal to Clow Figure 636 or Nibco W910-W,
ANSI Class 125 (rated for a minimum 150 psig w.o.g. at 150oF.) silent check valve with
Buna-N inserts.
K.
L.I.
Gate Valves - 2 inches and Smaller: Equal to Stockham Figure B-105 or Nibco T124, ANSI
Class 125 (rated for a minimum 150 psig w.o.g. at 150°F.) gate valve with bronze body, solid
style bronze disc, bronze bonnet, screwed end connection and a rising-type stem of coppersilicon alloy.
M.J. Gate Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Equal to Stockham Figure G-623 or Nibco F617-0,
ANSI Class 125 (rated for a minimum 150 psig w.o.g. at 150°F.) valve with bronze fittings
OS & Y silicon bronze shaft, and flanged end connections. The solid style bronze disc shall
be fully guided. The stem shall be steel with OS & Y construction.
N.
O.K. Globe Valves - 2 inches and Smaller: Equal to Stockham Figure B-16 and B-216 (for angle
valves) or Nibco T211B, ANSI Class 125 (rated for a minimum 150 psig w.o.g. at 150°F.)
valve with bronze body, bronze disc, bronze bonnet, copper-silicon alloy stem and screwed
end connections.
P.L.
2.4
Globe Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Equal to Stockham Figure D-512-6 and D-515-6 (for
angle valves) or Nibco F718 B and 7818B (for angle valves), ANSI Class 150 (rated for a
minimum 250 psig w.o.g. at 150°F.) globe ductile iron bodied valve with a bronze disc,
bronze seat, bronze stem, and flanged end connections.
EMERGENCY EYEWASH AND SHOWERS
A.
For water supply to emergency eyewash and showers provide shutoff valve equal to "Apollo"
Series 75-100 bronze pad locking ball valve with 600 psig w.o.g. bronze body, chrome
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
VALVES
23 05 23 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
plated brass ball and blow-out proof brass stem, and reinforced Teflon (with 15% glass)
packing, bearings, and seats. All balls shall be made solid material and drilled. Valves
utilizing hollow balls are not acceptable. When the valve is installed in insulated piping,
provide extended stems of sufficient length to elevate the operate handle and the
mechanical positive lock device above the insulation.
2.5
GAS SERVICE AND COMPRESSED AIR
A.
Ball Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Equal to "Apollo-3" Series 82-100 or Nibco
T0595YUL, 3-piece, full-port ball valve, bronze body, stainless steel ball and blow-out proof
[brass] stem, Teflon seals and seats.
B.
C.
2.6
Ball Valves - 3 inches and Larger: Equal to W-K-M Dynaseal 310 or Nibco T0595-CS-R-66,
full bore, carbon steel body, stainless steel ball and stem, TFE seat. Valves 6 inches and
smaller used for shut-off service shall have latch-lock handle and when used for throttling
service shall have infinite throttling handle with indicator disc adjustable stop. Valves 8
inches and larger shall have worm screw enclosed operator with positive indicator.
LOW PRESSURE STEAM (0 - 15 PSIG), MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM (15 - 125 PSIG),
CONDENSATE RETURN
A.
Ball Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Equal to "Apollo-3" Series 82-100, 3-piece, full-port
ball valve, bronze body, stainless steel ball and blow-out proof stem, Teflon seals and seats
and extended stem to accommodate insulation.
B.
Ball Valves - 3 inches and Larger: Equal to W-K-M Dynaseal 310, full bore or Nibco F515CS-F-66/FS carbon steel body, stainless steel ball and stem, TFE seat. Provide worm screw
enclosed operator with positive indicator. Provide extended stem to accommodate insulation
on insulated piping.
C.
Butterfly Valves - 2 inches and Larger: Equal to Centerline LT series or Nibco LD2000-5
butterfly valves with drilled and tapped lugs and rated for 150 psig positive bubble tight shut
when fully closed. Valves shall have ductile iron bodies with bronze disc, Type 304 stainless
steel shaft, self-lubricating bushings, EDPM seat suitable for at least 250oF. continuous
operation with forced hot water. Provide with worm screw enclosed operator with positive
indicator. Provide extended stem to accommodate insulation on insulated piping.
D.
Check Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Equal to Stockham Figure B-319 or Nibco T413B,
ANSI Class 125 (150 psig with 125 psig saturated steam) swing check valve with an ASTM
B-62 bronze body and seat and screwed connections.
E.
Check Valves - 3 inches and Larger: Equal to Stockham Figure AG-931, 200 cwp (150 psig
with 125 psig saturated steam) or Nibco F918B check valve with a 3 percent Nickel cast iron
body and disc, a stainless steel seat and pin and flanged connections.
F.
Gate Valves - 2 inches and Smaller: Equal to Stockham Figure B-105 or Nibco T124, ANSI
Class 125 ASTM B-62 bronze bodied valve with screwed end connections. The solid style
disc and bonnet shall also be bronze, and the rising-type stem shall be copper-silicon alloy.
G.
Gate Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Equal to Stockham Figure G-623 or Nibco 7617-0,
ANSI Class 125 cast iron bodied valve with bronze fittings and flanged end connections. The
solid style bronze disc shall be fully guided. The stem shall be steel with OS & Y
construction.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
VALVES
23 05 23 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.7
2.8
2.9
H.
Globe Valves - 2 inches and Smaller: Equal to Stockham Figure B-16 and B-216 (for angle
valves) or Nibco T211B and T311Y (for angle valves), ANSI Class 125 bronze (ASTM B-62)
bodied valve with screwed end connections. The disc and bonnet shall also be bronze, and
the stem shall be copper-silicon alloy.
I.
Globe Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Equal to Stockham Figure D-512-6 and D-515-6 (for
angle valves) or Nibco F718B and F818B (for angle valves), ANSI Class 150 ductile iron
bodied valve with flanged end connections. The disc, seat and stem shall also be bronze
(Stockham Trim No. 6).
DEIONIZED WATER
A.
Flanges: PVC, flanged, with N.I.P.
B.
Ball Valves - 3/8 inch through 4 inch: Equal to F.G. Type 346 or Nibco F45TB-E, CPVC full
port valves with socket weld end connections as required to match the piping system.
Provide valves rated for at least 150 psig with 73oF. water and rated for bubble tight shut off
for dead end service when fully closed. Provide valves with union connections on both sides
to allow in-line valve repair without disturbing piping. Seats shall be Teflon, and O-rings shall
be EPDM or Viton.
C.
Ball Check - 2 inches and Smaller: Equal to F.G. Type 360 CPVC, or equal to G. F. Type
361 PVDF or U51BC-E (CPVC) valves with screwed or socket weld end connections.
Provide valves rated for at least 150 psig with 73oF. water. Provide valves with union
connections on both sides to allow in-line valve repair without disturbing piping. Seals shall
be EPDM or Viton.
D.
Ball Check - 2-1/2 inches through 4 inches: Equal to Chemtrol CPVC or Nibco U51BC-E
(CPVC) valves with flanged or socket weld end connections. Provide valves rated for at least
150 psig with 73oF. water. Provide valves with union connections on both sides to allow inline valve repair without disturbing piping. Seals shall be Viton.
E.
Diaphragm Valves - 2 inches and Smaller: Equal to F.G. Type 315 PVDF with plain spigots
for heat fusion joining. Provide valves rated for at least 150 psig with 300oF. steam or water.
Valve construction shall allow diaphragm replacement without removing the valve or
handwheel. Operating mechanisms shall be hermetically sealed and isolated from the water.
All assembly bolts shall be 316 stainless steel. Diaphragm shall be PTFE.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Piping 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Equal to Apollo Series 78-100 ball valve, 600 pound,
bronze body, chrome plated brass ball and blow-out proof brass stem, reinforced Teflon
seals and seats, and 3/4 inch hose thread outlet with cap.
B.
Piping 3 inches and Larger: 2 inch ball valve with capped nipple threaded for 2 inch hose
unless specified or noted otherwise. Equal to "Apollo" Series 70-100 or Nibco T580-70 ball
valve, 600 pound, bronze body, stainless steel ball and blow-out proof brass stem,
reinforced Teflon seals and seats.
C.
Provide vacuum breakers on hose bibbs in potable water systems.
VALVE OPERATORS: Each 2-1/2 inch or larger main or branch valve installed in any boiler room
or equipment room at an elevation of 7'-0" or greater above the floor shall be equipped with the
appropriate size Babbitt adjustable sprocket rim with chain guide for chain operation and with metal
tags with arrows and appropriate labeling indicating which way the chain moves to "open" or
"close" the valve. These valves shall be installed with the handwheel in a vertical plane. The
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
VALVES
23 05 23 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
continuous chain in this type of installation shall reach within five feet of floor and be hooked to
clips arranged to keep walking aisles clear.
2.10 VALVE CONNECTIONS: Provide valves suitable for connecting to adjoining piping as specified for
pipe joints. Unless noted otherwise, use only line sized valves.
2.11 TEST PLUGS
A.
Test ports shall be pressure and temperature test plugs. Plugs shall be self sealing plugs
rated for the temperature, pressure and fluid associated with the application and shall be
capable of accepting a needle type temperature or pressure probe and reclosing when the
probe is removed.
B.
Plugs shall be provided with threaded protective caps.
C.
One temperature and pressure test kit suitable for the plugs used on the job shall be
provided to the Owner on all installations where the plugs are used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Furnish and install valves where required and/or indicated on drawings for the control,
operation and maintenance of all mechanical equipment and systems. Valves shall be
installed on each side of control valves and at all mechanical apparatus and fixtures to
permit maintenance of same without shutting down service of the piping systems in the
building.
B.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
C.
Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
D.
Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
E.
Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
F.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
G.
Valves at hot water heating and cooling coil connections shall be 2-piece body ball valve
style.
H.
Install manual drain valves at every low point of each water piping system. Exact location of
each drain valves shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
I.
Provide non-slam check valves in discharge piping of condensate pumps and sump pumps.
J.
Grooved end valves shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved fittings and couplings
and shall carry a ten year limited warranty provided by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
VALVES
23 05 23 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 05 53
PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Paint exposed steel, piping and insulated piping and equipment in mechanical rooms and
other similar unfinished spaces as called out in this Section.
B.
Identify piping, equipment and ductwork.
C.
Install marking tape over exterior utilities.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide schedule of paint, colors and numbers if approved manufacturer other than one
whose numbers are specified is used.
B.
Provide list of valves to be tagged and identifying description.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Paint: Benjamin Moore, Devoe, Pratt and Lambert, Rust-O-Leum.
B.
Pipe labels: Seton or Brady.
C.
Exterior utilities marking: Allen Systems, Inc., Brady or Seton.
PAINTING
A.
2.3
PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A.
2.4
Use one of the following systems:
1.
Equal to Seton snap-on pipe markers, color coded, as noted, Type SNA markers for
pipe sizes 3/4 inch to 5-7/8 inch and Type STR for sizes 6 inch and larger.
2.
Equal to Brady pressure sensitive pipe markers, arrows and pipe banding tape, No. B946 for insulated pipe and No. B-689 for uninsulated pipe, color coded as noted.
DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A.
2.5
This Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and painting items described in this
section with the exception of priming canvas insulation jacketing, which will be done under
the insulation sections of this specification.
Label with 1-1/2 inch black stenciled letters.
CEILING IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A.
Equal to "Moore" 5/8 inch diameter marking tacks with celluloid covering suitable for ink
notation on a colored face.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
PAINTING AND
IDENTIFICATION
23 05 53 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.6
VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A.
2.7
Tags shall be brass (approximately 19 gauge), 2 inch round minimum, secured with brass
"S" hook, chain, or plastic tie wrap.
EXTERIOR UTILITIES MARKING
A.
Install equal to Allen Systems, Inc. "Markline" marking tape over exterior underground
metallic piping, cabling or wiring. Install equal to Allen Systems, Inc. "Detectatape" over
exterior underground non-metallic piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PAINTING
A.
Paint insulation on piping and equipment with latex paint.
B.
Clean oil, rust and/or scale from exposed iron and steel work and paint with Extend-O-Rust
neutralizer prior to finish coat of paint.
C.
Omit painting of galvanized or non-ferrous surfaces and factory-painted surfaces.
D.
Touch up factory finishes on exposed items of equipment in finished and unfinished spaces
which become chipped or scratched during shipment, installation or during the construction
period. Finish color to match factory color.
E.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Provide temporary
protective wrappings as required to avoid paint spattering on surfaces near work area.
Remove those coverings when painting is completed. Upon completion of painting work,
clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper
methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished
surfaces.
PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Label piping and ductwork after painting is completed.
B.
At each side of label, tape with directional arrows shall be wrapped entirely around pipe with
at least 1 inch overlap or across visible face of duct when standing on floor below.
C.
Label all new ductwork, denoting system number and type (i.e. supply, return, exhaust, etc.)
and direction of flow.
D.
Label fire protection system feed mains, standpipe horizontal feed mains and fire department
connection feed mains. Fire protection system branch lines and cross mains with branch line
connections are not required to be labeled.
E.
Identification shall occur at the following locations:
1.
At no more than 15 foot intervals on a straight run of pipe.
2.
Wherever a pipe or duct turns 90 degrees or tees.
3.
Wherever a pipe or duct passes through a wall, floor, or ceiling, on both sides.
4.
At each branch or riser takeoff.
5.
Adjacent to each valve, device, or fitting.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
PAINTING AND
IDENTIFICATION
23 05 53 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
6.
F.
At other locations, for ease of location and maintenance as directed by the Owner or
Architect/Engineer.
Furnish and install the following labels on the appropriate systems. The pipe service
description and color schemes noted are intended to be standard manufacturer's labels. In
some cases, multiple standard labels or standard and custom labels will be required to be
combined to achieve the desired description.
Pipe Service Description
Condensate Return
Hi-Pressure Condensate
Lo-Pressure Condensate
Lo-Pressure Steam
Medium Pressure Steam
Hi-Pressure Steam
Chilled Water Supply
Chilled Water Return
Heating Hot Water Supply
Heating Hot Water Return
G.
3.3
3.4
Letters
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
White
White
Black
Black
Identify all exposed piping and also piping in accessible concealed spaces, such as above
lay-in type ceilings, below raised floors and at access panels in non-accessible ceilings and
in walls.
CEILING IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A.
Provide markers on all removable ceilings and ceiling access panels to indicate locations of
valves, dampers, smoke detectors, etc. and other mechanical items that may require
servicing or adjustment. Glue marking tacks in place with white glue to prevent their falling
out.
B.
Color code markers as follows:
1.
Red: Fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, sprinkler
shutoff valves, duct type smoke detectors.
a.
Notation:
D - Damper
V - Valve
S - Smoke Detector
H - Heat Detector
2.
Yellow: Steam, radiation, reheat, chilled water.
a.
Notation:
V - Valve
3.
Gold: Automatic and balancing dampers.
a.
Notation:
V - Valve
D - Damper
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.5
Background
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Green
Green
Yellow
Yellow
After painting equipment as described above, identify air handling units, separate or remote
HVAC coils, fans, pumps and other equipment by stenciling identification on each item; i.e.,
"AHU No. 1". Coordinate identification with Owner.
VALVE TAGS
A.
Provide valve tags on all valves, particularly in concealed spaces above ceilings and in pipe
chases. Two (2) copies of a typewritten list identifying all numbered valves shall be mounted
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
PAINTING AND
IDENTIFICATION
23 05 53 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
in plastic containers and submitted to the Owner through the Engineer. Valve tags shall be
stamped with identifying description of the valve with lettering as approved by the Owner and
Engineer.
3.6
EXTERIOR UTILITIES MARKING
A.
Install marking tape over all exterior underground utilities installed under this Division as a
part of this project.
B.
Use the following legends:
CAUTION PIPELINE BURIED BELOW
CAUTION WATER LINE BURIED BELOW
C.
Install the marking tape as close to grade as practical. Allow a minimum of 12 inches
between the tape and the line. Increase the tape width as the depth of bury increased in
accordance with the following table.
Depth of Bury
0 - 10"
10 - 20"
20 - 25"
25 - 30"
30 - 40"
OVER 40"
D.
Tape Width
2"
3"
6"
9"
12"
18"
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONDUITS
1.
Paint and label, as described in Section 26 05 53, all electrical equipment and
conduits installed as a part of this Division's work.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
PAINTING AND
IDENTIFICATION
23 05 53 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 07 10
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Chilled water piping
B.
Domestic water piping
C.
Drain piping from cooling coils
D.
Hot water heating piping
E.
Stormwater piping
F.
Refrigerant piping
G.
Steam and condensate return piping
H.
Semi-instantaneous water heaters
I.
Chilled water pumps
J.
Cold equipment
K.
Hot equipment
L.
Provide thermal and acoustical insulation for the various duct systems described in this
Section.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Title 24, Part 6 C.C.R.: 2005 Building Energy Efficiency Standards, Sections 123 and 124.
B.
ASTM Standards dealing with insulation materials, jacket materials, and insulation
performance.
C.
ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D.
ASTM E119, Standard Method of Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials.
E.
ASTM E814, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops.
F.
NFPA 255, Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
G.
UL 723, Surface Burning Characteristics per ASTM E 84.
H.
UL 1479, Through-Penetration Firestop Test.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 10 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.3
1.4
PRODUCT LABELING
A.
Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory packaging, labeled with
manufacturer's density and thickness. Store in clean, dry indoor space that provides
protection from the weather.
B.
All products or their shipping cartons or packages shall bear a label indicating that flame and
smoke ratings do not exceed requirements as stated in Part 2.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings for all insulating and sealing materials provided under this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Elastomeric foam: Armacell LLC, Halstead, Rubatex.
B.
Fiberglass pipe insulation: Johns Manville, Owens Corning, Knauf.
C.
Fiberglass hydrophilic wicking insulation: Owens Corning “VaporWick”, Knauf “PermaWick”.
D.
Fiberglass duct and equipment insulation: Johns Manville, Owens Corning, Certainteed,
Knauf.
E.
Calcium silicate: Johns Manville, Calsilite, or approved equal.
F.
Polyethylene foam: Therma-cel or approved equal.
G.
Medium temperature Corrosion Resistant Perlite Block Insulation: Industrial Insulation Group
(Johns Manville), or approved equal.
H.
High temperature mineral fiber: Johns Manville, Rockwool, Knauf, or approved equal.
I.
Cellular glass: Pittsburg Corning or approved equal.
J.
Fireproofing wrap: 3M FireMaster, Certainteed FlameChek, or approved equal.
GENERAL
A.
Unless specifically excluded, all insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing,
and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation) fire and smoke hazard
ratings as tested by Procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and U/L 723 not exceeding:
Flame Spread
Smoke Developed
Smoke Developed
B.
2.3
25
50 (within air plenums)
150 (except within air plenums)
Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes and glass fabric for fittings shall
have the same composite ratings as listed above.
MATERIALS – PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A.
Jacket and Facing Descriptions:
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 10 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.
B.
Fitting Covers and Jackets:
1.
C.
E.
F.
G.
I.
Equal to Johns Manville Thermo-12 Gold asbestos free, molded, high temperature
pipe and block insulation composed of hydrous calcium silicate for systems operating
up to 1200º F. Flame spread/smoke developed of 0/0.
Medium Temperature Corrosion Resistant Block Insulation:
1.
Equal to Industrial Insulation Group (John Mansville) Sproule WR-1200 non-wicking
perlite block insulation. For use on systems up to 1200º F. Flame spread/smoke
developed of 0/0.
2.
Provide all-service jacket for fiberglass pipe insulation, unless noted otherwise.
High Temperature Block Insulation:
1.
Equal to Johns Manville Super Caltemp 1700 block insulation made of inorganic
noncombustible material. Maximum service temperature of 1700º F. Flame
spread/smoke developed of 0/0.
2.
Provide all-service jacket for fiberglass pipe insulation, unless noted otherwise.
Glass Fiber Insulation:
1.
Equal to Johns Manville "Micro-Lok", having average thermal conductivity not
exceeding 0.23 Btu/In./Sq. Ft./o F./Hr. at mean temperature of 75o F. Glass fiber
insulation shall be rated for 850o F.
2.
Reinforced vapor retarder facing and factory applied, longitudinal acrylic closure
system. Composite flame/smoke developed of less than 25/50.
3.
Use Micro-Lok AP-T Plus where piping is called to be painted.
Elastomeric Foam Plastic Insulation:
1.
H.
Equal to Johns Manville Zeston 300 Series PVC heavy-duty fitting covers and
jacketing produced from white, glossy, high impact, UV resistant polyvinyl chloride
compound. Flame spread/smoke developed of 25/50 or less.
Calcium Silicate Insulation (For Insulation inserts):
1.
D.
Equal to Johns Manville "AP-T" or Owens-Corning "ASJ" vinyl coated and embossed
vapor barrier laminate with pressure sealing lap adhesive, water vapor permeability of
0.02 perms and minimum beach puncture of 40 units. "GVB" glass cloth is also
acceptable.
Equal to Armacell Type AP Armaflex flame retardant, flame spread/smoke developed
of 25/50, elastomeric thermal insulation, installed according to manufacturer's
recommendations. Insulation shall be suitable for a pipe temperature range of –40º F
to 180o F. Average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.27 Btu/In./Sq. Ft./o F./Hr. at
o
mean temperature of 75 F.
High Temperature Glass Fiber Board/Blanket Insulation:
1.
Equal to Johns Manville 1000 Series Spin-Glas semi-rigid board having an average
o
thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.23 Btu/In./Sq. Ft./ F./Hr. at mean temperature of
o
o
75 F. Glass fiber insulation shall be rated for 850 F.
2.
Provide all-service jacket for fiberglass insulation, unless noted otherwise.
Polyethylene Foam Plastic Insulation:
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 10 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.
J.
High Temperature Mineral Fiber:
1.
2.4
Therma-cel, manufactured by Nomaco, 25/50 fire rated, thermal conductivity of 0.25
At 75o F. mean temperature, maximum temperature limit of 212o F. Seal seams and
ends as recommended by manufacturer.
Equal to PAROC 1200, having average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.23
Btu/In./Sq. Ft./o F./Hr. at mean temperature of 75o F. Mineral fiber insulation shall be
rated for 1200o F.
MATERIALS – DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
B.
Jacket and Facing Descriptions:
1.
Equal to Johns Manville "AP-T" or Owens-Corning "ASJ" vinyl coated and embossed
vapor barrier laminate with pressure sealing lap adhesive, water vapor permeability of
0.02 perms and minimum beach puncture of 40 units. "GVB" glass cloth is also
acceptable.
2.
Equal to Johns Manville aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass scrim laminated to
UL rated kraft (FSK) vapor retarder facing having a 2 inch stapling flange on one
edge. Water vapor permeability of 0.02 perms.
Glass Fiber Insulation Duct Wrap:
1.
C.
Elastomeric Foam Plastic Insulation:
1.
D.
E.
Equal to Armacel Type AP Armaflex flame retardant, 25/50 fire rated, elastomeric
foam thermal insulation, installed according to manufacturer's recommendations.
Insulation shall be suitable for a pipe temperature range of 0o F. to 220o F.
Glass Fiber Duct Board Insulation:
1.
Equal to Johns Manville 800 Series Spin-Glas semi-rigid board having an average
thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.23 Btu/In./Sq. Ft./o F./Hr. at mean temperature of
75o F. Glass fiber insulation shall be rated for 450o F. unfaced side, 150o F. faced
side.
2.
Provide all-service or FSK jacket.
Polyethylene Foam Plastic Insulation:
1.
F.
Equal to Johns Manville "Microlite" fiber glass blanket type duct wrap insulation, FSK
faced, having average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.24 Btu/In./Sq. Ft./o F./Hr.
at mean temperature of 75o F. Glass fiber insulation shall be rated for 250o F.
Therma-cel, manufactured by Nomaco, 25/50 fire rated, thermal conductivity of 0.25
At 75o F. mean temperature, maximum temperature limit of 212o F. Seal seams and
ends as recommended by manufacturer.
Fireproofing Wrap Insulation:
1.
Equal to Certainteed FlameChek duct insulation. Lightweight, asbestos free, high
temperature inorganic foil encapsulated insulation blanket. Used on commercial
grease hood duct systems allowing a zero inch clearance to combustible construction
and as a 2 hour fire resistive enclosure system when used with a listed or approved
through-penetration system.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 10 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Apply insulation on surfaces that are clean, dry and free of dirt grease, frost, moisture and
other extraneous elements.
B.
Work shall be performed at the temperatures recommended by the product manufacturer.
C.
Do not install covering before piping and equipment have been tested and approved, unless
piping contractor assumes full responsibility for removing and repairing any insulation
disturbed during the correcting of leaks that may occur.
D.
Seal all canvas and exposed fiberglass insulation with paintable vapor barrier sealer, equal
to Chalders CP-11.
INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A.
3.3
All materials shall be installed by skilled tradesmen regularly engaged in this type of work. All
materials shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations,
building codes, and industry standards.
INSTALLATION – PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
Piping and Equipment - General:
1.
Butt all insulation sections so that no gaps or spaces exist. Install piping insulation
continuous through wall, floor and ceiling openings, sleeves, and hangers.
2.
On hot piping, apply 3 inch wide tape or band over butt joints. Staple jacket and tape
as necessary to provide proper sealing at longitudinal and circumferential joints or use
Owens-Corning insulation with ASJ-SSL-II jacket, having a double self-sealing lap.
3.
On cold piping, apply a wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on all butt joints and seal
joints with 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape or band or use equal to Owens-Corning
insulation with ASJ/SSL-II jacket, having a double self-sealing lap. If stapling is
necessary to provide proper sealing at joints, coat staples with vapor barriers mastic.
All penetrations of the vapor barrier jackets and exposed ends of insulation shall be
sealed with vapor barrier mastic. When standard fiberglass piping insulation is used,
provide vapor seals at butt joints which seal the insulation ends and lap onto the
piping, forming a water dam. These shall be applied at every fourth pipe section joint
and at each fitting to provide isolation of water incursion.
4.
Extend insulation full size through pipe hangers with protection shield at each hanger.
Provide a section of calcium silicate at the hanger point, extending 1 inch beyond
metal shields. Inserts may be omitted on 1/2 inch piping. Insulation inserts shall be no
less than the following lengths:
a.
3/4” to 2-1/2” pipe: 10 inches long
b.
3” to 6” pipe: 12 inches long
c.
8” to 10” pipe: 16 inches long
d.
12” and over: 22 inches long
5.
Thickness of insulation noted in schedules is minimum acceptable.
Fittings, Valves and Flanges:
1.
Cover with preformed rigid fitting insulation, produced in two halves, or with mitered or
fabricated pieces of preformed pipe cover or block. Apply two coats of finishing
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 10 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
cement, with reinforcing mesh where required. Do not insulate operating parts of
valves.
2.1.
On cold systems, particular care shall be taken to properly vapor seal the fitting cover
or pipe insulation where there are protrusions through the vapor barrier jacket. All
valve stems shall be sealed with caulking to allow free movement of the stem while
providing a seal against moisture incursion.
C.
At Contractor's option and if acceptable to local authorities, install PVC covers, equal to
25/50 Zeston over inserts of fiberglass insulation. Install fitting covers per manufacturer's
recommendations. For cold piping, seal all seam edges with vapor barrier mastic and wrap
circumferential edges with Zeston's vapor barrier tape.
D.
Insulation at Pipe Support (Inserts):
E.
1.
General:
a.
The thickness of the rigid insulation insert shall be the same as the rest of the
pipe insulation.
2.
All piping systems:
a.
Provide calcium silicate insulation.
Metal Jacketing:
1.
F.
0.016 inch embossed aluminum jacket with 2 inch overlap at longitudinal and
circumferential joints. Secure in place with 3/4 inch x 0.015 inch stainless steel bands
on 18 inch centers. For fittings, apply a humped aluminum elbow and band in place.
Where flanges or valves are involved, fabricate 0.016 inch aluminum to fit.
2.
Apply metal jacketing over piping where exposed to the weather and in specified
areas within the building for physical abuse that is insulated with a material other than
elastomeric foam.
Weather Barriers:
1.
G.
3.4
Over elastomeric foam insulation apply two coats of a protective finish as
recommended by the manufacturer.
2.
Over fiberglass insulation, provide factory applied Hypalon or Tedlar jacket.
Underground Pipe Insulation:
1.
Nest supply and return piping together and cover with common 2 inch thick pipe
insulation with covering equal to Pittsburgh Corning "Pittwrap" or Polyguard Pipeline
Products "Polyguard 800", installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
2.
Therma-cal polyethylene foam plastic.
3.
Provide this insulation on underground chilled water supply and return, steam and
condensate return.
INSTALLATION – DUCTWORK
A.
Ductwork – General:
1.
Install insulation continuous throughout wall, floor and ceiling openings and through
sleeves.
2.
Duct sizes shown on drawings are net area dimensions and shall be increased as
necessary to accommodate duct liner thickness.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 10 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.5
3.
Ductwork exposed to the weather shall be made waterproof by sealing all seams with
hardcast tape, applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. As additional
weather protection, apply one coat of aluminum paint to all of the tape.
4.
Insulation over angles and standing seams shall be minimum of 1 inch thick. Where
angles and standing seams project from ducts, bands of insulation at least 4 inch wide
shall be installed to provide adequate coverage.
5.
Access panels and doors on surfaces specified to be insulated shall be insulated also
unless noted otherwise. Sheet metal covers shall be installed over edges of insulation
at access panels or doors, both on the panels or doors and on adjacent surfaces.
6.
Heating and cooling coil edges shall be insulated same as adjacent surfaces unless
they are installed totally within housings or ductwork. Insulation over removable
headers, piping connections, air vents, drains, etc., shall be installed with sheet metal
covers which are easily removable for maintenance.
PIPING TO BE INSULATED
A.
Piping shall be insulated to comply with Section 123 of the 2007 Building Energy Efficiency
Standards (Title 24, Part 6 C.C.R.), Table 123-A, where requirements are more stringent in
sections below, the more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Domestic Water Piping, Industrial Water Piping (Includes softened and dealkalized water):
1.
2.
C.
Insulate all cold, hot and circulating hot water piping with fiberglass pipe covering.
Insulation Thickness
1-1/4"
1-1/2" to 2"
2-1/2"
& Smaller
& Larger
Cold Water
1"
1"
1-1/2"
Hot Water (Below 140oF.)
1"
1"
1-1/2"
Hot Water (Above 140oF.)
1-1/2“
1-1/2"
2"
Flame resistant foam insulation may be used for concealed piping 2 inch and smaller,
1/2 inch thickness.
Deionized or Reverse Osmosis Piping:
1.
Where deionized water or reverse osmosis water piping is located above a return air
plenum ceiling, insulate the piping with 1 inch thick 1200° F. mineral wool insulation
with plenum rated cover.
D.
Tepid water piping: The tepid water piping to emergency eyewashes and showers requires
no insulation downstream of the mixing valve.
E.
Drain Piping from Cooling Coils:
F.
1.
Insulate with 1/2 inch thick fiberglass for piping in finished spaces or within air plenum
ceilings.
2.
1/2 inch thick foam or 1/2 inch fiberglass shall be used in other concealed spaces.
3.
Cover piping from electric water cooler a minimum of 10 feet or to a point where it
connects with another waste line.
4.
Cover condensate drain piping within 20 feet of drain pans, except where air handling
unit is located adjacent to a floor drain.
Chilled Water Piping: 40 F and greater:
1.
Fiberglass pipe insulation
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7 MECHANICAL INSULATION
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
23 07 10 - 7
130-202 KMD
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
Pipe Size
1" and smaller
1-1/4" and larger
G.
2.
For piping exposed to ambient conditions, increase thickness by 1/2 inch. Protect
insulation as described in Part 3.
3.
Extend insulation into fan-coil units or other terminal units, terminating over
condensate drain pans.
Low Temperature Hot Water Heating
1.
H.
Fiberglass pipe insulation:
Pipe Size
Insulation Thickness
All sizes
1-1/2"
a.
Insulation thickness on runouts, 2 inch and smaller, to individual terminal units
may be reduced to 1/2 inch, within 12 feet of the units.
Low Pressure Steam, Condensate Return:
1.
Fiberglass pipe insulation:
Pipe Size
2" and smaller
2-1/2" to 6”
8” and larger
a.
I.
Insulation Thickness
1"
1-1/2"
Insulation Thickness
1-1/2"
2"
3-1/2"
Insulation thickness on runouts, 2 inch and smaller, to individual terminal units
may be reduced to 1 inch, within 12 feet of the units.
High Pressure Steam Piping:
1.
Fiberglass pipe insulation:
251 - 350o F
Pipe Size
1" and smaller
1-1/4" to 4"
5" and larger
Insulation Thickness
2"
2-1/2"
3-1/2"
Greater than 350° F Temperature
Pipe Size
Insulation Thickness
2" and smaller
2-1/2"
2-1/2" to 4"
3"
5" and larger
3-1/2"
a.
Insulation thickness on runouts, 2 inch and smaller, to individual terminal units
may be reduced to 1-1/2 inch, within 12 feet of the units.
J.
Steam and Condensate Drain Piping from Electric Humidifiers:
1.
K.
Cover steam piping from electronic humidifiers to dispersion tubes with 1-1/2 inch
thick fiberglass pipe insulation.
Stormwater Piping:
1.
Insulate horizontal stormwater piping, and where the pipe changes from horizontal to
vertical insulate the elbow and 3 feet of the vertical, with 1/2 inch thick fiberglass.
Insulate roof drain bodies with Armaflex, or equal, 3/4 inch foam flat stock with 25/50
fire rating.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 10 - 8
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
L.
Refrigerant Suction and Hot Gas Piping:
1.
2.
3.6
Insulation Thickness
1"
1-1/2"
Foamed plastic flexible tubing insulation of thickness noted for fiberglass, with all
joints and seams sealed with cement as recommended by the manufacturer. Cover
fittings with sections of the flexible tubing insulation. Where this insulation is exposed
to the weather, apply two coats of a protective finish, Benjamin Foster's BF 57-69, or
equal.
EQUIPMENT TO BE INSULATED
A.
Chilled Water Pumps:
1.
B.
C.
Insulate cold surfaces with 3/4 inch thick flame retardant, elastomeric insulation.
Insulation shall be easily removable for routine maintenance of the pumps.
o
Hot Equipment (200 F. Maximum Operating Temperature, Air Separators, Heat Exchangers,
Hot Water Storage Tanks, Condensate Receivers, Flash Tanks, Boiler Feed Tank, Solar
Water Storage Tanks):
1.
Cover all surfaces with fiberglass, minimum 3 pound density, 2 inch thick.
2.
Insulation shall be banded in place, tightly butted, joints staggered and secured with
1/2 inch x 0.015 inch thick galvanized steel bands on 12 inch centers. Where
required, welded studs, clips or angles shall be provided as anchors for bands.
3.
Over the insulation, install ASJ or GVB covering, or stretch 1 inch galvanized
hexagonal wire mesh, secured by wiring to anchors with edges tied together. Finish
shall be equal to Ryder's Thermokote V insulating cement applied 1/2 inch thick in two
coats and troweled smooth. Apply a 10 x 10 glass mesh fabric over the cement,
embedded between coats of equal to Benjamin Foster 30-36.
4.
Equal to Owens-Corning Fiberglas thermal insulating wool (TIW) may be used in lieu
of fiberglass board, but thickness shall be increased to 3 inch.
Where operating temperature of equipment is between 200 - 275oF., increase
thickness of insulation to 3 inch for fiberglass and to 4 inch for equal to OwensCorning Fiberglas Pipe Wrap and calcium silicate.
5.
Constant Air Volume Box Reheat Coils
1.
3.7
Fiberglass pipe insulation:
Pipe Size
1" and smaller
1-1/4" and larger
Cover constant air volume box reheat coil sections with minimum 3 pound density
fiberglass insulation, 1 inch thick and finished with ASJ or GVB jacket.
DUCTWORK TO BE INSULATED
A.
Supply-Air and Return-Air ductwork shall be insulated to comply with Section 124 of the
2007 Building Energy Efficiency Standards (Title 24, Part 6 C.C.R.). Supply and return air
ductwork shall be insulated to a minimum installed level of R-8 for the following locations:
1.
Outdoors (i.e. on a roof).
2.
In a space between a roof and an insulated ceiling.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 10 - 9
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.
In a space directly under a roof with fixed vents or opening to the outside or
unconditioned spaces.
4.
In an unconditioned craw/space.
5.
In any unconditioned space (as defined in the E.E.S.).
Supply and Return-Air ducts located in spaces other than the (5) types above shall be
insulated to a minimum installed level of R-4.2.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 10 - 10
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 08 00
SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
1.3
Procedures and responsibilities to commission the mechanical and plumbing systems for
this project.
Project Closeout Completion:
1.
HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual, 1st Edition, October 1994, Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association Inc.
2.
Guideline for Commissioning of HVAC Systems, #1-1989, American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating & Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide forms for each building mechanical system and system equipment. Forms can be
procured through ASHRAE or SMACNA. A representative list of systems is noted below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.4
Checklist – Plumbing Piping Systems.
Checklist – Drainage Systems.
Checklist – Chilled/Hot Water Systems.
Checklist – HVAC: Air Handling Systems.
Checklist – Return/Exhaust Fan.
Checklist – Heating/Cooling Systems – General.
Checklist – Circulating Pump(s).
Checklist – Domestic Hot Water Heater.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Mechanical/Plumbing Building System: A major building utility or equipment system.
B.
Commissioning: To put into active service. The process of advancing facility systems from a
state of static physical completion to a state of fully demonstrated and documented working
condition according to the design requirements. It consists of accepting a project's
construction based on the original performance criteria in the project's specifications, as
appropriate.
C.
Commissioning Agent: Personnel responsible for carrying out the detailed planning and
implementation of the commissioning process. May be the General Contractor, a subcontractor and/or an independent contractor selected by the Owner. For this project, the
Commissioning Agent shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor.
D.
Commissioning Authority: Personnel responsible for ensuring that the commissioning
process is properly completed according to the contract requirements for the project. May be
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
23 08 00 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
the Project Manager, Architect, or other personnel selected by Owner. For this project, the
Commissioning Authority shall be the responsibility of the Owner.
E.
Commissioning Criteria: The specifications, performance data, installation and operation
instructions intended function and purpose, and similar requirements as defined by the
Architect. These requirements become the criteria to be achieved and documented prior to
turnover of a construction project. The requirements are often developed into checklists or
other listings for the purpose of documenting that the desired outcome is achieved. Each
Building System will likely have its own unique requirements.
F.
Commissioning Package: A group of documents consisting of the approved Commissioning
Criteria, approved Commissioning Plan, approved Commissioning Checklist, and any
associated documents.
G.
Commissioning Plan: A compilation of the equipment list, pre-start, start-up, and functional
performance test checklists. The sequence in which various equipment and systems are
checked and tested as well as the time allocated for start-up and testing is included as a
portion of the Commissioning Plan (i.e., schedule to complete the commissioning).
H.
Project Team: A work group, which is responsible for the successful design and construction
of the project. This group consists of Owner personnel, the Architect, professional
design/engineering personnel, general contractor representative, sub-contractor
representative, and others as necessary to complete the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
DEVELOPMENT OF COMMISSIONING CRITERIA
A.
Submit ASHRAE/SMACNA Commissioning checklist forms for Architect/Engineer use to
define system commissioning criteria specific to the project for each system type.
B.
Architect/Engineer shall mark the criteria sheets and return to Commissioning Agent.
C.
Commissioning Agent shall develop individual system criteria checklist sheets.
CONSTRUCTION COMMISSIONING PROCESS
A.
As construction progresses, the Commissioning Agent shall use the Commissioning Criteria
to develop the Commissioning Plan. The Plan, including the following items, shall be
submitted for approval of the Commissioning Authority.
1.
Criteria to be met for equipment and system performance.
2.
Building System(s), start-up and operation information necessary for commissioning
process.
3.
Functional performance tests to be used in commissioning.
4.
Commissioning Checklist(s) to document complete installation, start-up, and
operational performance of the Building System(s).
5.
Building System(s) commissioning schedule.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
23 08 00 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
C.
The Commissioning Authority shall:
1.
Review the Commissioning Plan and compare it to the Commissioning Criteria.
2.
Verify that the Commissioning Plan satisfies the Commissioning Criteria.
The Commissioning Agent shall execute the Commissioning Plan.
NOTE: All sensors, gages, meters, etc., used to measure Building System(s) performance
shall be calibrated to National Institute of Standards and Testing (NIST) specifications. If
requested, the Commissioning Agent will provide NIST traceable documentation.
D.
1.
The Commissioning Authority shall be notified of the schedule and have the
opportunity to witness any or all of the work done by the Commissioning Agent.
2.
Commissioning results shall be documented on the checklists by the Commissioning
Agent.
The Commissioning Authority shall review the results to verify conformance with the
Commissioning Criteria.
1.
E.
3.3
If the plan is not complete, a punchlist of items not meeting the Commissioning
Criteria shall be forwarded to the Commissioning Agent.
The Commissioning Agent shall resolve all items on the punchlist to complete the
Commissioning Plan and return it to the Commissioning Authority for review.
PROJECT DOCUMENTATION
A.
The Commissioning Authority shall assemble the Commissioning Package of documents
from the Commissioning Agent.
B.
The Commissioning Authority shall approve the Commissioning Package.
C.
The Commissioning Authority shall forward the approved Commissioning Package to the
Architect for review.
END OF SECTION
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
23 08 00 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 09 23
LABORATORY AIR FLOW CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Provide a complete system for the constant volume tracking of laboratory air flow systems.
B.
The laboratory air flow control system shall precisely control the space air supply and
exhaust volumes to maintain the desired pressure relationship. Fume hoods shall be
controlled to maintain a constant average open sash face velocity regardless of sash
position. The laboratory air flow control system shall be capable of operating as a standalone system or be integrated with the Building Management System specified under
Section 23 09 00.
C.
System shall include, but not be limited to, control panels, supply constant air volume boxes,
general room exhaust valves, fume hood exhaust valves, air flow sensing stations and fume
hood sash position sensors.
D.
The total system shall be installed and commissioned by, or under the direct supervision of,
factory trained and authorized field engineers.
E.
The total system shall be installed and commissioned by the Temperature Control
Contractor under the direct supervision of factory trained and authorized field engineers.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
1.3
Coordinate exact sizes and locations of components with the contractor installing the
ductwork, temperature controls, and Division 26 work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit electronic (PDF) copies of laboratory fume hood control shop drawings, which
include the following information:
1.
Manufacturer’s catalog data for all components provided and installed for this project.
2.
AutoCAD or Visio generated schematic drawings for the entire control system.
Drawings shall include a diagram depicting the complete system architecture
complete with a communications riser, point-to-point wiring diagrams, all temperature
controls, start-stop arrangement for each piece of equipment, equipment interlocks,
wiring terminal numbers, and any special connection information required for properly
controlling the mechanical equipment.
3.
Software documentation regarding the proposed PC operating system, third party
utilities, and application programs, and the proposed application program for the
Control Units.
4.
Logical and physical diagrams for each channel indicating each node (control devices
and ID’s), node address (domain, subnet and group), channel type and router
specifications.
5.
System color graphics using AutoCAD or Visio generated schematic drawing.
Dynamic points, menu icons, commandable points, etc. shall be clearly identified.
6.
Identify color conventions proposed for all graphics.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #4
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
LABORATORY AIRFLOW
CONTROL SYSTEMS
23 09 23 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
1.4
1.5
Submit temperature control diagrams for each mechanical system served by the
HVAC control system. Indicate and tag each input/output served by each control unit
or intelligent device. Diagrams shall indicate control device setpoints and ranges.
8.
Complete description of control sequences for each system.
Provide as-built diagrams and maintenance manuals to the Owner after completion of the
project as required in Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC.
1.
Control diagrams shall be corrected as necessary to show as-built conditions,
including set points and ranges.
2.
Include AutoCAD drawings or Visio files of all generated shop drawings on CD-ROM
disks.
3.
Provide GUI Software users manual.
4.
Include network management software user manual to each tool package provided.
5.
Document all maintenance and repair/replacement procedures. Provide ordering
number for each system component and supply source. Provide a list of
recommended spare parts.
6.
Provide documentation of network variables, network node configurations, priority
interrupts, node binding, addressing structure, etc.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Supplier of this Section systems shall be regularly engaged in the production, assembly, and
installation of laboratory fume hood control systems and have a proven track record of a
minimum of 5 years.
B.
Supplier of this Section systems shall assume single source responsibility for the complete
installation, calibration, and startup of the fume hood tracking systems. Systems shall be left
in a completely automated, fully functioning mode of operation.
WARRANTY
A.
1.6
7.
Refer to Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, for warranty requirements. The
laboratory air flow control system shall comply with the requirements of that Section, with the
added requirement that the equipment and system performance shall be warrantied for a
period of three (3) years from the date of final acceptance.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
A.
The laboratory air flow control system supplier shall include five (5) years of preventative
maintenance (starting at date of final acceptance) on all air flow sensors (e.g. pitot tube, flow
cross, orifice ring, air bar, hot wire, vortex shedding, side wall sensors, etc.) and flow
transducers provided under this Section. Air flow sensors shall be removed, inspected and
cleaned annually during the five year period. The transducer shall be checked and
recalibrated annually, even if auto-zero style of transducers. At the conclusion of each
annual preventative maintenance inspection, a report shall be turned over to the Owner
identifying the work that was completed and identifying any problems and corrective actions
taken.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #4
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
LABORATORY AIRFLOW
CONTROL SYSTEMS
23 09 23 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
2.3
Anemostat Systems Group, Phoenix Controls Corporation Celeris 2, Siemens Building
Technologies or approved equal.
GENERAL
A.
Fume hood tracking system shall use closed loop control to continually monitor and adjust
the supply, general room exhaust, and fume hood exhaust volumes. Open loop control
systems or systems that can control by pressure only are unacceptable and will not be
considered.
B.
Fume hood tracking system shall use either open or closed loop control to continually
monitor and adjust the supply, general room exhaust, and fume hood exhaust volumes.
SYSTEMS DESIGN
A.
In all cases, systems shall failsafe to a mode that achieves the maximum safety to personnel
in the spaces served by the systems.
B.
Each individual laboratory shall have a laboratory air flow control system that operates
independently of other spaces.
C.
Room pressurization control will be accomplished by volumetric flow synchronization (air
flow tracking) or by direct space pressure control, or by a combination of both. Unless
specifically identified elsewhere, all systems on this Project shall utilize volumetric flow
synchronization as the mode of control. Air flows from the supply, general room exhaust, and
fume hood exhaust will be measured and controlled to maintain a safe, comfortable, and
energy efficient environment.
D.
Fume hood face velocity control (vertical rising sash) will be used to maintain a preset
adjustable face velocity setpoint. Inputs to the controller shall include sash position and fume
hood exhaust air flow, from which the controller will calculate the hood face velocity. The
minimum hood exhaust flow turndown ration shall be 5 to 1.
E.
The fume hood exhaust air flow control devices shall respond to a changing fume hood sash
opening by achieving 90% of the required value within two seconds, and stable condition
within five seconds. The rate of sash movement shall be between 1.0 and 1.5 feet per
second.
F.
The fume hood exhaust air flow control device shall be automatically switched between inuse and standby levels based on operator presence immediately in front of the hood. A
presence and motion sensor shall activate the switching. The response of the air flow device
shall be similar to the response for a change in sash position.
G.
A electronic, normally open, rotary damper motor will drive an exhaust valve as required to
maintain the fume hood face velocity setpoint.
H.
The volume of the supply air and exhaust air systems will be varied as required to maintain
duct static pressure. Control of those systems will be by the Temperature Control Contractor,
as specified under Section 23 09 00.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #4
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
LABORATORY AIRFLOW
CONTROL SYSTEMS
23 09 23 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.4
EQUIPMENT
A.
Hood Interface Module: Equal to Anemostat HMI (Hood Mounted Interface) to provide
emergency override, high flow alarm, low flow alarm, hood status lights and audible alarm
(95 db at 1 meter). Module designed to fit in a 2 inch by 4 inch (single gang) electrical box
and mounted on the face of the fume hood. Connection using phone jack termination. All
alarm setpoints shall be fully field programmable as well as the time delay interval prior to
alarming. HMI shall also allow high/low sash alarms and limits. All points shall be monitored
at the laboratory room control panels and building management system. Alarm and mute
functions shall automatically reset when the alarm condition ceases to exist. Alarm
annunciation shall be as follows:
1.
Normal condition - green LED lighted.
2.
Alarm condition - red LED lighted, indicating either:
a.
Low face velocity
b.
High face velocity
c.
Emergency override
3.
Caution or control transition: green and red LED flash alternately.
4.
Buzzer: energized in any alarm or override condition.
5.
Push button functions:
a.
Override - Push once
b.
Reset to normal operation - Push once
c.
Alarm acknowledgement (audible mute) - Push twice (LED remains lighted
while alarm condition exists)
6.
Alarms shall be transmitted over a building communications network to the
supervisory system.
B.
Auxiliary emergency override switch: Each laboratory space connected to the laboratory air
flow control system shall include a hall mounted emergency override switch, located near the
exist door from the space. The switch shall be flush mounted and provided with an engraved
label that reads “EMERGENCY VENTILATION – PUSH TO ACTIVATE”. Provide a security
cover over switch, similar to Safety Technology International, Inc. model STI 6500 clear
cover which requires lifting to activate switch. Provide LED indicator lights to indicate
position of switch – “green” for normal and “red” for emergency. Label lights accordingly with
engraved labels. The switch position shall be transmitted over a building communications
network to the supervisory system.
C.
Space and Duct temperature sensors: Refer to Section 23 09 00, Building Control Systems.
D.
Pressure Transmitters: Refer to Section 23 09 00, Building Control Systems.
E.
Sash Position Sensors: Sash position will be sensed using an industrial quality, rotary
position transducer connected to the counterweight system of the hood with a stainless steel
cable. The sash sensor shall have an expected life of over 250,000 full height sash openings
or closings. A sash sensor shall also be provided for horizontal overlapping sashes.
F.
Sash Position Sensor (Through the Wall): Where rotary position transducers cannot be
used, and if approved by the Engineer, through the wall flow sensors may be used. These
shall be through the wall hot wire flow sensor designed for installation in the upper cavity
portion of the fume hood sidewall. Sensor shall be located where room air supply,
furnishings, and hood sash will not interfere with its operation and sensing.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #4
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
LABORATORY AIRFLOW
CONTROL SYSTEMS
23 09 23 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
G.
Presence and Motion sensor: Provided to determine an operator’s presence in front of a
hood by detecting the presence and/or motion of an operator. Used to command the
laboratory air flow control system form an in-use operating face velocity of 100 fpm to a
standby face velocity of 60 fpm, and vice versa.
1.
Sensor shall define a detection zone that extended approximately 20 inches from in
front of the fume hood. If sensor does not detect presence and/or motion within five
seconds, it shall command the system to the user adjustable standby face velocity.
When presence and/or motion is detected, it shall command the system to the in-use
face velocity.
2.
Sensor shall have a control circuit that adapts to its specific surroundings and
automatically adjusts for inanimate objects placed within its detection zone. It shall
map the area into memory and, after a period of five minutes, nullify the image of the
inanimate object and return to a standby mode. If the inanimate object is moved or
taken out of the zone, the unit shall automatically re-map the area.
H.
Flow Transducers: Accuracy shall be no less than + 0.15% of span (to equal + 5% of signal
with a 15 to 1 turndown) over the appropriate full scale range including the combined effects
of nonlinearity, hysteresis, repeatability, drift over a one year period, and temperature effect.
I.
Laboratory Room Control Panels: Laboratory control panels shall include all control
components for the system logic, input signal conditioning, output signal conditioning, power
supplied and operator interface. Laboratory control panels shall be located to facilitate
maintenance and troubleshooting. Panels shall be of standalone design with the ability to
operate the entire laboratory space it serves upon loss of communications from the
laboratory network. Each panel shall be fully field programmable, open architecture type. In
no case will it be acceptable to mount input or output devices, or system components used
for control logic, on the supply variable air volume boxes, general exhaust boxes, or fume
hood exhaust boxes. Laboratory control panels shall be located to facilitate maintenance and
troubleshooting.
J.
Central Processing Unit (CPU): Industrial quality with the following minimum performance
parameters:
1.
Scan Rate: The time used by the control system to read a sensor value, calculate a
control response, and output a signal to the controlled element shall not exceed 1/2
second. If a communications link is used to pass control information, then the
communications rate and protocol lag time must still allow the control loop to obtain
the 1/2 second scan rate.
2.
Input Accuracy: To maintain the accuracy of the pressurization control, the input
section of the electronics (A/D converter) shall be at least 12 bits (0.024%).
K.
Control Modes: The control system shall incorporate proportional, integral and derivative
modes of control.
L.
Air flow controller devices:
1.
Microprocessor based and operate using a peer-to-peer control architecture. The
room level air flow control devices shall function as a stand-alone network.
2.
The room-level control network shall utilize a LonTalk communications protocol.
3.
Air flow control shall use closed loop control to regulate the air flow based on a digital
control signal. The device shall generate a digital feedback signal that represents its
air flow.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #4
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
LABORATORY AIRFLOW
CONTROL SYSTEMS
23 09 23 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
M.
N.
4.
The air flow control device shall store its control algorithms in non-volatile, re-writable
memory. The device shall be able to stand-alone or be networked with other room
level control devices using industry standard protocol.
5.
The air flow control device shall have provisions to connect to a notebook PC
commissioning tool and every node on the network shall be accessible from any point
in the system.
6.
The controller shall have built-in integral Input/Output connections to address fume
hood control, temperature control, humidity control, occupancy control, emergency
control, and non-network sensors, switches and control devices.
7.
The air flow control device shall meet FCC Part 15 Subpart J Class A, and be UL916
listed.
Control Functions: The air flow control devices shall utilize a peer-to-peer, distributed control
architecture to perform room level control functions. The minimum control functions included
shall be:
1.
Pressurization control: Control supply and auxiliary exhaust air flow devices in order to
maintain a volumetric offset (either positive or negative). Offset shall be maintained
regardless of any changes in flow or static pressure. Offset shall be field adjustable.
The pressurization control algorithm shall support the ability to regulate the distribution
of total supply flow across multiple supply air flow control devices.
2.
Temperature Control: Regulate the space temperature through a combination of
volumetric thermal override and control of reheat coils and/or auxiliary temperature
control devices. Separate cooling and heating set points shall be writable from the
BMS.
3.
Humidity Control: Allow the monitoring and control of the relative humidity level in the
controlled zone. Configurable deadband adjustment to prevent the humidification and
dehumidification control functions from operating as at the same time.
4.
Occupancy Control: Ability to change the minimum ventilation and/or temperature
control setpoints, based on the occupied state. May be set either by the BMS as a
scheduled event, or through the use of a local occupancy sensor or switch. System
shall support a local occupancy override switch that allows a user to override the
occupancy mode and set the space to occupied for a predetermined interval. The
local occupancy sensor/switch or bypass switch shall be given priority over a BMS
command.
5.
Emergency Mode Control: Provide a means of overriding temperature and
pressurization control in response to a command. The emergency control mode may
be initiated either be a local contact input or BMS command.
6.
Local Alarm Control: Direct alarms to BMS.
7.
Fume Hood Control: Provide the following information to the BMS:
a.
Commanded air flow value.
b.
Sash position value.
c.
User presence signal.
d.
Flow feedback signal.
e.
Alarm signals.
Interface to Building Management System (BMS):
1.
All points shall be available through the interface to the BMS for trending, archiving,
graphics, alarm notification and status reports.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #4
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
LABORATORY AIRFLOW
CONTROL SYSTEMS
23 09 23 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.5
2.
The required software interface drivers to the BMS shall be developed and located in
a dedicated interface device furnished by the laboratory air flow control system
supplier.
3.
The building level network shall be a high speed LonTalk (1.25 mbps)
communications protocol.
O.
Supply Constant Air Volume (CCAV) Boxes: Furnish CCAV boxes as shown on the drawings
and specified under Section 23 37 13, Air Distribution Devices. Controls for the CCAV box
shall be located in the laboratory control panel for ease of adjustment, calibration, and
troubleshooting.
P.
Supply Box Reheat Coils: Furnish reheat coils as shown on the drawings and specified
under Section 23 37 13, Air Distribution Devices.
Q.
General Room Exhaust Valves: Furnish general room exhaust valves as shown on the
drawings and specified under Section 23 37 13, Air Distribution Devices. Controls for the
exhaust valves shall be located in the laboratory control panel for ease of adjustment,
calibration, and troubleshooting.
R.
Fume Hood Exhaust Valves: Furnish fume hood exhaust valves as shown on the drawings
and specified under Section 23 37 13, Air Distribution Devices. Controls for the exhaust
valves shall be located in the laboratory control panel for ease of adjustment, calibration, and
troubleshooting.
S.
All air flow control devices shall be provided with controllers, whether used for constant
position or variable position.
SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A.
Refer to drawings for Control Sequences of Operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
The laboratory air flow control manufacturer shall be responsible for ensuring that the control
system is installed and operates properly as intended and designed.
B.
The Sheet Metal Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the supply CAV boxes,
fume hood exhaust valves, general exhaust valves, air flow sensing stations and any other
devices to be installed in the air streams.
C.
The Sheet Metal Contractor shall be responsible for installing duct access doors at each air
flow sensor where it is impractical to remove the air flow sensors for servicing.
D.
The Temperature Control Contractor shall be responsible for the mounting of the control
panels, wiring the field sensing and interface devices, providing a source of clean, dry,
control grade 20 psig air as required, providing appropriately sized and fused 24 Vac
transformers suitable for NEC Class II wiring, and all other miscellaneous installation as
required for a complete and functioning system. The laboratory control manufacturer shall
provide detailed control schematics to the TCC for use in preparing field installation
drawings. The TCC shall provide all electrical wiring, pneumatic tubing and miscellaneous
installation hardware in addition to labor. The TCC shall utilize cables specifically
recommended by the laboratory air flow control supplier.
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #4
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
LABORATORY AIRFLOW
CONTROL SYSTEMS
23 09 23 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.2
3.3
E.
The laboratory control system supplier shall be responsible for the mounting of the control
panels, wiring the field sensing and interface devices, and all other miscellaneous installation
as required for a complete and functioning system. The laboratory control manufacturer shall
provide detailed control schematics and prepare field installation drawings. Provide all
electrical wiring, and miscellaneous installation hardware in addition to labor.
F.
The Division 26 contractor will provide a 120 vac power for each laboratory control panel.
G.
The laboratory control manufacturer shall send the fume hood interface modules and sash
position sensors to the successful fume hood supplier for mounting at the fume hood
manufacturer's factory. Provide detailed mounting schematics.
SYSTEM START-UP
A.
All point to point terminations, setpoint adjustment and calibration, system start-up, and final
calibration shall be performed by, or under the direct supervision of, factory trained and
authorized field engineers.
B.
Each fume hood system shall be calibrated and tuned to provide safe, efficient, fail-safe
operation. Sash position sensors shall be calibrated for sash area, flow transducers shall be
calibrated for zero and span, and control loops shall be tuned for each mode of proportional,
integral and derivative control. All dampers, damper operators, flow sensors, etc., shall be
checked for proper operation. Alarm systems and fail-safe modes shall be checked for each
and every device.
C.
Each tracking system shall be calibrated and tuned to provide fail-safe, efficient operation.
Flow transducers shall be calibrated for zero and span, the control loop shall be tuned for
each mode of proportional, integral and derivative control. All dampers, damper operators,
flow sensors, etc., shall be checked for proper operation. The flow volume control system
shall be run through its entire range and calibrated as required to linearize the output. Alarm
systems and fail-safe modes shall be checked for each and every device.
D.
The laboratory air flow control system supplier shall work closely with the balancing
contractor to ensure proper air distribution in the HVAC system. The balancing contractor
shall coordinate the work of the hood and tracking systems supplier with the hood
certification testing and the HVAC balancing. It is imperative that the methods of testing air
flow at the hoods are known and understood by all parties involved. Where there is a conflict
as to proper methods to use for balancing, the Engineer shall have the final say.
E.
The Balancing Contractor shall be responsible for providing cfm versus signal data to the
laboratory fume hood control system supplier, who will then generate cfm versus signal air
flow charts for each box. This data shall be provided to the Owner as a part of the Operation
and Maintenance manuals.
DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING
A.
The laboratory air flow control supplier shall provide all the documentation and training
necessary so that the Owner can be capable of operating and maintaining the control
system.
B.
Provide three (3) days of onsite training to personnel designated by the Owner. Training is to
include: systems operation, troubleshooting, instrument calibration, alarm handling and
system reconfiguration.
C.
Provide five working days of training for three (3) people, of the Owner's choosing, at a
factory training site. Transportation, lodging and meals expenses will be at Owner’s
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #4
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
LABORATORY AIRFLOW
CONTROL SYSTEMS
23 09 23 - 8
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
expense. The training presented shall be the same training that the factory field engineers
receive.
D.
3.4
Documentation shall consist of dimensional data for control panels, supply boxes, exhaust
valves, flow measuring sensors, etc. Control schematics, equipment sizing, instrumentation
data sheets and Sequences of Operation shall be included.
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
A.
The laboratory exhaust system shall be capable of remote monitoring via the BMS.
END OF SECTION
10/24/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #4
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
LABORATORY AIRFLOW
CONTROL SYSTEMS
23 09 23 - 9
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 22 00
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Steam (0 - 15 psig) piping – Low Pressure Steam
B.
Steam (16 - 125 psig) piping – High Pressure Steam
C.
Condensate return piping
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding materials and labor shall conform to ASME Code and applicable State labor
regulations.
B.
Use welders fully qualified and licensed by State authorities. Welders shall be certified for
ASME procedures for high pressure where applicable.
C.
The manufacturer's mark or name shall be attached to each length of pipe, fitting, or device
employed in the piping system.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute).
B.
ASME (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers).
C.
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
D.
ASTM B813, Water-flushable lead-free flux
E.
ASTM B32, Lead-free alloy solder
F.
ASTM B828, Procedures for soldered joints
SUBMITTALS
F.A.
Submit shop drawings on all equipment provided under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Underground insulated piping: Ric-Wil Incorporated or approved equal.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Steam (0 - 15 PSIG):
1.
Standard weight black steel, ASTM A-53 Type F or A-53 Type ERW Grade B, or A106 seamless.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
STEAM AND STEAM
CONDENSATE PIPING
23 22 00 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
C.
2.
125 pound cast iron screwed fittings, 2-1/2 inch and smaller. Butt welding fittings for 3
inch and larger, ANSI B16.9, with wall thickness identical to pipe in which installed.
Flanges shall be Class 150, ANSI B16.5, forged steel, screwed, welding neck or slipon type as required.
2.3.
Clean steam humidifier piping – SCH 40 316 stainless steel with welded fittings.
Steam (16 - 125 PSIG):
1.
Standard weight black steel, ASTM A-53 Type ERW Grade B or A-106 seamless.
2.
125 pound cast iron screwed fittings, 2-1/2 inch and smaller. Butt welding fittings for 3
inch and larger, ANSI B16.9, with wall thickness identical to pipe in which installed.
Flanges shall be Class 150, ANSI B16.5, forged steel, screwed, welding neck or slipon type as required.
Condensate Return:
1.
Schedule 80 black steel pipe, ASTM A-53 Type ERW Grade B or A-106 seamless,
with 125 pound cast iron screwed fittings for 2-1/2 inch and smaller and butt welding
fittings for 3 inch and larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A.
Fabricate and support piping in accordance with specifications herein, and latest edition of
CMC. Provide seismic restraint in accordance with a current OSHPD pre-approved system
that carries a current OSHPD OPA Number. For seismic restraint, see Section 23 05 48.
B.
Install seismic separation assemblies at building seismic joints.
PREPARATION OF PIPING
A.
Ream pipe ends to remove burrs. Make joints smooth and unobstructed inside. Remove any
obstructions or debris inside piping, blowing it out with compressed air or otherwise cleaning
it internally immediately prior to assembly.
B.
Cap or cover open piping during erection to prevent entry of foreign objects.
GENERAL
A.
No lead bearing solders shall be used for assembly of piping specified under this Section.
Flux shall be water-flushable and lead-free.
B.
Nipples shall be the same material, composition and weight classification as the pipe with
which they are installed. Close or running thread nipples shall not be used.
C.
Install horizontal piping parallel with adjacent walls and partitions unless otherwise shown.
All risers shall be plumb. Springing or forcing piping into place will not be permitted unless
specifically called for.
D.
Take branches and riser arms off the top of mains at a 45 degree angle, unless otherwise
shown.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
STEAM AND STEAM
CONDENSATE PIPING
23 22 00 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.4
E.
Use a minimum of two field fabricated or installed fittings or joints when connecting piping to
equipment or prefabricated piping assemblies.
F.
Grade piping for drainage using 1 inch drop per 40 feet of run, except where otherwise
indicated. Steam and condensate lines shall pitch downward in direction of flow, except
where noted otherwise.
G.
Back pitch steam runouts which are less than 10'-0" from steam main. Runouts over 10'-0"
from steam main shall be pitched in direction of flow and dripped before control valve.
H.
Provide manual drain valves at low points of condensate return piping. Drains to be 2 inch
valves for piping 4 inch and larger and 3/4 inch for smaller piping.
I.
Provide eccentric fittings where necessary to avoid pockets of condensation in steam and
gravity condensate return piping. Install driplegs at all rises in pipe elevation. Where
condensate lines form a trap, provide vent loop over the trapped section. Install float and
thermostatic traps where indicated and at all points where condensate can lodge.
J.
Arrange piping to provide access to coils in piping or ductwork, manholes and access
openings, and to permit convenient removal of heads and coils and pulling of tubes.
Removal of heads and coils and pulling of tubes shall be accomplished without disturbing
equipment shutoff valves and by the removal of a minimum amount of piping between
shutoff valves and equipment. Provide additional flanges or unions as required to provide
these features.
K.
All control valves shall be set by this Contractor. Piping to control valves shall be run line
size as close as possible to valve connections. Concentric increasers at valve outlets may
be used. Use eccentric reducers at valve inlets, flat on bottom for steam. Strainers shall be
line size. Provide unions or flanges at automatic control valves for servicing.
L.
Piping in finished portions of the building, except in mechanical equipment rooms or where
otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be concealed.
M.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and for access to valves, air vents, drains and
unions.
N.
Install same type underground piping material specified for inside building to 5 feet outside of
building.
O.
Do not install piping within 3 feet in horizontal direction from electrical panels or equipment.
Coordinate with Division 26 contractor.
WELDED CONNECTIONS
A.
All welding shall be done in accordance with Chapter V of the American Standard Code for
Pressure Piping, ASA B31.3 (as amended to date) unless otherwise noted.
B.
Make welded joints with continuous welds, without backing rings, and with pipe ends
beveled before welding. Gas cuts shall be true and free from burned metal. Before welding,
welding surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned. Piping shall be carefully aligned and no weld
metal shall project inside the pipe.
C.
Use seamless butt-welding fittings at all elbows, tees and reducers. Mitered or fabricated
elbows will not be permitted.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
STEAM AND STEAM
CONDENSATE PIPING
23 22 00 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.5
D.
Branch lines at least two pipe sizes smaller than the main may be connected by means of
3000 psig forged steel couplings or "Threadolets" in lieu of welding tees.
E.
Where branch lines are at least two pipe sizes smaller than the main and the main is larger
than 3 inch, direct welding to the main may be permitted using a "Threadolet". The welder
shall demonstrate to the Owner and/or Engineer, acceptable workmanship with this
procedure, including proper matching of branch pipe ends to wall contour of the main.
CORROSION PROTECTION FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING
A.
3.6
3.7
After testing of underground piping, apply one heavy coat of coal tar bituminous material,
equal to Bitumastic 50, to stainless steel, aluminum, cadmium plated or galvanized steel
bolts, rods, banding and other items constructed of these materials.
EXPANSION OF PIPING
A.
Provide expansion loops where shown on drawings or required to prevent damage to piping
and equipment due to thermal expansion in the piping system.
B.
Where loops are shown, the height and width dimensions shall be adhered to where
possible. If adjustments are necessary because of interferences with other work, obtain
Engineer's approval before proceeding with fabrication of the loop.
C.
Expansion loops shall be all welded steel construction, utilizing long radius elbows.
D.
Install loops with "cold spring" so that loop will have 1/2 of the calculated expansion during
normal operation.
E.
Anchor pipe in an approved manner at points shown on drawings, using U-bolt or iron bar
clamps secured to the building construction.
F.
Install guides to maintain the position and alignment of piping.
G.
Install runouts from mains and/or risers with swing joints of sufficient length to absorb vertical
expansion or contraction of risers and horizontal expansion or contraction of mains.
H.
Where space does not permit installation of expansion loops, provide expansion joints as
described in Section 23 22 16, Steam and Steam Condensate Specialties.
I.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, equipment
or fixtures.
J.
Install piping connected to equipment to provide flexibility for thermal stresses and for
vibration. Adequately support and anchor pipe so that strain from weight and thermal
movement of piping is not imposed on the equipment.
K.
Provide piping passing through seismic, expansion, and construction joints with minimum 4
inch deflection capabilities in all directions. Anchor piping on both sides of joint so that
building movement will not cause structural stress on piping supports. Use multiple flexible
pipe connectors or seismic separation assemblies to achieve deflection capabilities
indicated.
TESTING OF STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING
A.
Test low pressure steam and condensate return piping with a cold hydrostatic test of not less
than 50 psig. Test medium and high pressure steam piping with pressure at 100 psig or 1-
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
STEAM AND STEAM
CONDENSATE PIPING
23 22 00 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1/2 times normal operating pressure, whichever is greater. Test for 24 hours, remove
thermostatic elements from traps and other devices that could be damaged by the test
pressures. After testing and before replacing trap elements, operate system for 24 hours.
Waste condensate to sewer through temporary connections as necessary. If freezing of
water could be a problem, air may be used for testing.
3.8
CLEANING OF STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING
A.
After all equipment and piping has been installed, clean piping systems as follows:
1.
Flush steam piping systems thoroughly with plant steam.
2.
Condensate pipng systems: Circulate a solution containing 1 pound of trisodium
phosphate per 50 gallons of water for 24 hours, at maximum temperature for each
system. Operate all system pumps for a minimum of 50% of the cleaning time.
a.
Drain system and thoroughly flush with water.
b.
Fill, operate and drain system repeatedly until clean. Remove mesh elements
of strainers at pumps, control valves and elsewhere and clean or replace
repeatedly until system can operate continuously with no buildup of dirt on
strainer mesh elements.
c.
After pipe cleaning is completed, flush and inspect all mechanical seals and
pump impellers for wear and/or damage and replace same with new parts, if
defective.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
STEAM AND STEAM
CONDENSATE PIPING
23 22 00 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 22 16
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Condensate meters
B.
Flash tanks
C.
Pressure reducing stations
D.
Pressure regulating valves
E.
Relief valves
F.
Steam flow meters
G.
Steam traps
H.
Strainers
I.
Unions and flanges
J.
Flexible pipe connectors
K.
Flexible expansion loops
L.
Expansion joints
M.
Pipe alignment guides
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute).
B.
ASME (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings on all equipment provided under this section.
B.
Where required, submit certified data sheets for equipment complying with ASME
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Condensate Meters: Badger, Cadillac.
B.
Flash Tanks: Adamson.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
STEAM AND STEAM
OSPHD SUBMITTAL
CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
130-202 KMD
23 22 16 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.2
2.3
C.
Pressure Reducing Valves: Spence, Fisher.
D.
Pressure Regulating Valves: Spirax Sarco.
E.
Relief Valves: Bell and Gossett, Watts or approved equal.
F.
Safety Valves: Kunkle, Crosby.
G.
Steam Flow Meters: BIF, Gervase or approved equal.
H.
Steam Traps: Armstrong, Spirax Sarco, Illinois, Dunham, Trane, Hoffman Specialty or
approved equal.
I.
Strainers: Armstrong, Dunham-Bush, Hayward, Metra-Flex, Mueller, Spirax-Sarco, Watts,
Hoffman Specialty or approved equal.
J.
Flexible connectors: Hyspan, Mason Industries, Metra-Flex or approved equal.
K.
Flexible expansion loops: Mason Industries, Metra-Flex or approved equal.
L.
Expansion joints: Hyspan, Mason Industries, Metra-Flex or approved equal.
M.
Pipe alignment guides: Hyspan or approved equal
FLASH TANKS
A.
Tanks equal to Spriax Sarco or approved equal, designed and constructed to ASME code
with required stamping.
B.
Provide complete with steam inlet, outlet, vent and drain connections.
C.
Tanks 12 inches through 20 inches designed and constructed for a maximum working
pressure of 150 psig with a 225 psig test.
D.
Tanks over 20 inches designed and constructed for a maximum working pressure of 125
psig with a 225 psig test.
E.
Steel construction with one coat primer on exterior. Provide inspection openings as required.
Provide manholes on tanks 42 inches in diameter and larger.
PRESSURE REDUCING STATIONS
A.
General:
1.
Furnish and install, as shown on drawings, a pressure reducing station to reduce high
pressure steam to low pressure steam..
2.
Each valves shall be 125 pound 450oF. cast iron construction, single seat for dead
end service with stainless steel diaphragm and internal trim. It shall be arranged to
allow inlet velocities below 10,000 feet per minute and valve capacities shall not to
exceed 10% above the required maximum. Valves 2-1/2 inch and larger shall have
flanged ends with 125 pound flanges. Smaller valves shall have screwed ends.
3.
Noise suppression shall be by a Spence flange-mounted multi-hole plate. Maximum
noise produced by the station when measured by the standard method shall not
exceed 80 db.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
STEAM AND STEAM
OSPHD SUBMITTAL
CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
130-202 KMD
23 22 16 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
4.
B.
Provide gate valves, noise suppression plate, traps, strainers, flash tank and piping as
shown on drawings.
Pressure Reducing Station:
1.
The reducing station shall consist of a pressure reducing valve sized for total capacity.
2.
2.4
2.5
Safety Valve: Set at 15 psig
4.
Drip Pan Elbow: size, Kunkle; Figure 299. Pipe drip pan drain to nearest floor drain.
PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES
A.
Equal to Spirax Sarco or approved equal.
B.
Furnish and install, as shown on drawings, pressure regulating valves to reduce steam
pressure as indicated.
C.
Valves shall provide maximum capacities shown on the drawings with an accuracy of
regulation equal to 1 psi, and allow for variation of the set pressure while in service.
D.
The pilot operated regulator shall be cast iron body. Unit to be self actuating, taking its
control signal from the process fluid.
E.
The regulator shall be pilot actuated and diaphragm operated. The regulator shall be
packless, single seated globe type suitable for ANSI Class IV shut off.
F.
All regulators shall have hardened stainless steel trim to 38 - 46 Rockwell C scale.
G.
Pilot operated regulators are to consist of two main components, main valve and pressure
pilot. Main valve stem shall be top and bottom guided with the bottom guide providing a
patent self scrubbing design to minimize sticking. pilots can be top, side or remote mounted
with set pressure adjustment by either a spring or air loading force. Trim, spring, stem,
guide, and diaphragms shall be stainless steel. Regulators will be threaded, with larger
sizes ANSI flanged to meet the system pressure.
RELIEF VALVES
A.
2.6
3.
Equal to Watts Type 174A or 740 or approved equal. ASME rated, with test lever, bronze
bodies, selected for a relief pressure applicable with the installation.
STEAM TRAPS
A.
Low Pressure Steam Traps:
1.
Provide float and thermostatic traps for low pressure steam service. Traps with
integral strainers are acceptable.
2.
Steam traps shall be sized based on actual capacity of steam trap at 1/2 psig
pressure differential across trap. In a case where actual pressure differential is known
and is greater than 1/2 psig, this pressure may be used for sizing.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
STEAM AND STEAM
OSPHD SUBMITTAL
CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
130-202 KMD
23 22 16 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
a.
B.
Drip Traps - High or Low Pressure:
1.
C.
2.7
2.9
Provide float and thermostatic trap or inverted bucket trap with thermic vent for low
pressure drips and inverted bucket traps without thermic vents for high pressure drips.
Low Pressure Thermostatic Traps:
1.
Traps shall have multiple seamless bellows type thermostatic elements, stainless
steel head and removable seat.
2.
Trap sizes and capacities shall be in accordance with the following table:
STRAINERS
A.
2.8
Size for 3 to 1 safety factor for the following items:
1)
Preheat coils
2)
Shell and tube heat exchangers (steam in shell)
3)
Unit heaters
4)
Reheat coils
5)
Storage water heaters
Y-type strainer designed for line pressure serving coil with strainer ahead of control valve in
steam supply to coil. Strainers shall be designed for line pressure.
UNIONS AND FLANGES
A.
For systems with pressures less than 150 psig, use 150 pound malleable iron ground joint
unions, ANSI B16.39, in steel piping 2 inch and smaller. For the same piping 2-1/2 inch and
larger, use cast iron flanges, Class 125.
B.
For systems with pressures 150 - 300 psig, 300 pound malleable iron ground joint unions in
steel piping 2 inch and smaller. For same piping 1-1/2 inch and larger, use cast iron flanges,
Class 250.
C.
Provide gaskets and bolts for flanges, as required for the temperature and pressure of the
piping system.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Provide flexible piping connectors at the following locations or where indicated on drawings.
1.
2.
B.
Vibration isolation.
Misalignment compensation.
For steel piping application use Hyspan Series 4500 with an inner hose of annular
corrugated stainless steel, an exterior sleeve of braided stainless steel, a pressure rating of
300 pounds per square inch gauge, joints for 2 inch diameter and larger shall be flanged and
for smaller than 2-inch diameter shall be threaded with unions. Size shall be same size as
piping connected to.
2.10 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION LOOPS
A.
Provide flexible piping connectors at the following locations or where indicated on drawings.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
STEAM AND STEAM
OSPHD SUBMITTAL
CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
130-202 KMD
23 22 16 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.
2.
3.
B.
Seismic joint.
Building expansion joint.
Building construction joint.
Expansion joints shall be of the braided stainless steel type. Joints to consist of two flexible
sections of hose and braid, two 30̊ elbows, and a 60̊ return. Flexible hose section to be
stainless steel, close pitch, annular corrugated hose with a braided outer covering of
stainless steel. End connections to match mating piping. The overall length shall allow for a
minimum of ±4” movement in any direction. Expansion joints shall be equal to Mason
Industries model “VFL” for flanged, “VCPS” for copper, “VMN” for male thread, “VGN” for
grooved.
2.11 EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
For steel piping 3 inch and smaller, provide stainless steel bellows type expansion joints at
locations indicated on drawings. Units to be Hyspan Series 1500 or equal with a pressure
rating of 150 pounds per square inch gauge and 750 degrees F., maximum compression as
indicated on drawing schedule, joint as specified for pipe joints, size shall be same size as
piping.
B.
For steel piping larger than 3 inch, provide externally pressurized guided stainless steel
bellows type expansion joints at locations indicated on drawings. Units to be Hyspan Series
3500 or equal with a pressure rating of 300 pounds per square inch gauge and 750 degrees
F., maximum compression as indicated on drawing schedule, flanged joints, size shall be
same size as piping.
2.12 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A.
Provide pipe alignment guides equal to Hyspan Series 9500. Guides to be pressed steel
joined together by fusion welding with a protective black lacquer paint finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FLASH TANKS
A.
3.2
3.3
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide steel support framing
as required.
INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE REDUCING STATIONS
A.
Use Schedule 80 pipe at the pressure reducing stations and within a minimum distance of 20
feet upstream and downstream of the reducing stations, to aid in noise suppression.
B.
Pressure Gauges:
1.
Provide a pressure gauge on all inlets and outlets of reducing station and every other
point of pressure change.
2.
Gauges shall have a range equal to 1-1/2 times the highest operating pressure and be
as specified in Section 22 05 19, Gauges and Thermometers.
INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES
A.
Install per manufacturers recommendations. Set to pressures indicated on drawings.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
STEAM AND STEAM
OSPHD SUBMITTAL
CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
130-202 KMD
23 22 16 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
3.4
3.6
Provide a pressure gauge on all inlets and outlets of each regulating valve.
2.
Gauges shall have a range equal to 1-1/2 times the highest operating pressure and be
as specified in Section 22 05 19, Gauges and Thermometers.
Pipe discharge from relief valves to an area that will afford protection to people in the vicinity
in the event of relief valve discharge.
INSTALLATION OF STEAM TRAPS
A.
Provide steam trap on condensate return side of all equipment utilizing steam, ahead of
steam control valves and to drip low points in the piping.
B.
Drip traps shall be provided at end of steam mains, at base of vertical risers, ahead of
expansion joints, valves and pressure regulators. Provide a trap every 300 feet for both low
and high pressure steam mains.or where indicated on drawings.
C.
Drip legs shall be 5 inch long and pipe diameter of main or apparatus return to 4 inch in pipe
size and on steam lines over 4 inch in diameter, drip leg of not less than 4 inch shall be
used. Installation of each steam trap used on drip legs shall be as follows, starting at
condensate leg; gate valve, union, strainer, steam trap and gate valve.
D.
Provide thermostatic traps for low pressure steam runouts, down feed risers to unit heaters
and for radiation and convectors.
STRAINERS
A.
3.7
1.
RELIEF VALVES
A.
3.5
Pressure Gauges:
Provide Y-type strainer ahead of each steam trap (except thermostatic trap), pressure
reducing valve and control valve. Omit strainer where trap is serving coil with strainer ahead
of control valve in steam supply to coil.
UNIONS AND FLANGES
A.
3.8
3.9
Provide flanged or screwed unions in connections to equipment and where shown on
drawings.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Provide flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equipment where
shown. Do not allow weight of piping to be carried by equipment
B.
Install devices in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
FLEXIBLE EXPANSION LOOPS
A.
Provide piping passing through seismic, expansion, and construction joints. Anchor piping on
both sides of joint so that building movement will not cause structural stress on piping
supports.
B.
Install devices in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
STEAM AND STEAM
OSPHD SUBMITTAL
CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
130-202 KMD
23 22 16 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.10 EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Use multiple flexible pipe connectors or manufactured seismic separation assemblies to
achieve deflection capabilities specified above.
B.
Install devices in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.11 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A.
Install guides as shown on drawings and where recommended by expansion joint
manufacturer.
B.
Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure where necessary. Provide pipe guides so that
movement takes place along axis of pipe only.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
STEAM AND STEAM
OSPHD SUBMITTAL
CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
130-202 KMD
23 22 16 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 36 00
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.3
Fan-coil units
Equipment to be product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of specified
equipment who issues catalog data on such products.
SUMBITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings on all equipment provided under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
PERFORMANCE
A.
2.3
Fan-coil units: McQuay, Airtherm, American Air Filter, Dunham-Bush, Trane, International.
Unless noted otherwise fan-coil unit capacities on 55o F. entering air temperature, 180o F.
average water temperature.
FAN-COIL UNITS
A.
Equal to McQuay Thinline fan-coil units as scheduled on drawings.
B.
General: Fan-coil units shall be for two-pipe system with types, sizes and performance as
scheduled on the drawings.
C.
Casings and Cabinets:
1.
Hideaway unit designed for fully concealed installations. Ceiling enclosure by others.
2.
Ceiling units designed for ceiling mounting. Includes a decorative cabinet with a
stamped air discharge grille. Cabinet finished in heat fused epoxy over galvanized
steel. Hinged bottom panel provides total accessibility to the unit, controls, and filter.
The three-speed fan speed controller is furnished separately for wall mounting.
Attractive stamped return air grille in the hinged bottom panel.
3.
Unit with hinged ceiling panel designed for recessed ceiling applications. Totally
enclosed in a cabinet with ceiling frame and decorator style hinged access panel.
Ceiling frame and access panel are adjustable to permit easy field adaptation to any
ceiling type for custom fit and maximum accessibility to the unit and controls. Cabinet
design permits complete removal of the basic unit for installation in steps coinciding
with the various trades. Available with a back duct collar in lieu of a bottom stamped
return air grille.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 36 00 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.4
4.
Designed for use in three different types of installations: as a floor console most
frequently located below a window for draft-free performance in the conditioned area;
as a wall hung console in areas where a cove or molding prevents the use of a floor
console; or as a semi-recessed console for areas where a minimum of cabinet
projection is desirable.
5.
Equal to McQuay Type TSB: Designed for applications that require a fully concealed
or a fully recessed installation. Furnished with base casing with fan speed controller
furnished separately for wall mounting. Decorative wall plates with stamped return air
grilles for use with recessed units with without air discharge grille and with access
doors. Wall plates are galvanized steel with rounded corners and have heat fused
epoxy finish.
D.
Coils: HI-F rippled aluminum fins with 1/2 inch O.D. copper tubes mechanically expanded for
a permanent bond. Water coils shall have a manual air vent. Coil performance as tabulated
in the schedule.
E.
Fans: DWDI forwardly curved, centrifugal type. Fan housing shall be fabricated of heavy
galvanized steel and of 2-piece construction with removable front half for complete access to
fans.
F.
Motors: 120v/1Ph/60Hz single speed, sleeve bearing, permanent split capacitor motors with
oilers, inherent thermal overload protection with automatic reset and resilient mounts, and
designed for use with a solid state variable speed controller.
G.
Speed Controller: Unit mounted solid state variable speed controller with integral "on-off"
switch which shall provide uniform unlimited fan speed adjustment from high to low. It shall
include a voltage compensating circuit and RFI filter circuit.
H.
Thermostat: Unit mounted and sequence 2-way valves at heating coil and cooling coil.
Provide a switch to permit constant fan operation or cycling of the fan with the thermostat.
I.
Primary Drain Pan: Constructed of 20-gage galvanized steel, insulated on the under side
with closed cell insulation. Secondary drain pan shall be mastic coated. Primary and
secondary drain pans shall be equipped with 7/8 inch O.D. sweat connections.
J.
Cabinet Insulation: 1/2 inch fiber free liner.
K.
Filters: 1 inch thick throwaway type. TSH Unit: 1 inch throwaway filters with optional return
air plenum.
HORIZONTAL FAN-COIL UNITS (BELT-DRIVEN)
A.
Equal to McQuay Type SCB as scheduled.
B.
General: Horizontal fan-coil units, belt driven, high capacity type.
C.
Casing: Fabricated of continuous 18-gage galvanized steel with duct collars and 1-inch thick,
2.0 lb/cu. Ft. internal foil face insulation.
D.
Coils: Standard cooling coil and separate heating coils, constructed of seamless copper
tubes and headers with rippled aluminum fins. Tubes shall be expanded onto the fins. All
coils to have manual air vents.
E.
Fan Housing: Galvanized steel, 2-piece, die formed with integral scroll and inlets. Fan wheel
to be aluminum, DWDI, forwardly curved, and statically and dynamically balanced.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
23 36 00 - 2
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
130-202 KMD
F.
Motor Mounts: Adjustable, with V-belt drive and adjustable motor pulley.
G.
Drain Pan: Non-corrosive and double sloped with copper drain connection.
H.
Filters: Nominal 2-inch thick throwaway type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide each unit with shut-off valve on supply and balancing valve on return piping.
B.
Provide each unit with easily accessible manual air vent at high points. If not easily
accessible, extend vent to exterior surface of cabinet for easy servicing.
C.
Anchor chilled water and hot water supply and return risers at an intermediate level slab, as
shown on drawings. Provide swing joints at top and bottom of hot water risers to allow 1 inch
expansion.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 36 00 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 37 13
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Diffusers
B.
Grilles and registers
C.
Constant Air Volume (CAV) terminal units
D.
1.2
1.3
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Make air flow tests and sound level measurements in accordance with applicable
ANSI/ASHRAE equipment test codes and standards.
B.
Manufacturer shall certify cataloged performance and ensure correct application of air outlet
types.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Review requirements of outlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting
shop drawings and schedules of outlets.
B.
Check location of outlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features, symmetry and lighting arrangement.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish shop drawings for all equipment provided under this Section. Constant air volume
box submittals shall include point-to-point piping or wiring diagrams with all setpoints
indicated. Where control sequences require relays or other devices for proper operation,
include submittal data on those devices. Include calibration instructions with submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Grilles, Registers and Diffusers: Titus, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire, Price, or approved
equal.
B.
Laminar Flow Unitary Panels: Titus, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire, Price, or approved
equal.
C.
Constant Air Volume (CAV) terminal units: Envirotec, Titus, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire,
Price, or approved equal.
APPLICATION
A.
Rate units in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
AIR DISTRIBUTION
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
DEVICES
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
130-202 KMD
23 37 13 - 1
2.3
2.4
B.
Base air outlet application on space noise level of NC 35 maximum.
C.
Provide supply outlets with sponge rubber seal around edge.
D.
Provide baffles to direct air away from walls, columns, or other obstructions within radius of
diffuser operation.
E.
Sizes as noted on drawings.
SCHEDULE OF GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
A.
Refer to schedule on drawings.
B.
Unless noted otherwise on the schedule, finish all ceiling mounted devices with a white,
baked enamel finish. Paint all other exposed devices that are not mounted in the ceiling with
a prime coat for finish painting in the field by others.
C.
Verify frame style required to accommodate ceiling and wall construction.
D.
Provide fire rated three hour rated ceiling diffusers as scheduled on drawings. Include
thermal blanket. Install as described and illustrated in UL Fire Resistance Directory and per
NFPA 90A.
CONSTANT AIR VOLUME (CAV) SUPPLY TERMINAL UNITS
A.
General requirements of all supply terminal units:
1.
Terminals shall be certified under the ARI Standard 880 Certification Program and
carry the ARI Seal. Noncertified terminals may be submitted after testing at an
independent testing laboratory under conditions selected by the engineering
consultant in full compliance with ARI Standard 880. These tests must be witnessed
by the engineering consultant with all costs to be borne by the terminal manufacturer.
Testing does not ensure acceptance.
2.
The terminal casing shall be minimum 22 gage galvanized steel. The units shall be
lined with 1” thick dual density insulation, meeting UL 181 and NFPA 90A, enclosed
between the unit casing and a non-perforated internal 22 gauge sheet metal cover
extending over the fiberglass insulation, as well as covering the liner cut edges. The
discharge connection shall be slip and drive construction for attachment to metal
ductwork.
3.
The damper shall be heavy gauge steel with shaft rotating in self-lubricating bearings.
Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the end to
indicate damper position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable.
The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent overstroking and a
synthetic seal to limit close-off leakage.
4.
Actuators shall be capable of supplying at least 35 in.-lb. of torque to the damper shaft
and shall be mounted externally for service access. Terminals with internal actuator
mounting or linkage connection must include gasketed access panel, removable
without disturbing ductwork.
5.
CAV box flow sensors shall be furnished and installed by the box manufacturer.
Sensors shall take multiple readings across the box inlet and be of the averaging type.
Sensors shall be of metal construction. Plastic construction is allowable where
materials are rated for use in the airstream, and where the sensor is reinforced with
metal framing.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
AIR DISTRIBUTION
DEVICES
23 37 13 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
6.
Provide external taps from the flow sensors for hook-up to a magnehelic gauge in
order to read the cfm through the box.
7.
All controls, plastic tubing, wiring, and damper operators shall be enclosed by a metal
cover or have fire resistant rating for use in return air plenum. All tubing and tubing
connection fittings shall comply with materials requirements of Section 23 09 00,
Building Control Systems. All wiring shall comply with Division 26 requirements.
8.
Each box shall have attached information of flow charts for CFM measurement, box
type and instructions for calibration.
9.
All cfm settings are to be controlled by inlet velocity sensing. Mechanical stops are
unacceptable.
10.
Where Constant air volume box control is electronic, include the primary air damper.
Flow sensors will be provided as described above. The damper actuators and
controllers will be furnished by the Temperature Controls Contractor and sent to the
CAV box manufacturer’s factory for factory installing. Calibration of those controllers
remains the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor.
11.
CAV box control shall be pressure independent.
12.
Furnish hot water heating coils with capacities as indicated on the drawings. Control
valves for hot water coils will be provided under Section 23 09 00, Building Control
Systems.
13.
Provide access panels on all CAV boxes with built-in heating coil. Access panels shall
be insulated and of similar construction as CAV box casing, located upstream of the
reheat coil, include quick release fasteners, and be gasketed to provide an air tight
seal when installed.
Type 1 Constant Air Volume Box:
1.
2.
Box minimum shall be factory set at 30% of the maximum desired cfm unless noted
otherwise on the drawings. Discharge NC shall not exceed 30 at the maximum cfm
based on 1/2 inch water gauge inlet static pressure, five feet of 1 inch lined duct, and
10 dB room attenuation. Radiated NC shall not exceed 30. Boxes shall have not
greater than 0.10 inch water gauge pressure drop across the box at selected flow
rates.
3.
Refer to [drawings for control functions.
4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Grilles, Register and Diffusers:
1.
Install items in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions. Rigidly fasten
ducts behind grilles, registers and diffusers.
2.
Supplier and contractor shall work very closely with ceiling contractor and electrical
contractor to coordinate the installation of the Multi-Vent type ceiling panels.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
AIR DISTRIBUTION
DEVICES
23 37 13 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
3.
Provide the required air throw and spread with no apparent drafts or excessive air
movement within the conditioned area. Provide air distribution accessories necessary
to effect these conditions. Replace devices causing excessive noise, drafts and air
movements. Adjust cores to direct air pattern to avoid downdrafts and excessive air
movement. Adjust directional tabs in square diffusers and in linear diffusers to provide
proper air distribution pattern.
4.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
5.
Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.
6.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles and registers,
regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille and register
assembly.
7.
Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. (2 coats). Extend
painting inside duct as far as is visible through the outlet and inlet.
8.
Provide diffusers, registers and grilles with sheet metal round to square transitions as
required by duct attachment. Duct size as shown on drawings.
9.
Sizes shown on drawings for diffusers, registers and grilles are "neck" sizes. Size of
face shall depend on ceiling/wall/floor application. Where diffusers/registers/grilles are
provided for lay-in suspended type ceilings, the nominal size of face shall be 24 by 24
inch or 24 by 48 inch unless otherwise shown.
10.
Where sufficient clearance is unavailable to provide a smooth radius branch duct
connection to neck, provide a sheet metal plenum at diffuser/register neck and
connect duct at side of plenum.
11.
Paint integral opposed blade dampers matte black (2 coats).
12.
Provide extractor for outlets/inlets located at exposed duct.
13.
Provide support of inlets/outlets independent of ceiling.
Support of Operating Room Particulate Control Systems (similar to Krueger “Steriflo”) as
follows:
1.
Support air distribution system to the structure above. The ceiling cannot support the
system.
2.
Drill the continuous hanger angles every 4 feet on center on both sides and extend ½”
diameter hanger rods up to the structure in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Seismically brace the system to resist lateral movement in all
directions.
3.
Support and brace as detailed on Drawings.
4.
5.
C.
Support the center grid system similar to the suspended ceiling grid system. Support
as shown on the architectural drawings.
Support the Operating Room Diffuser (ORD) panels as follows:
1.
Support the grid system and the panels to the structure above.
2.
Provide 4 hanger wires for each ORD panel and connect to the four corner hanger
brackets on the backpans.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
AIR DISTRIBUTION
DEVICES
23 37 13 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.14. Support the center grid system similar to the suspended ceiling grid system. Support
as shown on the architectural drawings.
D.B. Constant Air Volume Boxes:
1.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Coordinate installation of CAV boxes, especially fan powered type, with all other
trades so as to provide required access clearances for servicing those pieces of
equipment.
3.
Refer to drawings for temperature control sequences.
4.
Provide minimum of three diameters of straight rigid duct on inlet of each CAV box.
5.
Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling
components.
6.
Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.
7.
Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 23 31 10.
8.
Installation of all laboratory extract air valves and supply boxes shall be closely
coordinated with the laboratory airflow control system supplier.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
AIR DISTRIBUTION
DEVICES
23 37 13 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 23 73 23
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.2
1.3
Provide factory custom, indoor central station air handling units as described in this Section
and scheduled on the Drawings.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers)
B.
AMCA (Air Moving and Conditioning Association)
C.
ASTM (American Standards for Testing and Materials)
D.
NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)
E.
SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractors National Association)
F.
UL (Underwriter's Laboratories)
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for air and sound performance in
accordance with AMCA Standard 210 and ASHRAE Standard 51.
B.
Provide factory assembled air handling units that are the products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in manufacturing units of the size and type specified.
C.
All products furnished under this Specification shall be UL or ETL listed and shall conform to
the requirements of all applicable codes.
D.
Coils shall bear the ARI certified ratings seal for performance.
E.
Seismic Performance: Air handling unit shall withstand the effects of earthquake motion
determined according to 2010 CBC. The term “withstand” means that the unit will remain in
place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to seismic forces
specified. The unit shall remain fully operational after the seismic event. Each unit shall
have a prominently displayed 2007 CBC Section 1708 A.5 Seismic Compliance Label issued
by an independent third party approval agency which is specific for the size of the
component and tested acceleration levels.
F.
CBC Seismic Compliance:
1. All components included herein shall be designed, manufactured and independently
tested, rates and certified to meet the seismic compliance standards of the California
Building Code, 1708A.5 and OSHPD CAN 2-1708 latest edition. The units shall be
designed, tested and certified to meet SDS load and wind load determined by a
Structural Engineer.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2. All completed component assemblies shall be clearly labeled for field inspection.
Labels shall include the manufacturer’s identification, model number, serial number
and definitive information describing the product’s performance characteristics and the
approved agency’s identification.
3. In addition to all seismic requirements for CBC Certification listed elsewhere in the
project specification, manufacturer’s submittals shall include:
a.Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance clearly indicating the equipment
model being submitted, their Independent Certifying Agency, the Independent
Certifying Agency’s report number and the equipment’s seismic conformance
level.
b.
1.4
1.6
Clear installation instructions including all accessory components that
are part of the overall component installation necessary to support the
definition of “on line”.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish detailed shop drawings including performance capacities and dimensioned drawings
for all equipment provided under this Section.
B.
If an alternate manufacturer other than manufacturer scheduled on drawings is used, the
dimensions of the unit must match those dimensions of the units shown on the drawings.
C.
Manufacturer shall provide a seismic certification of compliance for equipment in
conformance with California Building Code Section 1708A.5 including compliance with latest
version of OSHPD CAN 2-1708 and latest addendum. This shall be for review and
acceptance by the registered design professional in responsible charge of the seismic
system and the building official. The manufacturer of designated equipment shall test or
analyze the equipment and its mounting system or anchorage and submit a certificate of
compliance for acceptance. Qualification shall be by an actual test on a shake table, by
three-dimensional shock tests, by an analytical method using dynamic characteristics and
forces, by the use of experience data, or by a more rigorous analysis providing for equivalent
safety.
FACTORY TESTING
A.
Witness of Factory Tests: The manufacturer shall include as part of bill of material a
provision for two trips for two people including airfare, board and lodging to witness the
following tests at the factory prior to shipment. Two units shall be selected by the
mechanical engineer two weeks prior to shipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Air handler manufacturer:
1.
Huntair
2.
York
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.2
3.
Temtrol
4.
Energy Labs
4.5.
Alliance Air Handling Units
GENERAL
A.
Provide draw-through air handling units as indicated on the Drawings. Basis of Design –
Huntair/Concepts and Designs Inc. (CDI)
B.
Components: The schedule on the Drawings contains a specific list of the components
required for each system. In general, provide the following air handling components for this
Project:
1.
Centrifugal fan array sections
2.
Cooling, heating coil sections
3.
Humidifier sections
4.
Spacer/access sections
5.
Pre, post and final filter sections
6.
Mixing box sections
7.
Variable frequency controllers (VFDs)
8.
Air Flow Measuring Stations
9.
Discharge dampers
10.
Temperature Controls
11.
Ultra Violet Germicidal Irradiation System
C.
Air handling units shall be shipped in individual or combined sections as required by the
project. Supply and return fan sections, mixing box section, pre and final filter sections shall
be designed to be fitted up directly to each other and the dehumidification section which may
be manufactured by another equipment manufacturer.
D.
Prior to be considered as equal, the Alternate Manufacturers above shall demonstrate full
compliance with the specification requirements for the entire specification prior to the date of
tender, scheduled unit performance, sound power, assembled unit vibration dynamics,
energy consumption, operating and maintenance characteristics, weight and dimensions as
compared to the Huntair air handling unit with Fanwall® system that is the basis of design.
Alternate manufacturers are required to submit qualifications and detailed comparative
performance data including, but not limited to, a listing of at least four projects where similar
equipment sizes and configurations in similar critical applications of similar scope to that as
specified herein have been in successful operation for at least four years prior to the tender
date for the equipment for this project. Air Handling Units offered for tender shall have been
manufactured with similar configurations, components, and for like application, and that must
have been in beneficial use for at least four years prior to the tender date for this project.
Listed alternate manufacturers must provide a list of four such installations along with facility
contact information to the consulting engineer at least two weeks prior to the date of tender.
Manufacturers not listed by name in these specifications will not be approved.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.3
UNIT HOUSINGS
A.
PRESSURE RATING:
1.
B.
CASING CONSTRUCTION:
1.
C.
The unit housing shall be constructed to withstand a minimum internal positive
pressure of 12 inches of water gauge. Leakage rate shall be 1% @ 10" W.G. and
shall be certified in writing by an Officer of the Company.
Walls and roof to be 2” “Double Wall” construction as indicated in the specification for
each section of the unit. Cabinet shall be with a minimum 16-gauge, G90 galvanized
steel solid outer panel and a minimum 20-gauge G90 galvanized, inner liner. Panels
to be of standing seam construction with seams turned inward to provide a smooth
flush exterior. Panels to be screwed together on maximum 8” centers with minimum
5/16” zinc plated screws sealed with a continuous bead of silicone caulking applied
between the matching panel seams prior to assembly (sandwiched and sealed by the
compression of the panels), and with a final bead following assembly on both the
exterior and interior panel seams to produce an air tight unit. Wall to base skin and
wall to roof panel seams shall be sealed with 1/2” x 1/8” Poron-Rubber strips and all
exterior seams shall be continuously caulked to assure leak-proof integrity of the unit
housing. AHU unit housing shall be constructed to prevent conditioned air bypass or
mitigation through unit walls, roof and floor around any interior partition or component
blank-off walls such as for filters, coils or fan bulkheads. At the discretion of the design
engineer, the manufacturer may be required to perform casing leak testing for
purposes of demonstrating that the unit casing leakage rate at 1.5 times the design
maximum fan operating static pressure is less than .5% of design airflow. Such testing
will be performed at the manufacturer’s facility. At the sole discretion of the design
engineer, such testing shall be witnessed by an owner’s representative. A certified
test report of such testing shall be included in the O&M Manuals provided at the time
of shipment of the equipment.
INSULATION:
1.
Panels to be insulated with 2” - 3-pound double density, pre-molded, rigid board, fireresistant, with matte face. Insulation to meet NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B and ASTM E 84
requirements for Flame Spread of 25 or less and Smoke Development of 50 or less.
Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity K factor of .23 Btu/hr/Sq. ft/degree F @ 75
F mean and provide the following sound attenuation characteristics (per ASTM C 423
- Type “A” Mounting):
Octave bands
Absorption Coefficient
125
7
250
.80
500
1.16
1k
1.15
2k
1.11
4k
1.10
8k
1.05 (for 2”–3#)
All cut edges of the board insulation shall be completely enclosed by the unit panels.
A finish bead of caulking will be applied over all foil to panel seams and/or inner liners
to main panel seams to completely encapsulate the insulation.
2.
D.
Interior liners: to be minimum 20-gauge, G90, solid galvanized steel throughout the
unit for the walls and roof. A finish bead of caulking will be applied between the liner
and the interior panel seams to completely seal the panel.
ROOF PANELS:
1.
On indoor units shall be flat with smooth exteriors the same as the side panels.
Weatherproof roofs shall be constructed with raised seams. Raised Roof Seams to be
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
HANDLING UNITS
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
130-202 KMD
23 73 23 - 4
sealed between sandwiched panels with a bead of silicone caulking. The top of each
roof panel seam is to receive a final bead of caulking and be sealed with a 16-gauge
roof cleat mechanically formed to enclose the standing seam at the roof panel to
panel joint. Roof to slope from center axis of roof to sides a minimum 1/8” per foot to
allow complete water drainage and preclude standing water. Roof panels to overlap
the side panels a minimum 1” all around the unit creating an overhang to reduce direct
runoff from the roof down over the side panels. All doors and louvers shall have a
formed rain shield extending a minimum of 1” from the wall to direct water away from
the door and louver openings.
E.
2.4
2.5
Stiffeners of angle steel shall be supplied as required to maintain a casing deflection criteria
of 1/100 at 1.5 times the working pressure.
ACCESS DOORS:
A.
Access doors shall be 2” double wall construction with G90 galvanized exterior panels and
G90 galvanized interior panel. Door jam & frame shall be constructed of extruded aluminum
with continuously welded corners for rigidity. Door panels shall be insulated with 2”
expandable foam insulation completely encapsulated and sealed between the door panels
and frame. Provide doors located and sized to allow for routine maintenance including motor
replacement and filter replacement, electrical components and any other sections or
components requiring access or maintenance.
B.
Doors shall be provided with a minimum of (2) dual acting heavy duty key locking composite
latches through 48” high, (3) latches through 72” high. Latches shall be operable from both
the interior and exterior of the unit. Door latches on doors into fan sections shall be provided
with a hasp or other mechanism to facilitate locking of the doors. Door hinge shall be heavy
duty Stainless Steel. Door shall be sealed with continuous hollow closed cell foam gasket.
C.
Doors to be provided with double high performance closed cell replaceable neoprene bulb
type gasket seals around the entire perimeter of the door / frame.
D.
Doors shall open against static pressure unless obstructed by internal components. If
obstructed by internal components on the positive sections requiring access, the doors shall
open with pressure and shall be provided with a safety restraining mechanism. Doors used
to access rotating equipment shall be provided with an OSHA approved safety latching
mechanism requiring a tool to open and shall also have a highly visible, permanently fixed,
caution sign on the exterior of the door. Doors with access to moving parts must also have
locking hardware and meet current UL mechanical protection guidelines.
E.
Doors shall be provided with thermal pane wire glass viewing windows as called out for on
the unit drawings in the specifications. Minimum window size to be 8” x 8” with 12” x 12”
provided door size permitting.
BASES:
A.
B.
Unit bases shall be constructed from structural steel channel iron around the entire perimeter
of the unit and provided with intermediate structural tubing, channel and angle iron as
required to support all internal components. All tubing, channel and angle joints shall be solid
welded. Bolted or formed channel bases are not acceptable.
The unit base shall be covered with a 12-gauge floor with caulked seams. Base shall be
provided with removable lifting lugs minimum (4) per section, properly located to assure
uniform loading. Maximum spacing between lifting lugs shall be 120”.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
HANDLING UNITS
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
130-202 KMD
23 73 23 - 5
2.6
2.7
C.
Base shall be insulated with 1.25” polyurethane foam insulation under the base skin and
covered with a minimum 20 gauge G90 galvanized steel liner. Insulation to meet same
criteria as explained under the cabinet casing requirements.
D.
Drain pans shall be 304 Stainless Steel double-walled construction with solid welded seams
for complete water capture and containment. Pans under cooling coils shall extend a
minimum 12” past the leaving face of the coil in direction of airflow. Drain Pans shall be fully
recessed in the unit floor and all headers and return bends shall be located over the drain
pan for collection of all condensate forming on headers and return bends. All coils shall be
easily removable without cutting or removing any portion of the drain pan. Pans shall be
insulated between the liner and the main pan. Pans shall be IAQ Double Sloping to a single
drain. Drain connection shall be a minimum 1-1/4” diameter MIPS thread extending out
through the channel base the same side as the coil connections unless other wised indicated
on the drawings. Pans shall be provided for cooling coils, humidifiers, out side air intakes
and under other components as required. Mastic coated drain pans are not acceptable as
they are “non-Cleanable”.
E.
All large openings (greater than one square foot) in the floor, including dampers openings,
shall be covered with a removable powder coated heavy gauge steel grating bolted in place
suitable for walking on which will prevent any personnel and large objects from falling
through into the space below. Grating shall be capable of supporting minimum 300 pounds.
F.
Provide a perimeter collar around the entire unit and around each floor opening to insure unit
is watertight. The entire base shall act as a secondary drain pan to hold up to 1” of water.
COATINGS:
A.
All wall, roof, interior divider walls, racks, blank-offs and the Base Structure shall be coated
with a Dry Powder - Baked Polyester coating similar to Tiger #7035, Drylac Series 49 or
equal which is both lead and cadmium free. Each cabinet panel, panel liner and interior
partition component is to be individually coated & baked following shearing, notching,
punching, & forming to provide 100% powder coverage over the entire finished piece to
include the interior, exterior and all metal edges. The coating process shall be completed
prior to assembly of the unit to ensure that all joined surfaces (panel to panel joints), are
covered. Spray or brush applied coatings on the exterior of the cabinet only are NOT
acceptable. Powder Paint to have passed Salt Spray Resistance Test ASTM B 117-90
Minimum 7000 Hours, Impact Test ASTM D 2794-90 up to 160 lbs and Humidity Resistance
Test ASTM D 2247-87 Minimum 7000-hour test w/ maximum blister 1/16 in/1 mm.
B.
Silver ion to be included in all interior surface coatings.
C.
Stainless steel is the only acceptable alternate for finish specified above.
D.
Color of unit to be white (or Architect / Owner specified).
SUPPLY AND RETURN FANS
A.
The fan system shall consist of multiple, direct driven, arrangement 4 plenum fans
constructed per AMCA requirements for the duty specified, (Class I, II, or III). All fans shall
be selected to deliver the specified airflow quantity at the specified operating Total Static
Pressure and specified fan/motor speed. The fan array shall be selected to operate at a
system Total Static Pressure that does not exceed 90% of the specified fan’s peak static
pressure producing capability at the specified fan/motor speed. Each fan/motor “cube” shall
include an 11 gauge, G90 Galvanized steel intake wall, 14 gauge spun steel inlet funnel, and
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
HANDLING UNITS
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
130-202 KMD
23 73 23 - 6
an 11 gauge G90 Galvanized steel motor support plate and structure. The fan intake wall,
inlet funnel, and motor support structure shall have same finish as specified in Section 7
above.
B.
Fans shall be selected so that if any one fan in the array fails, that the remaining fans can
continue to supply the scheduled airflow at the scheduled static pressure. This capability
must be demonstrated during the air balancing phase of construction.
C.
All motors shall be pedestal mounted type, Ultra-Efficient, TEFC, T-frame motors selected at
the specified operating voltage and RPM as specified or scheduled elsewhere. Motors shall
have performance and construction equal to or better that that scheduled below:
1.
1.15 service factor, 40°C ambient
2.
Class F insulation, Class B temperature rise @ 1.0SF
3.
Insulation system shall meet or exceed NEMA MG1-2006, Part 31
4.
NEMA Design B, Continuous Duty
5.
Die Cast Construction
6.
Minimum Efficiency shall be per table below:
HP
1
1
1.5
1.5
2
2
3
3
5
5
7.5
7.5
10
10
15
15
20
20
RPM
1800
3600
1800
3600
1800
3600
1800
3600
1800
3600
1800
3600
1800
3600
1800
3600
1800
3600
Voltage
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
208-230, 460
FL Efficiency
86.5
87.5
87.5
87.5
87.5
88.5
90.2
89.5
90.2
90.2
92.4
91.7
92.4
91.7
93.0
92.4
93.0
92.4
D.
Each fan/motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced to meet AMCA standard 204-96,
category BV-5, to meet or exceed Grade 1.0 with a maximum of .55 mil peak (.022 in. per
second peak, filter in) deflection at the design operating speed for the fan/motor assembly.
Final balancing of the fan and motor combination shall be performed while the fan/motor is
secured to the actual fan cell mounting rail. Certified copies of all dynamic balancing
results for all fans shall be provided with the unit.
E.
Fan sections shall include overhead structural means for motor/blower removal assistance.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.8
SOUND POWER LEVELS
A.
The sound power level at the air handling unit discharge, air intake (return air and / or OSA
intake), and casing radiated shall not exceed the values given in the table shown below,
when the unit is operating at maximum design airflow and static Pressure.
B.
Maximum Octave Band sound Power Level in dB RE 10E-12 watts
Unit Tag # (AC-18)
Octave Bands Center Freq.
Unit Inlet
Unit Outlet
63
80
79
125
84
87
250
85
88
500
83
81
1k
79
80
2k
79
78
4k
77
73
8k
71
66
Unit Tag # (AC-19)
Octave Bands Center Freq.
Unit Inlet
Unit Outlet
63
82
77
125
83
75
250
82
80
500
87
74
1k
85
76
2k
84
74
4k
83
72
8k
78
66
Unit Tag # (AC-20)
Octave Bands Center Freq.
Unit Inlet
Unit Outlet
63
74
77
125
74
72
250
67
75
500
71
75
1k
71
77
2k
69
75
4k
65
73
8k
57
68
Unit Tag # (AC-21)
Octave Bands Center Freq.
Unit Inlet
Unit Outlet
63
77
74
125
82
71
250
74
76
500
76
71
1k
73
70
2k
72
69
4k
71
67
8k
64
61
Unit Tag # (AC-22)
Octave Bands Center Freq.
Unit Inlet
Unit Outlet
63
83
83
125
80
78
250
78
81
500
78
81
1k
75
83
2k
75
80
4k
72
79
8k
64
74
Unit Tag # (AC-23)
Octave Bands Center Freq.
Unit Inlet
Unit Outlet
63
81
71
125
76
76
250
73
73
500
77
67
1k
69
67
2k
68
67
4k
68
64
8k
59
57
Unit Tag # (AC-24)
Octave Bands Center Freq.
Unit Inlet
Unit Outlet
63
87
73
125
85
69
250
83
78
500
85
76
1k
78
70
2k
76
70
4k
76
68
8k
68
62
Unit Tag # (AC-25)
Octave Bands Center Freq.
Unit Inlet
Unit Outlet
63
72
81
125
82
76
250
73
79
500
78
79
1k
79
81
2k
78
78
4k
75
77
8k
68
72
Unit Tag # (AC-26)
Octave Bands Center Freq.
Unit Inlet
Unit Outlet
63
72
82
125
82
77
250
73
80
500
78
80
1k
79
82
2k
78
79
4k
75
78
8k
68
73
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 8
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.9
C.
It shall be the option of the manufacturer to provide quieter fans, acoustical lining, sound
traps or other sound attenuating devices within the air handling unit to supplement the
design in order to meet the specified levels above. Such lining and/or attenuators shall have
no exposed fiberglass or wool insulation. Lining material shall be USDA approved and shall
meet the requirements of ASTM-E-800 and ASTM-E-682. Tedlar or other similar film over
fiberglass or wool materials is not acceptable because of its susceptibility to damage.
D.
Manufacturers must submit acoustical data for review and approval prior to the bid indicating
that the proposed equipment can meet all specified performance requirements without
impacting the equipment performance or design features including duct connection
locations, unit sizes and weights, acoustical performance, or specified total fan HP.
Proposals submitted which indicate a higher connected fan HP than specified or scheduled
will not be accepted. The submittal shall include a complete description of the methods and
procedures used to develop the sound power levels being submitted.
E.
The Fanwall array shall produce a uniform air flow profile and velocity profile within the
airway tunnel of the air handling unit not to exceed the specified cooling coil and/or filter
bank face velocity when measured at a point 12” from the intake side of the Fanwall array
intake plenum wall, and at a distance of 48” from the discharge side of the Fanwall intake
plenum wall.
REDUNDANT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE CONTROL:
A.
Provide one Variable Frequency Drive for normal operation and a second Variable
Frequency Drive for Redundant Backup operation. Provide control wiring and control
circuitry to transfer from main VFD to Redundant VFD when main drive has faulted. The
Variable Frequency Drives shall be sized to start and hold all motors in the Fanwall. Provide
short circuit protection for each drive through means of using fuses with fuse blocks or circuit
breakers.
B.
The Variable Frequency Drives shall be mounted in a dedicated enclosure for connection to
single point power. Each individual Variable Frequency Drive shall be provided with it’s own
disconnecting means so that it can be electrically isolated while the other VFD is operational.
Provide appropriate cooling of enclosure with clean, filtered air.
C.
Motor circuit protectors shall be used for each individual motor in the Fanwall array. Motor
circuit protectors shall be housed and mounted in the VFD enclosure as required. Motor
circuit protectors may be mounted in a remote enclosure that is separate from VFD
enclosure if design requires. Variable frequency drive enclosure and remote Motor circuit
protector enclosure must be mounted at a minimal distance from fan array motors and each
other.
D.
Proof of motor “run” state shall be provided for each individual motor. Dry contacts shall be
provided so that a fan “failure” state can be reported through the building automation system.
An array of lights shall be provided to provide visual indication of which motor is in a “failed”
state.
E.
Provide three phase power distribution wiring and control wiring as required. All three phase
power components shall have a rating listed for Short Circuit Current Rating. Provide control
wiring and components required for complete operation of fan wall system. System controls,
controls components and control wiring shall include but is not limited to Auto mode or
manual mode, CFM control mode, or BMS control mode. Controls and control wiring shall
include auto start/stop, manual start stop, life safety shutdown, smoke shutdown, system
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 9
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
alarms and VFD alarms. All control wiring shall be included in VFD enclosure provided with
system.
F.
VFD enclosure shall have the same finishes as those specified for the air handler.
G.
The fan array shall consist of multiple fan and motor ”cubes”, spaced in the air way tunnel
cross section to provide a uniform air flow and velocity profile across the entire air way
tunnel cross section and components contained therein. Each fan cube shall be wired to an
individual VFD as specified elsewhere for each fan motor. Wire sizing shall be determined,
and installed, in accordance with applicable NEC standards.
H.
The fan array shall produce a uniform air flow profile and velocity profile within the airway
tunnel of the air handling unit not to exceed the specified cooling coil and/or filter bank face
velocity when measured at a point 12” from the intake side of the fan array intake plenum
wall, and at a distance of 48” from the discharge side of the fan intake plenum wall.
I.
Each fan/motor “cube” will be provided with an individual back-draft damper. Backdraft
dampers are made with Heavy Duty 6063-T5 extruded aluminum on the frames and blades
and engineered to produce little to no static pressure loss at the designed operating
conditions. Seals shall be solid rubber. Bearings shall be rubber shielded radial ball
bearings, permanently lubricated. The vertical blades of the damper open as airflow
commences and close when the fan is idle. This is accomplished without the use of
mechanical means or weights.
J.
Each fan assembly shall be supplied with a complete flow measuring system, which
indicates airflow in Cubic Feet per Minute. The flow measuring system shall consist of a flow
measuring station and two pressure taps with one high static pressure tap and one low total
pressure tap located at the throat of the inlet cone. The flow measuring station shall not
obstruct the inlet of the fan and shall have no effect on fan performance (flow or static) or
sound power levels. A surface mounted indicator, located on the unit exterior, shall provide a
(digital) (analog) CFM readout, and/or a (4-20 ma) (0-10 volt) output control signal for use in
the BAS as specified elsewhere.
F.K.
There shall be a controller provided as an integral part of the fan system electrical panel that
automatically reconfigures the number of active fans in the multiple fan array to achieve
substantially peak operating efficiency for the fan array at any fan system operating point.
System optimization shall be achieved by enabling and disabling fans in the active array
while the controller varies the enabled fan operating speeds to achieve substantially peak
efficiency at the concurrent system flow and pressure demands of the system. The fan array
controller shall also be provided with an interface as indicated or specified that is compatible
with the building automation system and which shall allow remote monitoring and/or control
of the multiple fan array being interfaced with. The multiple fan array control panel(s) shall
be provided with means to indicate fan and motor status, operating mode, system flow rate
and fan total static pressure. Status shall be displayed at the unit control panel and/or at the
remote location of the building automation system control panel and interface screens. When
specified and/or indicated, the optional communication interface with the BAS system shall
be provided by the AHU manufacturer and shall require a single interface point at the
multiple fan array system control panel by the project controls contractor.
2.10 SHAFT GROUNDING:
A.
Provide an AEGIS model “SGR” shaft grounding system for each AC motor to prevent
electrical damage to motor bearings and to extend motor life by safely channeling harmful
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 10
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
shaft currents to ground. The AGEGIS system is frictionless, has no wear and requires no
maintenance or additional service during the life of the motor. No known equal.
2.11 COILS
A.
Chilled and Hot Water Coils shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and must
bear the ARI label. of the aluminum plate ripple fin .0075 aluminum, extended surface rated
in for water, steam or ethylene/propylene glycol water mixture. The tubes shall have a
minimum .025-wall thickness of seamless copper expanded into the fin collars to provide a
permanent mechanical bond. No metallic or thermal bonding materials are acceptable.
Return Bends shall be a minimum of one tube thickness greater than the main tubes (.035
brazed replaceable copper). “U” type shaped tubes are not acceptable. Coil headers shall be
non-ferrous seamless copper, and provided with brass or copper male pipe connections.
Pipe connections shall be same end connections. Each Coils supply & return connections
shall be raised / lowered a minimum 6” from the bottom / top of the coil to allow room for
piping connection hookup especially between stacked coils, coils near floors & coils near
roofs. Each coil shall be provided with capped vent & drain connections extended to the
exterior of the cabinet. All coils shall be fully drainable with no trapped tubes. Coils shall be
counter flow design with connections either left or right hand as specified. The use of internal
restrictive devices such as turbolater springs or ribbons to obtain turbulent construction is not
acceptable.
B.
Coil casings shall be minimum 16 gauge 304 Stainless Steel, with formed 3/4” flanges on all
sides of the coil with the tube sheets having pressed or extruded tube holes. The coil casing
shall be reinforced so that the maximum unsupported length is 60”. The reinforcements shall
be of the same material as the casing. Both ends of the coil to be sealed off from the main
air stream by full height blank off’s on both the entering air and leaving air sides. Blank off’s
to be the same material as the coil casing. Headers and return bends to be further insulated
with a closed cell neoprene gasket the full height & width of the coil casing to reduce
condensation.
C.
All coils shall be tested and rated in accordance with the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute (ARI) Standard 410 and certified in accordance with the ARI certification program.
All tubes shall be tested at a minimum 1500 PSIG and all assemblies tested under water at
450 PSIG and rated for 250 PSIG working pressures. Individual tube and core tests before
installation of header are not considered satisfactory. Hydrostatic tests alone will not be
acceptable.
D.
Stacked coils: mounted with integral stacking flanges on the coil. Racks are to be designed
to allow coil removal through the roof of the unit if required. All coils to be removable from
either side of the unit by easily removable end panels. Individual end panels are to be
supplied for each coil on the Supply & Return side of the cabinet to allow single coil piping
breakdown for coil removal.
2.12 FILTERS
A.
Filters shall be arranged so that they are loaded from within the cabinet on the upstream
side unless specifically indicated otherwise on the detail drawings. The filter rack assemblies
shall be blanked off to the sides, roof and floor and properly sealed to minimize filter bypass
1.
Pre-filter sections shall be factory fabricated as an integral part of the air handling unit.
Filters shall be arranged for face loading into a gasketed Universal holding frame.
Filters to be Aerostar Series 400, MERV-8, UL Class 2 (min.), made from 100%
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 11
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
Synthetic media as manufactured by Filtration Group. (1) construction set and (1)
additional set of the filters are to be provided.
2.
Final filters. The filter section shall be factory fabricated as an integral part of the airhandling unit. Filters to be arranged for face loading into a gasketed positive sealing
Universal Holding Frame. Filters to be model FMV, MERV-14, UL Class 2 (min.), as
manufactured by Filterair. Initial pressure drop shall not exceed 0.31” at 500 fpm face
velocity. (1) construction set and (1) additional set of the filters are to be provided.
3.
4.
Each filter bank to be provided with a Dwyer Series 605, Magnehelic Indicating
Transmitter. Transmitters to be flush mounted. Exterior unit transmitters to be covered
with a weatherproof enclosure to protect the gauge and prevent hazing of the glass.
5.
Provide walk-in filter access sections upstream downstream of each filter rack with
adequate space for filter service.
6.
Filter banks to be sized so maximum filter face velocity does not exceed 500 fpm.
7.
Filter efficiencies shall be based on ASHRAE Standard 52.1 – 1992 or ASHRAE
Standard 52.2 - 1999.
2.13 LIGHTS/CONTROL WIRING:
A.
Provide vapor proof marine type 27-watt flouresent light fixtures in each accessible section
complete with a protective metal cage and sealed glass enclosure. Lights to be wired to a
common switch mounted in a weatherproof box adjacent to the fan access door complete
with a convenience outlet. Outlet shall have an indicator light.
B.
All wiring to lights shall be in conduit and internal to the unit. No external conduit runs for the
lights are allowed.
C.
Air handler manufacturer shall allow a minimum 1.5” clearance above the entire width of
each interior bulk headers (coils, filters, fan blank off, etc.). This will be to allow wiring of any
110v or 24v runs internally to the unit as required by the controls contractor and reduce the
number penetrations of the exterior panels.
D.
If the unit requires splitting, junction boxes shall be furnished at each section to allow the
electrical contractor to make final connections in the field. Wiring shall be clearly labeled at
junction points to facilitate reconnection.
2.14 LOUVERS:
A.
Furnish and install, were shown on the plans, or in accordance with the schedules, a louver
of the stationary Drainable Blade type with a drain gutter in each blade and downspouts in
the frame jambs and mullions. Louvers shall have a minimum 57% free area based on a 48”
wide x 48” high size. The stationary blades shall be contained within a 6” frame. Frame and
blade material shall be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. Frame shall contain integral caulking slots.
A ¾” x 051” expanded, flattened aluminum bird screen shall be included and contained
within a removable frame.
B.
Louver design shall limit span between visible mullions to 10 feet and shall incorporate
structural supports to withstand a wind load of 20 lbs. per square foot (equivalent to a 90mph wind).
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 12
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
C.
Published louver performance data must be submitted for approval demonstrating pressure
drop and water penetration. Louver to be AMCA Standard 500 certified and licensed to bear
the AMCA Seal.
D.
Louver Sizing:
1.
OSA: 600 (500) fpm maximum face velocity
2.
Exhaust: 1100 (900) (750) fpm maximum face velocity
2.15 DAMPERS:
A.
Control Dampers: Furnish and install, at locations shown on plans, or in accordance with
schedules, Standard (Low Leak) Dampers with published leakage data certified under the
AMCA certified ratings program. (Low Leak Dampers shall be rated less than 6.2 cfm per sq.
ft. of area at 4-in. w.g. pressure difference through a 48” x 48” damper). Published leakage
data shall include leakage information for all available damper sizes at pressure differences
from 1 in w.g. through 13 in w.g. Standard Control Dampers shall be constructed of Formed
Steel (extruded Aluminum) blades and casing provided with vinyl or rubber edge seals and
stainless steel edge seals. (Low leak dampers shall be fabricated of minimum 5” x 1” x .125”
6063T5 extruded aluminum hat channel with hat mounting flanges on both sides of the
frame. Blades shall be airfoil type extruded aluminum (maximum 6” depth) with integral
structural reinforcing tube running the full length of each blade. Blade edge seals shall be
extruded vinyl double edge design with inflatable pocket that enables air pressure from
either direction to assist in blade to blade seal. Blades shall be mechanically locked in
extruded blade slots, yet be easily replaceable in the field.) Adhesive or clip-on type blade
seals are not acceptable. Bearings shall be non-corrosive molded synthetic. Axles shall be
square or hexagonal (round is not acceptable) to provide positive locking connection to
blades and linkage. Linkage shall be concealed in the frame.
2.16 HUMIDIFIERS (AH-23):
A.
Steam generators shall be provided separate of air handling unit. Dispersion tube array shall
be provided by air handler manufacturer.
B.
Dispersion tube array shall be constructed of stainless steel.
C.
Dispersion tube array shall be maintenance free. Gaskets, o-rings, etc. shall not be used.
D.
Dispersion tube array shall use an injection tube design.
E.
Air handler manufacturer shall be responsible for allowing enough absorbtion distance to
prevent wetting of interior surfaces downstream of the drain pan.
2.17
UV LIGHT PACKAGE:
A.
Factory provided and installed UV Light Package with control and safety interlock arranged
toward downstream side of chilled water cooling coil.
B.
Factory wired with electrical power connection point for field installation.
C.
Fixture housing and lamp shall be of the double-ended lamp type and be factory assembled
and tested. Each UVC device shall consist of a housing, power supply, fixture cover, lamp
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 13
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
sockets, and lamps and shall be constructed to withstand the interior environments of HVAC
equipment. Fixture assemblies are to be Model DEF Standard Output series as
manufactured by UV Resources.
D.
Housing shall be constructed of CNC cut and punched 20GA stainless steel to incorporate
the Power Supply, Housing Cover, Lamp Sockets and Lamp into one integral assembly that
maximizes serviceability. Housing shall be equipped with 6- ½” electrical knockouts (3- each
end) and pre-punched mounting holes to facilitate proper installation.
E.
Power Supply shall be of the High Power Factor, Class P, Sound Rated A, Type 1 Outdoor
type with End of Lamp Life and Inherent Thermal Protection in accordance with FCC Part
18. The power source shall automatically optimize power output for any 420ma lamp of any
length of between 22” – 36”, to be capable of lighting and maximizing radiance from each
lamp in temperatures ranging from 1° to 70° C, and airflow velocities to 1000 fpm.
F.
Lamp Sockets shall be medium bi-pin type as specified. They shall be constructed of precast polycarbonate and UL Listed and rated for 600 V, 130° C.
G.
Fixture Cover shall be constructed of CNC cut and punched 20GA stainless steel to enclose
the Power Supply and be removable for inspection or service.
H.
Lamps shall be of the standard output, hot cathode, T5 (15mm) diameter, double-ended mini
bi-pin type. They shall produce no ozone and provide an initial minimum UVC transmittance
of 83%. Filaments shall be triple-coiled, tungsten coated, clamped-filament type to enhance
plasma stability and longevity. Lamp bases shall be constructed of UV resistant materials to
eliminate deterioration. Lamps shall provide the specified output at airflow velocities to 1000
fpm and temperatures of 1-70º C.
I.
Independent Testing as submitted shall have been performed by UL to be Listed and labeled
as UL/C-UL under Category Code ABQK (Accessories, Air Duct Mounted), UL Standards:
153, 1598 and 1995 respectively. When test instruments are calibrated in accordance with
the provisions of IES Lighting Handbook, 1981 Applications Volume; output per inch of lamp
2
arc length shall not be less than 3.5 µW/cm at 1 meter in moving air of 45° F and 400 fpm.
2.18 AIR FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A.
Provide each supply fan and each return/relief fan with airflow traverse probes mounted in
the fan inlet cone capable of continuously measuring the airflow capacity (air volume) of the
respective centrifugal fan.
1.
The fan inlet airflow traverse probes shall contain multiple total and static pressure
sensors placed at concentric area centers along the exterior surface of the cylindrical
probe and internally connected to their respective averaging manifolds. Sensors shall
not protrude beyond the surface of the probe, nor be adversely affected by particle
contamination normally present in building system airflows. Velocity sensing range of
350 – 8500 fpm.
2.
The fan inlet airflow traverse probes (two per inlet) shall have dual end support swivel
brackets suitable for mounting in the fan inlet bell and symmetrical averaging signal
takeoffs and fittings, and shall be of aluminum construction with hard anodized finish.
Sensing probes to be factory mounted.
3.
The fan inlet airflow traverse probes shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, nor
shall the sound level within the system be amplified by its presence in the fan inlet
bell. The probes shall be capable of producing steady, non-pulsating signals of
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 14
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
standard total and static pressure, without need for flow corrections or factors, with an
accuracy of 3% of actual flow over a fan operating range of 10 to 1 capacity turndown.
B.
Provide a direct linear electronic output signal, 4-20 mA, calibrated to CFM for interface by
the Temperature Control Contractor to indicate fan air volume at the BAS. Unit shall be
factory calibrated and rechecked in field.
C.
Unit to include probe electronic enclosure, transmitter and 25’-0” of cable shipped loose for
field installation. Input power required, 24 volts AC.
D.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Tekair Systems VorTek Model VT-7000 or equal.
2.19 CONTROLS
A.
Provide each unit ready to receive direct digital controls (DDC) according to Sections 23 09
93. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring and a ladder type wiring diagram.
Clearly differentiate between factory and field wiring on the submittal information.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DELIVERY
A.
3.2
3.3
3.4
Ship units with 4 mil poly shrink wrap completely covering each component shipped
separately.
INSTALLATION
A.
Bolt all sections together to form a rigid, air tight assembly. Assemble the units according to
SMACNA standards and install all components in accordance with the manufacturer’s
written recommendations.
B.
Field assemble each unit on a (4) or (6) inch concrete housekeeping pad.
C.
Install filters in the housings where shown and as described in Section 23 41 33, Air
Filtration.
D.
Provide factory lifting lugs, spreaders, and cables when rigging.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate with the suppliers of variable frequency controllers and controls to provide any
information required by them to complete their installations.
B.
Provide 3-D AutoCAD drawing electronic data available to the Contractor, scaled and sized
to jobsite conditions to provide As-Built record documentation.
C.
Coordinate the installation of the humidifier panel with the supplier.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS
A.
Coordinate with the suppliers of variable frequency controllers and controls to provide any
information required by them to complete their installations.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 15
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.5
AIR FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A.
Temperature control contractor is responsible for the following:
1.
Install probe electronic enclosure and transmitter outside of air handling unit.
2.
Extend cables from the probe electronic enclosure and transmitter to the airflow
probes.
3.
Provide 24 volts AC to the probe electronic enclosure and transmitter.
4.
Output signal shall go to BMS for CFM indication.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3 – ADD #7
OSHPD SUBMITTAL
130-202 KMD
FACTORY CUSTOM AIR
HANDLING UNITS
23 73 23 - 16
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
WORK SEQUENCE
A.
1.3
1.7
Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete equipment pads with dimensional
characteristics and workspace requirements of equipment.
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A.
1.6
Provide power system conduit and wiring to mechanical equipment. Controls system conduit
and wiring for mechanical systems is included under Division 23. "Power" wiring includes
line voltage wiring from distribution apparatus to disconnecting means provided or installed
under this section, and from such disconnecting means to motors and to terminal boxes of
'package' equipment. "Controls" wiring includes wiring, regardless of voltage, which provides
start-stop control for mechanical equipment and/or which is used to monitor functions of
mechanical systems. Where line voltage wiring is extended from a local disconnecting
means to relays, thermostats, by-pass timers, starter coils or the like, or from mechanical
control panels or motor control centers to control devices, such extensions are considered
"controls" wiring.
EQUIPMENT PADS
A.
1.5
Install work in phases to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements during the
construction period. Refer to the contract drawings and coordinate electrical schedule and
operations with Owner and Architect/Engineer:
POWER AND CONTROL WIRING
A.
1.4
Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to
Division 01 – General Requirements.
Mounting heights as specified on the architectural elevations.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
B.
NETA ATS – Acceptance testing specifications for electrical power distribution equipment
and systems.
SHORT CIRCUIT, ARC FLASH ANALYSIS AND COORDINATION STUDY
A.
Provide a short circuit, arc flash analysis and coordination study in accordance with NETA
ATS and signed by a Professional Electrical Engineer registered in the State of California.
B.
Use impedances of specific equipment and materials proposed for use in this project.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.8
C.
Contractor shall obtain utility short circuit contribution and settings of utility's upstream
devices from the serving utility. Use maximum utility contribution to evaluate ratings of
devices. Use actual available utility contribution to establish settings of devices.
D.
Contractor shall obtain all existing device information and information on concurrent projects
through field coordination with hospital representative(s).
E.
Use coordination study to select characteristics and settings of devices.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under applicable section of Division 01 in General Requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings.
1.
Make shop drawings to scale, showing overall dimensions and other dimensions
required for proper installation of equipment. Identify clearly each item on drawings to
show piece of equipment it represents. Indicate corrosion resisting treatment and
finish.
2.
Provide drawings with title block identifying project name, specification section,
responsible contractor, and name of preparer.
C.
Product Data: Catalog cuts or manufacturers' data sheets. For circuit breakers, include full
size (10-1/2 by 16 inch with 9-1/2 by 11 inch log-log graph) time current characteristic
curves. For fuses, include minimum melting time/total clearing time characteristic curves. For
panelboards, distribution panels, and distribution boards, show size, number of poles, trip
rating of each circuit breaker, and circuit numbering system. For panelboards, show width of
top, bottom, and side wire-ways, method of attaching circuit identification markers,
characteristics of each type of circuit breaker, and details of circuit breaker locking device.
D.
Wiring Diagrams: Schematic, line to line type, using standard symbols and with components
arranged in logical sequence, so that system operation can be checked easily. Where
special symbols are used or where function of components is not obvious, include suitable
legend or functional guide. Number all terminals for external wiring connections on diagrams.
E.
Make submittals sufficiently complete to show compliance with specified features and
standards.
F.
Short Circuit/Arc Flash and Coordination Study: Submit with or prior to submission of product
data on affected equipment.
G.
Coordinated Installation Drawings: Show all equipment in affected space or room. Indicate
required workspace. Show plan view and elevations.
H.
Field Test Reports:
1.
When specified in individual specification sections, submit 3 copies of field test reports
for record purposes.
2.
Indicate methods, procedures, and instruments used.
3.
Identify deficiencies discovered and corrective action taken.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.9
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
2006 International Building Code with 2007 Amendments.
(2007 California Building Code, Part 2, Title 24, CCR)
B.
2005 National Electric Code and 2007 Amendments.
(2007 California Electrical Code, Part 3, Title 24, CCR)
C.
2006 Uniform Mechanical Code with 2007 Amendments.
(2007California Mechanical Code, Part 4, Title 24, CCR)
D.
2006 Uniform Plumbing Code with 2007 Amendments.
(2007 California Plumbing Code, Part 5, Title 24, CCR)
E.
2006 International Fire Code with 2007 Amendments.
(2007 California Fire Code, Part 9, Title 24, CCR)
F.
California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 53, Energy Conservation in
New Buildings.
G.
Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety.
H.
Latest editions of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards.
1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
Coordinate installation of work in available space with work specified in other Sections.
B.
Propose rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions including changes to Work
specified in other Sections. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement when
requested by Architect/Engineer. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C.
Do all excavating necessary for the proper installation of the work. Fill with clean earth and
tamp to a consistency so that no settlement will occur, and leave the ground firm at natural
grade. Remove from premises excavated earth not used for backfill. Carefully remove and
protect plants, shrubs, turf, and surfacing that occur in the area of excavation. Replace as
directed or cut and patch the work and existing walks, pavements, and buildings where
required for the proper installation of the work. Patch with the same materials, workmanship,
and finish. Accurately match all surrounding work.
1.11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Provide temporary feeders, panels, to accommodate Owner's occupancy of the building
during the construction period.
B.
Coordinate installation and time duration of temporary facilities with Owner and
Architect/Engineer.
C.
Remove temporary facilities from site when their use is no longer required.
D.
Install temporary feeders over 600 volts in conduit.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.12 PRODUCTS
A.
Where manufacturer's model or series numbers are specified or shown, these indicate
generally acceptable types required. Furnish products which comply with all requirements,
as specified or shown.
B.
When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, provide units produced
by a single manufacturer.
1.13 TESTS
A.
Furnish test equipment, facilities, and technical personnel required to perform field tests.
B.
At completion of job, check voltage at several points of utilization on the system. Energize all
loads installed.
1.14 CLEANING
A.
After other work such as sanding, painting, etc., has been completed, clean lighting fixtures,
panelboards, switchboards, and other electrical equipment to remove dust, dirt, grease, or
other marks, and leave work in clean condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Building Wire and Cable.
B.
Fixture Cord.
C.
Metal Clad Cable.
D.
Wiring Connectors and Connections.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
B.
NECA 1-2000 "Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Watertight splice kits.
C.
Field Test Reports: Torque measurements. Indicate location of connection, measured
tightness, and manufacturer's recommended values.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Description: Single conductor, insulated wire.
B.
Conductor:
1.
2.2
Copper.
C.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D.
Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN for sizes 2 and smaller, Type XHHW for
sizes #1 and larger.
FIXTURE CORD
A.
Description: Multiconductor hard service cord. SOW.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS
26 05 19 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.3
B.
Conductors: Stranded copper, 3/C #12.
C.
Insulation: Color-coded 90 degree C EPDM (black, white, green) 600 volts.
D.
Jacket: Flexible black oil and water resistant.
CORD CONNECTORS
A.
2.4
2.5
Liquidtight Flexible Cord Connectors: Corrosion resistant, non-metallic thermoplastic, strain
relief cord connector. Thomas & Betts "Black Beauty" Series 2672.
HCF-90 ARMOURED CABLE (For use on normal power circuits only)
A.
Description: Flexible, Galvanized Steel (green striped) “HCF-90”.
B.
Conductors: Solid copper.
C.
Insulation: 90 degrees C THHN, 600 volts.
D.
Ground: 16 AWG integral bond wire/armor combination plus insulated green grounding
conductor.
E.
Galvanized steel jacket.
WIRING CONNECTORS
A.
Spring Wire Connectors: Corrosion-resistant, live-action spring in insulated shell, rated 105
degrees C.
B.
Compression Connectors and Lugs: Circumferential (non-indenter) type.
C.
Watertight Splice Kits: Epoxy resin or shrinkable type suitable for the type, size and number
of conductors being spliced.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
C.
Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
D.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
E.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible
temperature rise.
F.
Use hardened and tempered steel, tin-plated or stainless steel Belleville washer with slightly
larger tin-plated mild steel flat washer for aluminum lugs.
G.
Use compression connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger.
Use compression tool designed for the size and type of connector being compressed.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS
26 05 19 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.2
3.3
H.
Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and
taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
I.
Make underground splices watertight.
J.
Support HCF 90 cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable
ties to support cables from structure or support cables installed for the purpose. Do not rest
support cables from structure or support cables installed for the purpose. Do not rest cable
on ceiling panels.
K.
Use suitable HCF 90 cable fittings and connectors.
L.
Do not use HCF 90 cable for feeder for branch circuit home runs.
M.
Do not use HCF 90 cable for emergency power branch circuits or lighting branch circuits,
except that HCF 90 cable may be used for fixture whips..
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Identify and color-code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53.
B.
Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.
C.
Make connections to equipment and devices so that phase conductors are in the same
relative position and phase sequence runs left to right, front to rear, or top to bottom.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with
manufacturer's recommended values.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS
26 05 19 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Grounding electrodes and conductors.
B.
Equipment grounding conductors.
C.
Bonding.
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
1.4
GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A.
Existing metal underground water pipe.
B.
Metal frame of the building.
C.
Concrete-encased electrode.
D.
Ground ring.
E.
Rod electrode.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
Grounding System Resistance: Maximum 25 ohms for systems over 600 volts.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Test Reports:
C.
1.6
2007 CECNFPA 99 – Health Care Facilities.
1.
Indicate overall resistance to ground of the grounding electrode system and
resistance of each electrode.
2.
Indicate test method and equipment used.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage,
examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors.
handling,
protection,
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes, locations of grounding electrode
connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductors.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
GROUNDING AND
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
26 05 26 - 1
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
ROD ELECTRODE
A.
Material: Copper-clad steel.
B.
Diameter: 3/4 inch.
C.
Length: 10 feet.
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A.
Cable to cable or bus: Copper.
B.
Cable to rod, pipe, or bar: Bronze.
EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A.
2.4
2.5
Low-emission, electric-starting type.
WIRE
A.
Grounding Electrode: Bare stranded copper.
B.
Grounding Electrode and Equipment Grounding Conductors: Under the provisions of Section
26 05 19.
GROUNDING WELL COMPONENTS
A.
Well Pipe: 8-inch diameter by 24-inch length concrete pipe with belled end.
B.
Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to the grounding
electrode system.
B.
Ground each separately-derived system neutral to separate grounding electrode shown on
drawings.
C.
Provide communications system-grounding conductor at point of service entrance and
connect as indicated on drawings.
D.
Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
GROUNDING AND
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
26 05 26 - 2
E.
Install rod electrodes at locations indicated.
F.
Provide grounding well pipe with cover at rod locations where indicated. Install well-pipe top
flush with finished grade.
G.
Use mechanical connections in above ground accessible locations; use exothermic
connectors in underground and inaccessible locations.
H.
Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. Include bonding of metallic gas and
sprinkler piping systems.
I.
Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.
J.
Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in fountain structures.
K.J.
Provide isolated grounding conductor for circuits supplying isolated ground receptacles.
L.K.
Provide grounding and bonding in patient care areas to meet requirements of 2007 CEC,
NFPA-99 and Regulatory Requirements.
M.L. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within feeder and
branch circuit raceways in addition to the conductors shown on drawings. Terminate each
end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in
accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential
method.
B.
Test grounding system in patient care areas in accordance with 2007 CECNFPA 99.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
GROUNDING AND
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
26 05 26 - 3
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Conduit and Equipment Supports.
B.
Anchors and Fasteners.
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
A.
1.4
Provide support systems adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring,
which they carry with a minimum safety factor of 4. For empty conduits, include weight of 4
type XHHW wires of maximum permissible size.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
NECA – National Electrical Contractors Association.
Provide anchorage/support calculations and details by a structural engineer registered in the
State of California.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01-General Requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.
C.
Product Data:
1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
D.
Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze hangers and hangers and supports.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Anchors and Fasteners:
1.
Concrete Structural Elements: Use pre-cast insert system, expansion anchors, and
pre-set inserts.
2.
Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps and steel ramset fasteners.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.2
3.
Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4.
Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Refer to structural engineer
of record.
5.4.
Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and pre-set inserts.
6.5.
Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws and spring steel bar retainer clips.
7.6.
Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
MATERIAL
A.
Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel.
B.
Hardware: Corrosion resistant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA 1-2000 "Good
Workmanship in Electrical Contracting."
C.
Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
D.
Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E.
Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
F.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use
hexagon lead bolts to present a neat appearance. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
G.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of 4 anchors.
H.
In wet and damp locations, use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards
one inch off wall.
I.
Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards
recessed in hollow partitions.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal Conduit.
B.
Flexible Metal Conduit.
C.
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit.
D.
Electrical Metallic Tubing.
E.
Nonmetallic Conduit.
F.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies.
G.
Pull Line.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C80.1 – Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B.
ANSI C80.3 – Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C.
ANSI/NEMA FB 1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
D.
NECA 1-2000 "Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting."
E.
NEMA RN 1 – Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
F.
NEMA TC 2 – Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
G.
NEMA TC 8 – Extra-strength PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.
H.
NEMA TC 9 – Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Dimension location of feeder conduits to permanent above ground structure or to column
lines.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01-General Requirements.
B. Product Data: Submit for the following:
1.
Flexible metal conduit.
2.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
3.
Nonmetallic conduit.
4.
Raceway fittings.
5.
Conduit bodies.
6.
Surface raceway/power poles and pedestals.
7.
Pull and junction boxes.
8.
Handholes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Underground Installations:
1.
Outside Building Foundation: Use encased burial duct and Schedule 40 PVC in
concrete encasement; use PVC-coated rigid steel conduit and Schedule 40 PVC for
direct burial.
2.
Under Slab on Grade: Use Schedule 40 PVC and PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
3.
Use PVC-coated metal conduit for bends greater than 30 degrees in conduits 1-inch
trade size and larger, except where not allowed by the serving utility company.
B.
Exposed Wet Locations: Use rigid steel and intermediate metal conduit.
C.
Above Grade:
1.
Use electrical metallic tubing.
D.C. Exposed Dry and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit below switch
height and electrical metallic tubing above switch height, except that electrical metallic tubing
may be used below switch height in designated equipment rooms and closets, utility chases,
and similar locations.
E.D. Concealed Locations:
F.E.
1.
Furred, Elevated Underfloor, Ceiling Spaces, and Stud and Masonry Walls: Use
electrical metallic tubing.
2.
Concrete Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing, and Schedule 40 PVC.
3.
Connections to Lighting Fixtures in Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible conduit, or HCF
90 Armoured Cable.
Equipment Connections:
1.
Damp and Wet Locations and For Connections to Air-Handling Equipment in Dry
Locations: Use liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.
2.2
METAL CONDUIT
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1; threaded, hot-dipped galvanized including threads, with
protective coating on inside and outside.
B.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Threaded, zinc-coated rigid steel.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies:
1.
2.
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
ANSI/NEMA FB1.
Rigid Steel Conduit and IMC: Use threaded steel or malleable iron fittings.
PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A.
Description: NEMA RN 1, rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil thick.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating and
overlapping PVC sleeves to match conduit.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A.
Description: Zinc-coated, interlocked steel construction.
B.
Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron clamp or squeeze type, or pressure cast
screw-in type. Do not use die-cast, set-screw, or sheet metal screw-in type.
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A.
Description: Galvanized interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
B.
Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron, watertight type.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Description: ANSI C80.3; zinc-coated tubing with protective enamel coating on inside.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies:
1.
2.
C.
2.7
Equipment for Dry Systems in Dry Locations: Use flexible conduit.
ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
Concrete-tight steel or malleable iron, or pressure-cast body with steel or malleable
iron nuts.
Use compression type for 2 inch trade size and smaller, use compression or set-screw type
for 2-1/2 inch trade size and larger.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A.
Schedule 40 PVC: NEMA TC 2.
B.
Encased Burial Duct: NEMA TC 8; EB Thickwall.
C.
Fittings:
1.
NEMA TC 9 for EB duct.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.8
PULL LINE
A.
2.9
1/8-inch diameter braided yellow polypropylene.
DUCT SEALING COMPOUND
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Blackburn.
Ilsco.
O-Z/Gedney.
Description: Pliable, non-hardening, paintable, service temperature to -40 degrees F.
2.10 ROOF FLASHING OF CONDUITS
A.
Refer to the Division 07 requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting."
B.
Do not combine individual homeruns into common conduit.
C.
Handle and install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Conduit Supports:
1.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
2.
Support individual conduits using coated steel or malleable iron straps, pre-formed
steel supports, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. Group
related conduits in exposed and accessible locations. Support using conduit rack.
Construct rack using steel channel.
3.
Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section
26 05 29.
4.
Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary supports
5.
Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
E.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
F.
Conduit Routing:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Route exposed conduit and conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and
perpendicular to walls.
Route conduit under slab from point-to-point.
Route conduits to clear access openings.
Make transition from non-metallic conduit under slab to metallic conduit entirely within slab.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
H.
Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
I.
Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F (40 degrees C).
J.
Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
K.
Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely using tools.
L.
Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic
conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in
fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
M.
Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes.
N.
Bends:
1.
Install no more than equivalent of 4 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit
bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams.
2.
PVC Coated Metal Conduit: Use factory made 90- and 45-degree bends. Where field
bends are required, use standard bender of next larger size, and protect section of
conduit to be bent with Kraft paper wrap.
3.
Non-metallic Conduit: Use factory made 90- and 45-degree bends. Where field bends
are required, use electric heat box or hot air blower designed specifically for bending
PVC conduit.
4.
Metal Conduit Larger than 2-inch Trade Size: Use factory elbows or fabricate bends
with hydraulic one-shot bender.
O.
Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses
seismic, control and expansion joints.
P.
Provide pull line in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. Leave 8 inches of slack
at each outlet. Identify pull line under provisions of Section 26 05 53.
Q.
Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
R.
Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26.
S.
Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 53.
T.
Provide insulated equipment ground conductor in all conduit.
U.
Make conduit penetrations of exterior concrete or masonry walls below grade and of floor
slabs on fill below grade, watertight.
V.
Seal underground conduits terminating inside building below grade after installation of
conductors; install plugs or caps in such spare (unused) conduits.
W.
Provide chromium-plated escutcheons on each exposed conduit-penetrating floor, wall, or
ceiling in finished spaces.
X.
Place conduits in concrete slabs only as directed by Architect.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
Y.
Termination of Conduit Stubs:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Underground and Flush with Finish Floor: Use coupling and threaded plug.
Above Floor: Use conduit bushing.
Signal Systems: Use conduit bushing.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods under the provisions of Section 07 84 00.
B.
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack
with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified under applicable
section of Division 07.
C.
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through roof flashing with
pitch pocket as specified in this Section.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Cable Trays and Accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, routing, and minimum clear
dimensions from building elements and from adjacent work provided under other sections.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of supports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY
A.
Manufacturer: Cablofil –
B.
Alternates; (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team to make change.
Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system meets, does not
meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to schedule for change in
vendor.)
C.
Description: High strength steel wire tray.
D.
Material: Steel.
E.
Inside Width: 12, 18, 24 inches as indicated.
F.
Inside Depth: 6 inches unless indicated plans.
G.
Provide manufacturer's standard radius fitting (unless specials are required) clamps,
hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and
grounding straps.
WARNING SIGNS
A.
Engraved Nameplates: 1/2 inch high black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate,
engraved with the following wording:
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
CABLE TRAYS
26 05 36 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT. USE
ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 1.
C.
Support trays in accordance with Section 26 05 29 and as noted in structural drawings.
Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other points to
maintain spacing between supports of 5’ foot maximum.
D.
Use expansion connectors where required and allowed.
E.
Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of Section 26 05 26.
1.
Provide continuity between tray components.
2.
Provide 2 AWG bare copper equipment grounding conductor through entire length of
tray; bond to each component.
3.
Connections to tray may be made using mechanical or exothermic connectors.
F.
Install warning signs at 50 foot centers along cable tray, located to be visible.
G.
When cable tray penetrates walls, provide cable tray penetration assembly and provide UL
approved material/methods to maintain fire rating.
H.
Each low voltage system in cable tray shall be bonded together with Velcro straps.
END OF SECTION 26 05 36
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
CABLE TRAYS
26 05 36 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Nameplates and tape labels.
B.
Wire and cable markers.
C.
Raceway and pull rope markers.
D.
Warning signs.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01-General Requirements.
B. Product Data:
1.
Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.
2.
Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter
size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures,
and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
NAMEPLATES
A.
Engraved 3-layer laminated plastic; white letters on black background for normal power
systems and on red background for emergency power systems.
B.
For equipment designation use 1/4-inch letters; for subsidiary information use 1/2-inch
letters.
WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A.
2.3
BOX AND PULL LINE MARKERS
A.
2.4
Plastic impregnated cloth or epoxy film markers, split sleeve, or tubing type.
Cloth, vinyl, or paper with vinyl overlay.
WARNING SIGNS
A.
Multiple Services: Engraved three layer laminated plastic; 1-inch high white letters on red
background.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
Pull Boxes and Conduit Containing Circuits Rated Above 600 Volts: Use self-adhesive
markers reading "HIGH VOLTAGE" in minimum 1-7/8-inch high red letters on white
background.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels.
APPLICATION
A.
Install nameplates and tape labels parallel to equipment lines.
B.
Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws or rivets.
C.
Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations.
D.
Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application.
E.
Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and
at load connection.
F.
Color-code conductors at accessible locations.
G.
Use wire with insulation of required color. For sizes of wire, which may not be available in
specified colors use self-adhesive wrap-around markers of solid colors to color-code
conductors.
H.
Make color coding for signal system such as fire alarm, intercommunication, etc., in
accordance with programs or schedules prepared by the equipment manufacturer.
I.
Use same color throughout a given system for any signal or control wires performing the
same function.
J.
Use colored tape to identify conduit by system. Apply tape to each length of conduit installed
above grade so that at least 1 marker is located between any 2 couplings.
K.
Mark outside of coverplates of junction boxes installed in exposed or accessible ceilings to
identify circuits present with black permanent marker. For signal systems, identify system by
name.
L.
Mark inside of wiring device coverplates to identify circuits present with black permanent
marker. For signal systems, identify system by name.
M.
Affix label at each end of pull line identifying termination point.
N.
Provide warning signs to meet Regulatory Requirements and as shown.
O.
Mark medium voltage pull and junction boxes and exposed conduits. Mark conduit at
intervals not exceeding 30 feet.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.3
SCHEDULE
A.
B.
C.
Conductors:
1.
Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits. If more
than one neutral conductor is present, mark each with related circuit numbers.
2.
Color-code all secondary branch circuit and feeder conductors. For 3-wire, 3-phase,
ungrounded delta system, use 1 black, 1 red, 1 blue; 4-wire, 3-phase, grounded wye
system, use 1 black, 1 red, 1 blue, 1 white (neutral) for 120/208 volt and 120/240 volt
systems and use 1 brown, 1 orange, 1 yellow and 1 gray (neutral) for 277/480 volt
systems.
3.
Use green color for any conductor intended solely for equipment grounding, unless it
is bare.
Nameplates:
1.
Panelboards, Distribution Panels, Distribution Boards and Substations: Identify
equipment designation, voltage rating, and source.
2.
Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters In Distribution Panel,
Distribution Boards, and Motor Control Centers: Identify circuit, source of supply, and
load served including location.
3.
Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: Identify load
served and source of supply.
4.
Transformers: Identify equipment designation, primary and secondary voltages,
primary source, and secondary load and location.
5.
Special Purpose Power Receptacles: Identify voltage, phase and source of supply.
6.
Light Switches Not in Sight of Fixtures They Control: Identify location of light fixtures
controlled.
7.
Pushbutton Stations: Identify function.
8.
Terminal Cabinets: Identify system and designation.
9.
Wiring Devices: Eengraving one device plates with black enamel filled lettering is
acceptable in lieu of separate nameplates. Identify panelboard and circuit number
serving device.
Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Primary Distribution System: Orange.
480 Volt, 3-Phase System: Yellow.
208 Volt, Single and 3-Phase System: Dark Blue.
Fire Alarm System: Red.
Motor and Other Control Systems: Brown.
Telephone System: Black.
Data System: White
Nurse Call System: Violet
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
9.
10.
Intercom System: Light Blue
Grounding: Green
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 05 93
ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
The contractor shall engage the services of a recognized independent testing firm or
independent electrical consulting firm to be approved by Owner/Engineer to perform shortcircuit and coordination studies as herein specified.
B.A.
The contractor shall engage the services of a recognized independent testing firm to be
approved by Owner/Engineer for the purpose of performing inspections and tests as herein
specified.
C.B. The testing firm shall provide all material, equipment, labor, and technical supervision to
perform such inspections and tests.
D.C. It is the purpose of these specification guidelines to assure that all tested electrical
equipment, both contractor and owner supplied, is operational and within industry and
manufacturers tolerances and is installed in accordance with design specifications.
E.D. The inspections and tests shall determine suitability for energization.
F.E.
1.2
Substation, ATS Switches, Distribution Boards, Distribution Panelboards, Transformers,
UPS Systems and batteries, Panelboards, Circuit Breakers, Grounding system, Ground
Fault Protection System, Cabling including I.T. and Fiber Optic.
APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS, AND REFERENCES
A.
Applicable publication: The publication listed in 1.2.A.1 forms a part of these specification
guidelines to the extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by the basic
designation only.
1.
B.
1.3
InterNational Electrical Testing Association Acceptance Testing Specifications For
Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems, 2009.
All inspections and tests shall be performed in accordance with applicable codes and
standards including: NEC, ANSI, IEEE, NFPA, NEMA, and OSHA.
QUALIFICATIONS OF INDEPENDENT TESTING ORGANIZATION
A.
The independent testing organization shall have been engaged in full practice in the final
inspection, testing, calibration, and adjusting of electrical distribution systems, for a minimum
of 5 years.
B.
The independent testing organization shall be financially independent of the supplier,
producer, or installer of the equipment.
C.
The independent testing organization shall have a calibration program with accuracy
traceable every six months in an unbroken chain, to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST).
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
130-202 KMD
26 05 93 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.4
1.5
D.
The independent testing organization shall have a designated safety representative on the
project. The safety standards followed shall include OSHA and NFPA 70E.
E.
Inspection, testing, and calibration shall be performed by an engineering technician, certified
by a national organization, with a minimum of 5 years experience inspecting, testing, and
calibrating electrical equipment, systems and devices. Information on the certified
engineering technician shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to the start of
work.
F.
The qualifications of the independent testing organization shall be submitted to the engineer
for approval prior to the start of testing. Full membership in the InterNational Electrical
Testing Association constitutes proof of meeting all of the above requirements.
G.
The contractor shall supply to the independent testing organization complete sets of
approved drawings, coordination study, settings of all adjustable devices, and other
information necessary for an accurate inspection and evaluation of the system prior to
performance of any tests.
H.
After the evaluation of the system and equipment has been made, the independent testing
organization shall submit for approval an acceptance test procedure for each item of
electrical distribution equipment to be tested on this project. No testing shall be performed
until the test procedures have been approved.
DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY
A.
The contractor or independent testing organization shall perform routine insulation
resistance, continuity, and rotation tests for all distribution and utilization equipment prior to
and in addition to tests performed by the independent testing organization specified herein.
B.
The contractor shall supply a suitable and stable power source of electrical power to each
test site. The independent testing organization shall specify the specific power requirements.
C.
The independent testing organization shall notify the owner’s representative prior to
commencement of any testing or as specified in other sections.
D.
Any system, material, or workmanship, which is found defective on the basis of acceptance
tests, shall be reported.
E.
The independent testing organization shall maintain a written record of all tests and shall
assemble and certify a final test report.
F.
The independent testing organization shall have a designated safety representative on the
project to supervise operations with respect to safety for work completed under this section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit 3 bound copies of the certified test reports to the owner/contractor at the completion
of the project. The final report shall be stamped and signed by an electrical engineer
registered in the State of California and shall include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
Summary of the project.
Description of equipment tested.
Visual inspection report.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
130-202 KMD
26 05 93 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.6
Description of tests.
Test results.
Manufacturers minimum acceptable test values at time of manufacture.
Conclusions and recommendations.
Appendix including appropriate test forms.
Identification of test equipment used.
POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
A.
Short Circuit, Coordination and Arc-Flash Studies
1.
Perform all short circuit and coordination studies as listed in section 6.1 of NETA ATS2009.
2.
The power system study shall be in a separate binder and contain all the data and
information specified therein.
1.71.6 INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES
A.
Switchgear And Switchboard Assemblies:
1.
2.
B.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.1 of NETA ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in Section 1.1.F.
Transformers:
1.
Dry Type Below 600 Volt 75 kVA And Larger:
a.
b.
2.
Dry Type Above 600 Volt 75 kVA And Larger:
a.
b.
C.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.2.1.2. of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Cables:
1.
Low Voltage Feeders #2 And Larger:
a.
b.
2.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.3.1 of NETA
ATS-2009
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Medium Voltage Cables 69 kV Maximum:
a.
b.
D.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.2.1.1 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.3.2 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Switches:
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
130-202 KMD
26 05 93 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.
Air, Low Voltage, 100 amp and larger
a.
b.
2.
Air, Medium Voltage:
a.
b.
3.
b.
Low Voltage, Insulated Case/Molded Case 100 amp Trip and Larger:
a.
b.
2.
b.
3.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.6.1.2 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Medium Voltage, Air:
a.
b.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.6.2.1 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Protective Relays:
1.
2.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.9 of NETA ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Instrument Transformers:
1.
2.
H.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.6.1.1 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Low Voltage, Power:
a.
G.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.5.1.3 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Circuit Breakers:
1.
F.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.5.1.2 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Air, High And Medium Voltage, Open:
a.
E.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.5.1.1 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.10 of NETA ATS2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Metering:
1.
2.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.11 of NETA ATS2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
130-202 KMD
26 05 93 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
I.
J.
K.
Grounding Systems:
1.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.13 of NETA ATS2009.
2.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Ground Fault Protection Systems:
1.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.14 of NETA ATS2009.
2.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Motor Control:
1.
Motor Control, Motor Starters, Low Voltage:
a.
b.
2.
Motor Control, Motor Starters, Medium Voltage:
a.
b.
3.
b.
b.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.16.2.2 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Direct-Current Systems:
1.
Batteries:
a.
b.
M.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.16.2.1 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Motor Control, Motor Control Centers, Medium Voltage:
a.
L.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.16.1.2 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Motor Control, Motor Control Centers, Low Voltage:
a.
4.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.16.1.1 of NETA
ATS-1995.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.18.1 of NETA
ATS-2009
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Surge Arresters:
1.
Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices:
a.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.19.1 of NETA
ATS-2009.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
130-202 KMD
26 05 93 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
b.
2.
Medium And High Voltage, Surge Protection Devices:
a.
b.
N.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.19.2 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Emergency Systems:
1.
2.
Emergency Systems, Engine Generator:
a.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.22.1 of NETA
ATS-2009.
b.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Emergency Systems, Uninterruptible Power Systems:
a.
b.
3.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.22.2 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Emergency Systems, Automatic Transfer Systems:
a.
b.
O.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.22.3 of NETA
ATS-2009.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
Fiber Optic Cable:
1.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 7.25 of NETA ATS2009.
2.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
1.81.7 SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS
A.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 8. of NETA ATS-2009.
B.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
1.91.8 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY
A.
Perform all tests, including any optional tests, listed in section 9 of NETA ATS-2009.
B.
Equipment to be tested is listed in section 1.1.F.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
130-202 KMD
26 05 93 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 26 05 93
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
130-202 KMD
26 05 93 - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 09 23A
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
The work covered in this section is subject to all of the requirements in the General
Conditions of the Specifications. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section
with all of the trades covered in other sections of the specification to provide a complete
and operable system. All Labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities,
transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in
connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Furnish and install a complete system for the control of lighting and other equipment as
indicated on the plans, detailed in the manufacturer submittal and as further defined
herein. Contractor is solely responsible to verify quantity, installation locations and wiring
requirements for this project. Specific manufacturers catalog numbers, when listed in this
section are for reference only. It is the responsibility of the contractor to verify with lighting
control manufacturer all catalog information and specific product acceptability.
B.
The system shall include but not be limited by the following list: Pre-wired, microprocessor
controlled relay panels with electrically held, electronically latched relays panels controlled
via a complete list of communication based accessories including digital switches, digital
photocells, Digital Time Clock (DTC),and other devices. The type of lighting control
equipment and wiring specified in this section is covered by the description:
Microprocessor Controlled Digital Relay Lighting Control system with RS 485 Bus
communications. Requirements are indicated elsewhere in these specifications for work
including, but not limited to, raceways and electrical boxes and fittings required for
installation of control equipment and wiring. They are not the work of this section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 16010 – Shop Drawing Requirements. Submit under provisions of applicable
section of Division 01-General Requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of lighting control system and accessories
including, but not necessarily limited to, relay panels, switches, DTC, photocells and other
interfaces. Shop drawings shall indicate exact location of each device or a RFI to confirm
location. Plans are diagrammatical. EC to verify all lighting control material requirements
from approved shop drawings. “Cut Sheet” submittal not acceptable.
C.
Product Data: Submit for approval 6 copies of manufacturer's data on the specific lighting
control system and components. Submittal shall be in both electronic and hard copy
formats. To prevent departures from approved system operation, electronic file submitted
shall be able to be directly downloaded to the specified system at manufacturer facility.
Submit a complete bill of materials with part numbers, description and voltage
specifications.
D.
One Line Diagram: Submit a one-line diagram of the system configuration indicating the
type, size and number of conductors between each component if it differs from that
illustrated in the riser diagram in these specifications. Submittals that show typical riser
diagrams are not acceptable.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23A - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.4
1.5
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Products shall be manufactured by Lighting Control & Design, Los Angeles, CA,
800.345.4448 or approved equal. Such firms shall be regularly engaged in manufacture
of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
Any product other than those listed in this specification must be pre-approved a minimum
of two weeks before bid time. No exceptions.
B.
Control wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for Class 2 remote
control systems, Article 725 and manufacturer specification.
C.
A licensed electrician shall functionally test each system component after installation,
verify proper operation and confirm that all relay panel and switch wiring conform to the
wiring documentation. The Electrical Contractor (EC) is required to phone LC&D a
minimum of 7 days before turnover for system checkout. At time of LC&D contact, all
components to include phone line to modem must be installed, powered and operational.
D.
Comply with NEC and all local and state codes as applicable to electrical wiring work.
E.
Lighting control panels shall be UL 916 Listed. LCPs controlling emergency circuits shall
be ETL listed to UL 924. Emergency source circuits controlled in normal operation by a
relay panel shall fully comply with NEC 700-9(b). Electrical contractor is responsible for
verifying compliance.
F.
The lighting control system shall be listed, approved and comply as required with all
national, state and local energy codes to include but not limited to California Title 24 and
ASHRAE 90.1-2001.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Provide 10% spare relays per LCP, up to the maximum capacity of the LCP.
C.
Provide CD version of manufacturers operating software to include graphical interface
software.
D.
Provide 2 extra sets of as-built and operating manuals.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
1.7
Submit under applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The lighting control system is a networked system that communicates via RS485. The
system must be able to communicate with fully digital centralized relay panels, micro relay
panels, digital switches, photocells, various interfaces and shall include all operational
software. The intent of the specification is to integrate all lighting control into one system,
except for areas controlled by a single motion sensor such as rooms with a single
luminaire and emergency fixtures designed to operate 24/7. Distributed lighting control
shall be provided using a networked micro relay panel. A centralized relay panel shall
control corridors and site lighting. Lighting control system shall include all hardware and
software. Software to be resident within the lighting control system. System shall provide
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23A - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
local access to all programming functions at the master LCP and remote access to all
programming functions via dial up modem and through any standard computer
workstation running an industry standard internet browser. Lighting control system shall
have server built into the master LCP that “serves” HTML pages to any authorize
workstation. Desktop computers are not part of this section and will be provided by
others. Non-networked, non-digital, non-server capable systems not acceptable.
B.
System software shall provide real time status of each relay, each zone and each group.
C.
Lighting control system shall be able to be monitored by and take commands from a
remote PC. At any time, should the remote PC go off-line all system programming
uploaded to the lighting control system shall continue to operate as intended. Systems
requiring an on line PC or server for normal operation are not acceptable
D.
All devices shall be pre-addressed at the factory. Field addressing is not acceptable.
E.
All programs, schedules, time of day, etc, shall be held in non-volatile memory for a
minimum of 10 years at power failure. At restoration of power, lighting control system shall
implement programs required by current time and date.
F.
System shall be capable of flashing lights Off/On any relay or any zone prior to the lights
being turned Off. The warning interval time between the flash and the final lights off
signal shall be definable for each zone. Occupant shall be able to override any scheduled
Off sweep using local wall switches within the occupied space. Occupant override time
shall be locally and remotely programmable and not exceed 2-hours.
G.
The system shall be capable of implementing On commands, Off commands, Raise
(dimming) commands, Lower (dimming) commands for any relay, group or zone by
means of digital wall switches, photocell, web based software or other devices connected
to programmable inputs in a lighting control panel.
H.
The lighting control system shall provide the ability to control each relay and each relay
group per this specifications requirement. All programming and scheduling shall be able
to be done locally at the master LCP and remotely via dial up modem and via the Internet.
Remote connection to the lighting control system shall provide real time control and real
time feedback.
I.
System may consist of centralized relay panels, micro relay panels, digital switches,
photocells and various digital interfaces. Verify exact components specified. Micro relay
panels, centralized relay panels and digital switches shall communicate as one network
via RS485. Micro relay panels, mounted in each local area, per plans shall control all
lighting fixtures in that space, provide power to occupancy sensors and take input from
daylight sensor and occupancy sensors. Micro relay panels shall be capable of taking
inputs from standard, line voltage type switches and outputting up to 4 independent 0v to
10v dimming signals. All micro relay panels and all devices connected to micro relay
panels (switches, photocells and occupancy sensors, etc) shall be wired per lighting
control manufacturers instructions.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS
A.
Relay Panels:
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23A - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
C.
1.
NEMA rated enclosure with screw cover or hinged door. Rain tight or oil tight and
other NEMA rated versions available.
2.
16 AWG steel barrier shall separate the high voltage and low voltage
compartments of the panel and separate 120v and 277v.
3.
LCP input power shall be capable of accepting 120v or 277v without rewiring
4.
Control electronics in the low voltage section shall be capable of driving 2 to 48
relays, control any individual or group of relays, provide individual relay overrides,
provide a master override for each panel, store all programming in non-volatile
memory, after power is restored return system to current state, provide
programmable blink warn timers for each relay and every zone, and be able to
control Normally Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC) relays.
5.
Lighting control system shall be digital and consist of a Master LCP, Slave LCPs,
Micro LCPs with up to 4 individual relays, digital switches, digital interface cards.
All system components shall connect and be controlled via a single Category 5, 4
twisted pair cable with RJ45 connectors, providing real time two-way
communication with each system component. Analog systems are not
acceptable.
6.
The lighting control system is a networked system that communicates via RS485
and includes centralized relay panels, micro relay panels, digital switches,
photocells, various interfaces and operational software. The intent of the
specification is to integrate all lighting control into one system. Lighting control
system shall include all hardware and software. Software to be resident within
the lighting control system. System shall provide local access to all programming
functions at the DTC and remote access to all programming functions via dial up
modem. Non-networked, non-digital system not acceptable.
Micro Relay Panels
1.
Micro relay panels shall have up to 4 or 8 -30amp lighting relays and shall control all
lighting in the designated area indicated on the plans and be networked to
centralized relay panels, micro relay panels, smart breaker panels, digital
switches, photocells, various interfaces. Each micro relay panel shall provide
minimum 150ma at 24vdc for powering occupancy sensors. Micro relay panels that
require a separate occupancy sensor power pack are not acceptable.
2.
Micro relay panel shall provide 4-programmable photocell inputs, 4-programmable
occupancy sensor inputs and matrixed contact closure inputs. This requirement is
to insure integration of entire lighting system into one networked, lighting control
system.
3.
Micro relay panels shall be capable of outputting 4 or 8 independent 0v to 10v
dimming signals, one independent dimming signal at each or 4 relays. In order to
maximize daylight harvesting and minimize disruption to occupants, each dimming
output shall provide adjustment for baseline, start point, mid point, end point, trim,
fade up rate, fade down rate, time delay and enable/disable masking. All photocell
setting must be remotely accessible. Systems providing On, Off with Time Delay
only, and system that do not provide remote access are not acceptable.
Standard Output relays
1.
Electrically held, electronically latched SPST relay.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23A - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
D.
E.
2.
Relays shall be individually replaceable. Relay terminal blocks shall be capable of
accepting two (2) #10AWG wires on both the line and the load side. Systems that
do not allow for individual relay replacement or additions are not acceptable.
3.
Rated at 30 Amp, 277VAC Ballast, Tungsten, HID, 1 HP at 120 Vac, 2 HP at 240
Vac.
4.
Relays to be rated for 250,000 operations minimum at a full 30a lighting load, use
Latching relay and be Normally Closed (NCZC). . No exceptions.
5.
Optional relay types available shall include: Normally Open (NO) relay rated for
100,000 operations, a 600v 2-pole NO and NC and a Single Pole, Double Throw
(SPDT) relay.
Low Voltage Switches
1.
All switches shall be digital and communicate via RS 485. Contact closure style
switches, except as specified for connection to the micro relay panel matrixed
contact closure inputs, shall not be acceptable. The programming for a digital
switch will reside in the switch itself, via double EPROM memory. Any digital
switch button function shall be able to be changed locally (at the DTC or a PC) or
remotely, via modem, Internet or Ethernet.
2.
Digital low voltage switch shall be a device that sits on the lighting control system
bus. Digital switch shall connect to the system bus using the same cable and
connection method required for relay panels. System shall provide capability to
locally and remotely program each individual switch button, monitor and change
function of each button locally and remotely. Each button shall be capable of being
programmed for On only, Off only, On/Off (toggle), Raise (Dim up) and Lower (Dim
down). Switches requiring low voltage control wires to be moved from one input
terminal to another to accomplish these functions are not acceptable.
DTC - Digital Electronic Time Clock
1.
A Digital Time Clock (DTC) shall control and program the entire lighting control
system and supply all time functions and accept interface inputs.
2.
DTC shall be capable of up to 32 schedules. Each schedule shall consist of one
set of On and Off times per day for each day of the week and for each of two
holiday lists. The schedules shall apply to any individual relay or group of relays.
3.
The DTC shall be capable of controlling up to 126 digital devices on a single bus
and capable of interfacing digitally with other individual busses using
manufacturer supplied interface cards.
4.
The DTC shall accept control locally using built in button prompts and use of a 8
line 21-letter display or from a computer or modem via an on-board RS 232 port.
All commands shall be in plain English. Help pages shall display on the DTC
screen.
5.
The DTC shall be run from non-volatile memory so that all system programming
and real time clock functions are maintained for a minimum of 15 years with loss
of power.
6.
Pre-installed Unity™ lighting control software shall provide via local or remote PC
a visual representation of each device on the bus, show real time status and the
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23A - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
ability to change the status of any individual device, relay or zone. System shall
be capable of running optional Unity GX lighting control software, which shall
provide for directly importing vector based graphics. No exceptions.
7.
Pre-Installed modem that allows for remote programming from any location using
a PC. Modem to include all necessary software for local or remote control.
8.
DTC shall provide system wide timed overrides. Any relay, group or zone that is
overridden On, before or after hours, shall automatically be swept Off by the DTC
a maximum of 2 hours later.
F.
PHOTOCELL: Photocells to be mounted in location indicated on the plans. Photocells
used for exterior lights shall provide multiple trips point from 1 roof mounted unit. All trips
points shall be able to be changed remotely via Internet or dial up modem. Photocells
requiring manual trip point adjustment are not acceptable. Photocell used for interior
lighting control shall have multiple settings such as start-point, mid-point, off-point, fadeup, fade-down, etc. All settings shall be remotely accessible and adjustable. Systems
providing local adjustment only are not acceptable. Photocells to be certified to comply
with the current energy code covering this project at time of submittal of plans for building
permit.
G.
Interfaces: For future expansion capability, system to have available all of the following
interfaces. Verify and install only those interfaces indicated on the plans.
1.
A dry contact input interface card that provides 14 programmable dry contact
closure inputs. Use shielded cable to connect input devices to interface card.
2.
Interface card providing digital communication from one system bus to another
system bus, allowing up to 12,000 devices to communicate.
3.
An interface card that allows the DTC to control up to 32 digital XCI brand
thermostats. Programming of thermostats to be able to done locally (at the DTC
or a PC) or remotely, via modem, Internet or Ethernet.
4.
A voice prompted telephone override interface module. Interface module shall
accept up to 3 phone lines and allow up to 3 simultaneous phone calls. Voice
prompted menu and up to 999 unique pass codes shall be standard with each
interface module.
5.
Software pre-installed to run Unity GX Graphical Interface Software. Unity GX
software shall provide via local or remote PC a visual representation of a specific
area or the total area of the project. GX full graphic pages shall be designed to
the owner’s specifications. Owner to provide to manufacturer all necessary files
and criteria. Provide ____ GX pages.
6.
Direct digital interface to SmartBreaker panelboards. Relay panel and
SmartBreaker panelboard circuits shall appear on the system software as similar,
yet distinct, items and maintain all functions and features of the system software.
7.
Direct digital interface to DMX 512 based systems. DMX interface shall provide
14 global commands, each of which can be modified locally or remotely using
lighting controls manufacturer supplied software. DMX interface shall be integral
to the system bus and shall connect and be controlled via a single Category 5, 4
twisted pair cable, providing real time response from the lighting control system to
DMX commands.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23A - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
8.
Direct digital interface to building automation systems using DDC protocols such
as BACnet and Metasys (N2) that accept on/off commands, time schedules and
report status of all relays in all panels in real time. Interface cards shall “self
populate” each individual relay and each group to the BAS.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Mount relay control cabinets adjacent to respective lighting panelboard. Cabinet shall be
surface or flush mount, per plans. Wiring between relay control cabinet and panelboards
to be per local codes and acceptable industry standards. Under no circumstances will
any extra be authorized for payment to the EC or GC due to the EC’s lack of knowledge
or understanding of any and all prevailing codes or specified manufacturer’s installation
requirements. Neatly lace and rack wiring in cabinets. During construction process,
protect all interior components of each relay panel and each digital switch from dust and
debris. Any damage done to electronic components due to non-protection shall be the
sole responsibility of the installing contractor.
B.
Switches: Provide outlet boxes, single or multi-gang, as shown on the plans for the low
voltage digital switches. Mount switches as per plans. Supply faceplates per plans and
specifications. EC is specifically responsible to supply and install the required low voltage
cable, Category 5, 4 twisted pair, with RJ45 connectors and snagless boots (commonly
referred to as Cat 5 patch cable) between all switches and panels. Field-test all Cat 5
patch cable with a recognized cable tester. All low voltage wire to be run in conduit, per
local codes.
C.
Wiring
1.
Do not mix low voltage and high voltage conductors in the same conduit. No
exceptions.
2.
Ensure low voltage conduits or control wires do not run parallel to current carrying
conduits.
3.
Place manufacturer supplied “terminators” at each end of the system bus per
manufacturers instructions.
4.
Neatly lace and rack wiring in cabinets.
5.
Plug in Category 5 patch cable that has been field-tested with a recognized cable
tester, at the indicated RJ45 connector provided at each lighting control device,
per manufacturers instructions.
6.
Use Category 5 patch cable for all system low voltage connections. Additional
conductors may be required to compensate for voltage drop with specific system
designs. Contact LC&D or refer to the GR2400 manual for further information.
Use shielded cable for dry contact inputs to lighting control system.
7.
Do not exceed 4000ft-wire length for the system bus.
8.
All items on the bus shall be connected in sequence (daisy chained). Star and
spur topologies are not acceptable.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23A - 7
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
9.
3.2
The specified lighting control system shall be installed by the electrical contractor
who shall make all necessary wiring connections to external devices and
equipment, to include photocell. EC to wire per manufacturer instructions.
INSTALLATION AND SET-UP
A.
Verify that conduit for line voltage wires enters panel in line voltage areas and conduit for
low-voltage control wires enters panel on low-voltage areas. Refer to manufacturer's
plans and approved shop drawings for location of line and low-voltage areas. It is the
responsibility of the contractor to verify with lighting control manufacturer all catalog
information and specific product acceptability.
B.
For approved line voltage type micro relay panel switches connected to matrixed inputs of
the micro relay panel, furnish #18 AWG solid conductors. For all other digital switches
provide wiring required by system manufacturer.
C.
For classroom digital switches provide wiring required by system manufacturer
D.
Contractor to test all low voltage cable for integrity and proper operation prior to turn over.
Verify with system manufacturer all wiring and testing requirements.
E.
Before Substantial Completion, arrange and provide a one-day Owner instruction period
to designated Owner personnel. Set-up, commissioning of the lighting control system, and
Owner instruction includes:
1.
Confirmation of entire system operation and communication to each device.
2.
Confirmation of operation of individual relays, switches, occupancy sensors and
daylight sensors
3.
Confirmation of system Programming, photocell settings, override settings, etc.
4.
Provide training to cover installation, maintenance, troubleshooting, programming,
and repair and operation of the lighting control system.
F.
Panels shall be located so that they are readily accessible and not exposed to physical
damage.
G.
Panel locations shall be furnished with sufficient working space around panels to comply
with the National Electric Electrical Code.
H.
Panels shall be securely fastened to the mounting surface by at least 4 points.
I.
Unused openings in the cabinet shall be effectively closed.
J.
Cabinets shall be grounded as specified in the National Electrical Code.
K.
Lugs shall be suitable and listed for installation with the conductor being connected.
L.
Conductor lengths shall be maintained to a minimum within the wiring gutter space.
Conductors shall be long enough to reach the terminal location in a manner that avoids
strain on the connecting lugs.
M.
Maintain the required bending radius of conductors inside cabinets.
N.
Clean cabinets of foreign material such as cement, plaster and paint.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23A - 8
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
O.
Distribute and arrange conductors neatly in the wiring gutters.
P.
Follow the manufacturer's torque values to tighten lugs.
Q.
Before energizing the panelboard, the following steps shall be taken:
3.4
Retighten connections to the manufacturer's torque specifications. Verify that
required connections have been furnished.
2.
Remove shipping blocks from component devices and the panel interior.
3.
Remove debris from panelboard interior.
R.
Follow manufacturers’ instructions for installation and all low voltage wiring.
S.
Service and Operation Manuals:
T.
3.3
1.
1.
Submit operation and service manuals. Complete manuals shall be bound in
flexible binders and data shall be typewritten or drafted.
2.
Manuals shall include instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of
system and shall include complete wiring circuit diagrams of system, wiring
destination schedules for circuits and replacement part numbers. Manuals shall
include as-built cable Project site plot plans and floor plans indicating cables, both
underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on
cables. Programming forms of systems shall be submitted with complete
information.
Comply with energy code lighting control system “Acceptance Requirements”.
Acceptance tests are used to verify that lighting controls were installed and calibrated
correctly. These tests may require that a responsible party certify that controls are
installed and calibrated properly. This is the installing contractors responsibility. Verify
requirements with building authority.
DOCUMENTATION
A.
Each relay shall have an identification label indicating the originating branch circuit
number and panelboard name as indicated on the drawings. Each line side branch circuit
conductor shall have an identification tag indicating the branch circuit number.
B.
Provide a point-to-point wiring diagram for the entire lighting control system. Diagram
must indicate exact mounting location of each system device. This accurate “as built”
shall indicate the loads controlled by each relay and the identification number for that
relay, placement of switches and location of photocell. Original to be given to owner,
copies placed inside the door of each LCP.
SERVICE AND SUPPORT
A.
Start Up: EC shall contact LC&D at least 7 days before turnover of project. LC&D will
remotely dial into the lighting control system, run diagnostics and confirm system
programming. EC shall be available at the time of dial in to perform any corrections
required by LC&D. EC is responsible for coordinating with GC and the owner the
installation of a dedicated telephone line or a shared phone line with A/B switch. Phone
jack to be mounted within 12” of Master LCP. Label jack with phone number. EC to
connect phone line from jack to Master LCP.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23A - 9
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.5
B.
Telephone factory support shall be available at no additional cost to the EC or Owner both
during and after the warranty period. Factory to pre-program the lighting control system
per plans and approved submittal, to the extent data is available. The specified
manufacturer, at no added cost, shall provide additional remote programming via modem
as required by the EC or Owner for the operation life of the system. Upon request
manufacturer to provide remote dial up software at no added cost to system owner. No
exceptions.
C.
Provide a factory technician for on-site training of the owners’ representatives and
maintenance personnel. Coordinate timing with General Contractor. Provide ___ 9 days
hours of factory on-site training, in minimum three, 3 hour sessions.
CLEANING
A.
Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.
B.
Clean photocell lens as recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Clean all switch faceplates.
END OF SECTION
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23A - 10
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 11 16
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
Secondary unit substation.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C37.20.1 – Standard for Metal Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
Switchgear.
B.
ANSI C37.20.3 – Standard for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear.
C.
ANSI C39.1 – Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments.
D.
ANSI C57.13 – Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
E.
ANSI C57.12.00 – General Requirements for Liquid Immersed Distribution, Power and
Regulating Transformers.
F.
ANSI C57.12.01 – General Requirements for Dry Type Distribution and Power Transformers.
G.
NEMA AB1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
H.
NEMA PB 2 – Dead Front Distribution Switchboards.
I.
NEMA ATS – Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
B.
Submit shop drawings indicating front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions
shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number
of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; distribution board instrument details; instructions
for handling and installation of distribution board; and electrical characteristics including
voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all
equipment and components.
C.
Submit product data under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
D.
Submit product data for each component and accessory specified.
E.
Submit factory test reports.
1.
2.
Load Interrupter Switch: ANSI C37.20.3; design and production tests.
Transformer: ANSI C57.12.01; design and routine tests.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
SECONDARY UNIT
SUBSTATION
26 11 16 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.4
1.5
F.
Submit field test reports. Indicate final settings of overcurrent protective devices,
manufacturers recommended torque levels and "as left" values.
G.
Submit coordinated installation drawings if overall equipment dimensions exceed those
specified or shown in any respect.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit operation data under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
B.
Include overcurrent protective device adjusting and testing instructions.
C.
Submit maintenance data under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
D.
Include bus tightening intervals and procedures, transformer insulation liquid sampling and
replacement procedures, and overcurrent protective device maintenance procedures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
1.7
Furnish products which are the standard, cataloged products of a manufacturer continuously
engaged in producing equipment constructed of the same model components proposed for
use in this project.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store and protect products under provisions of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Protect products from moisture and debris by storing in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory
wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Submit 2 of each size and type fuse under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 –
General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
ITE-Siemens
B.
General Electric-Alternate: (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team
to make change. Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system
meets, does not meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to
schedule for change in vendor.)
C.
Square D-Alternate: (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team to
make change. Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system
meets, does not meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to
schedule for change in vendor.)
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
SECONDARY UNIT
SUBSTATION
26 11 16 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.2
D.
Cutler Hammer-Alternate: (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team
to make change. Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system
meets, does not meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to
schedule for change in vendor.)
E.
Substitutions: Division 01 – General Requirements.
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATION
A.
2.3
2.4
2.5
Description: Articulated secondary unit substation.
INCOMING SECTION EQUIPMENT
A.
Description: Dual circuit looped feed. ANSI C37.20.3; As indicated on the drawings.
B.
Configuration: 2 incoming lines, looped.
C.
System Voltage: 12 kV, 3-phase, 60 hertz.
D.
Maximum Design Voltage: 15 kV.
E.
Continuous Rating: 1200 amperes.
F.
Momentary Current Rating: 61,000 amperes or as defined in short circuit report prepared by
contractor.
G.
Provide spring-charged stored energy operator.
TRANSFORMER SECTION EQUIPMENT
A.
Description: ANSI C57.12.01 Ventilated dry type distribution transformer.
B.
Capacity: 3,000 kVA, fan cooled.
C.
Voltage: 12 kV primary; 277/480 volts secondary.
D.
Basic Impulse Level: 60 kV BIL.
E.
Connections: Delta-Wye.
F.
Temperature Rise: 220-degree C insulation class with 150-degree C rise over 40 degree C
ambient.
OUTGOING SECTION EQUIPMENT
A.
Description: Power switchgear manufactured to ANSI C37.20.1NEMA PB2
B.
Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the rear, suitable for the conductor materials
used.
C.
Main Section Devices: Individually mounted.
D.
Distribution Section Devices: Individually mounted.
E.
Auxiliary Section Devices: Individually mounted.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
SECONDARY UNIT
SUBSTATION
26 11 16 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
F.
Bus Material: Copper, sized in accordance with NEMA PB 2.
G.
Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front and rear for maintenance.
H.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; Inverse time automatic tripping.
I.
2.6
2.7
1.
Thermal Magnetic Trip Circuit Breaker: Provide circuit breakers with trip ratings less
than 150 amperes with fixed, ambient-compensated thermal-magnetic trip unit.
2.
Solid-State Circuit Breaker: Provide circuit breaker with trip ratings 150 amperes and
greater with electronic sensing, timing and tripping circuits for adjustable current
settings; ground fault trip and delay with integral ground fault sensing; instantaneous
trip; adjustable short time trip and delay; adjustable long time trip and delay; and zone
selective interlocking.
Power Circuit Breakers: Factory-assembled electrically- operated low-voltage air circuit
breakers, draw-out construction. Include electronic sensing, timing and tripping circuits for
adjustable current, long-time pickup and long-time delay; ground-fault pickup and delay;
adjustable instantaneous pickup; short-time pickup and delay. Ground fault sensing shall be
integral with circuit breaker.
INSTRUMENTS AND SENSORS
A.
Ammeters: ANSI C39.1; indicating ammeters with 4.5 inch square recessed case and 250
degree scale, white dial with black figures and pointer, 5 ampere, 60 hertz movement, 1
percent accuracy.
B.
Voltmeters: ANSI C39.1 indicating voltmeter with 4.5 inch square recessed case and 250
degree scale, white dial with black figures and pointer, 120 volt, 60 hertz movement, 1
percent accuracy.
C.
Ammeter Transfer Switch: Rotary multistage snap-action type with 600 volt AC-DC silver
plated contacts, engraved escutcheon plate, oval type handle, and 4 positions including
OFF.
D.
Voltmeter Transfer Switch: Rotary multistage snap-action type with 600 volt AC-DC silver
plated contacts, engraved escutcheon plate, oval type handle, and 4 positions including
OFF.
E.
Current Transformers: ANSI C57.13; 5 ampere secondary, bar or window type, with single
secondary winding and secondary shorting device, primary/secondary ratio as [required]
[shown on Drawings], burden and accuracy consistent with connected metering and relay
devices, 60 Hertz.
F.
Potential Transformers: ANSI C57.13; 120 volt single secondary, disconnecting type with
integral fuse mountings, primary/secondary ratio as required, burden and accuracy
consistent with connected metering and relay devices, 60 hertz.
L.
Provide meter socket and metering transformer compartment . Provide bus spacing and
drilling, door, and locking and sealing provisions.
INSTRUMENTS AND SENSORS
A.
Meter: 3-phase digital meter/transducer.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
SECONDARY UNIT
SUBSTATION
26 11 16 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
2.8
2.9
1.
Functions: Volts (line-to-line, line-to-neutral, average); amperes (line-to neutral,
maximum demand); kilowatts (instantaneous and maximum demand).
2.
Panel mounted digital display.
3.
Suitable for use without external potential transformers.
Current Transformers: ANSI C57.13; 5 ampere secondary, bar or window type, with single
secondary winding and secondary shorting device, primary/secondary ratio as required,
burden and accuracy consistent with connected metering and relay devices, 60 Hertz.
FABRICATION
A.
Provide a 1 by 1/4 inch copper ground bus through the length of the switchboard.
B.
Align sections at front and rear.
C.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal
surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc.
D.
Mimic Bus: Indicate bussing, connections and devices in single line form on the front panels
of the switchboard using blue color factory painting fastened flat against the panel face with
screws or rivets.
E.
Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces indicated for future devices with bussing and bus
connections.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Surge Arrestors: Distribution class, rated 15 kV; mount in incoming line compartment.
B.
Incoming Cable Terminations: Clamp-type.
C.
Circuit Breaker Lifting Device: Carriage and track on top of each switchgear with lifting
device to serve draw-out circuit breakers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Provide 4-inch high concrete pad 2 inches wider and longer than substation, under the
provisions of Division 03 Concrete.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test circuit breakers to NETA ATS.
B.
Check tightness of bolted bus joints using a calibrated torque wrench.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
SECONDARY UNIT
SUBSTATION
26 11 16 - 5
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Adjust transformer taps to provide acceptable voltage at utilization equipment connected to
substation.
C.
Adjust trip units and protective relays to provide adequate overcurrent protection and
selective tripping with downstream protective devices in accordance with the Coordination
Study.
END OF SECTION 26 11 16
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
SECONDARY UNIT
SUBSTATION
26 11 16 - 6
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 24 13
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Main Service and Distribution Boards.
B.
Boards.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C39.1 – Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments.
B.
ANSI C57.13 – Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
C.
NEMA AB 1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
D.
NEMA PB 2 – Dead Front Distribution Switchboards.
E.
NEMA PB 2.1 – Instructions for Safe Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.4
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements:
1.
Shop Drawings: Include front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions
shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and
number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument
details. Include coordinated installation drawings if overall equipment dimensions
exceed those specified or shown in any respect.
2.
Product Data: Include electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip
ratings, withstand ratings, and full size time-current characteristic curves of all
equipment and components.
3.
Manufacturers' Instructions: Include installation instructions and recommendations for
field testing circuit breakers.
4.
Factory Test Reports: NEMA PB 2 Productions Tests.
Submit field test reports. Indicate tightness of bolted bus connections and manufacturer's
recommended values.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of applicable section of Division 01
– General Requirements.
B.
Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies;
and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.5
1.6
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
B.
Furnish products, which are the standard, cataloged products of a manufacturer
continuously engaged in producing equipment constructed with the same model components
proposed for use in this project.
C.
Furnish products for which the enclosure and major components are the products of a single
manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to the site under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
B.
Deliver in 48 inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection, and
mounted on shipping skids.
C.
Store and protect products under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
D.
Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
E.
Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only
with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal
components, enclosure, and finish.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Keys: Furnish 6 each to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
ITE Siemens.
B.
General Electric-Alternate: (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team
to make change. Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system
meets, does not meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to
schedule for change in vendor.)
C.
Square D-Alternate: (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team to
make change. Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system
meets, does not meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to
schedule for change in vendor.)
D.
Cutler Hammer-Alternate: (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team
to make change. Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system
meets, does not meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to
schedule for change in vendor.)
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
E.
2.2
2.3
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
DISTRIBUTION BOARD
A.
Description: NEMA PB 2 with electrical ratings and configurations as shown on Drawings.
B.
Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front and rear, suitable for the conductor
materials used.
C.
Main Section Devices: Individually mounted and compartmented.
D.
Distribution Section Devices: Individually mounted and compartmented.
E.
Combination Main and Distribution Section Devices: Panel mounted.
F.
Auxiliary Section Devices: Individually mounted and compartmented.
G.
Bus Material: Copper, full-size, non-telescoping.
H.
Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance.
I.
Bus Bracing: Minimum 50,000 amperes, rms, symmetrical.
J.
Fully insulate bus bars in accessible compartments.
K.
Ground Bus: Copper; extend entire length of the distribution board.
L.
Enclosure:
1.
NEMA PB 2 Type 1 – General Purpose. Sections shall align at front and rear.
2.
Height: 90 inches, excluding floor sills, lifting members and pull boxes.
3.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat
internal surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with
cadmium or zinc.
M.
Future Provisions: Fully equip full height of distribution sections for future devices with
bussing and bus connections, suitably insulated and braced for short circuit currents.
Continuous current rating as indicated on Drawings.
N.
Do not use circuit breaker mounting area of distribution section for mounting current
transformers.
SWITCHING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded Case Circuit Breaker:
1.
2.
Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1.
Trip Units, Non-Current Limiting.
3.
Trip Frame rating below 225 and lower: Thermal-magnetic, ambient compensated.
4.
Trip Frame rating 250 225 and greater: Solid state with electronic sensing, timing and
tripping circuits.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.4
A.
a.
Adjustable trip settings for main and branch devices long time current setting
and time delay, instantaneous pick-up, short time pick-up and time delay,
ground fault pick-up and time delay.
b.
Adjustable trip settings for devices on emergency system: Same as for normal
system except without ground fault pick-up and time delay.
5.
Zone interlocking: short time; ground fault.
6.
Trip indication targets.
B.
Field Changeable Trip Unit: Provide for circuit breakers with frame sizes 225 amperes and
greater.
C.
Interrupting Rating: Minimum 18,000 amperes symmetrical and not less than values shown.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Circuit Breaker Lifting Device: Carriage and track on top of each switchboard with lifting
device to serve draw-out circuit breakers in switchboard.Shunt Trip Device: 120 volts, AC.
B.
Handle Lock: Include provisions for padlocking.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install distribution board in locations shown on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing distribution
board.
C.
Identify distribution board and circuit breakers under provisions of Section 26 05 53.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test under provisions of Section 27 00 00E26 05 93.
B.
Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using a calibrated torque wrench. Tightness
shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended values.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
B.
Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
C.
Adjust protective device trip and time delay settings to values as indicated in the
Coordination Study.
END OF SECTION 26 24 13
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3-ADD 7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 13 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 24 19
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Manual motor starters.
B.
Magnetic motor starters.
C.
Combination magnetic motor starters.
REFERENCES
A.
NEMA ICS 2 – Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.
B.
NEMA ICS 6 – Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of applicable section of Division 01
– General Requirements.
B.
Provide product data on motor starters and combination motor starters, relays, pilot devices,
and switching and overcurrent protective devices.
C.
Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 –
General Requirements.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of applicable section of Division 01
– General Requirements.
B.
Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies;
and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
B.
Store and protect products under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
C.
Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 24 19 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
D.
Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for
the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to motor control center components,
enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – MOTOR STARTERS
A.
ITE Siemens
B.
Alternates; (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team to make change.
Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system meets, does not
meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to schedule for change in
vendor.)
MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
A.
Integral Horsepower Manual Motor Starter: AC, general-purpose, Class A, manually
operated, full-voltage controller for induction motors rated in horsepower, with overload relay,
NO and toggle operator.
B.
Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter: General-purpose, Class A, manually operated, fullvoltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit,
toggle operator.
C.
Voltage, rating and thermal element: as required by motor controlled.
D.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1, indoor dry locations; Type 3R, outdoors and damp
locations.
MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS
A.
Magnetic Motor Starters: AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction
motors rated in horsepower.
B.
Full Voltage Starting: Non-reversing type with overload relay.
C.
Reduced Voltage Starting: Electronic Type Reduced-voltage.
D.
Coil Operating Voltage: As required by control system for affected motors.
E.
Size: Size as shown on Drawings.
F.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 indoors; Type 3R outdoors.
G.
Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with motor circuit protector disconnect
in common enclosure. Provide current limiting where necessary to limit available short circuit
current to contactor withstand rating.
H.
Auxiliary Contacts: 2 normally open closed contacts in addition to seal-in contact.
I.
Pushbuttons: START/STOP RESET in front cover.
J.
Indicating Lights: RUN: green in front cover.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 24 19 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.4
K.
Selector Switches: HAND/OFF/AUTO in front cover.
L.
Relays: as required.
M.
Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, 60 VA minimum, in each separately
enclosed motor starter.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION AND DISCONNECTING MEANS
A.
2.5
Motor Circuit Protector: Circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in each
pole.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
A.
Square D.
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install separately mounted starters shown adjacent to equipment on galvanized steel frames.
END OF SECTION 26 24 19
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 24 19 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall Switches.
B.
Wall Dimmers.
C.
Receptacles.
D.
Device Plates
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.3
1.4
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Provide 6 of each style, size, and finish wall plate.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01- General Requirements
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WALL SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Arrow Hart 1990 Series.
Bryant 4900 Series.
General Electric GE 5900 Series.
Hubbell 1220 Series.
Pass and Seymour 20 ACI Series.
B.
Description: Specification grade, quiet type, AC only general-use snap switch.
C.
Device Body: Ivory plastic with rocker handle, red toggle when connected to standby power
source.
D.
Voltage Rating: 120-277 volts, AC.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
E.
2.2
Current Rating: 20 amperes.
WALL DIMMERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Lutron Nova T Series.
Prescolite Horizon Series.
Lightolier Neptune Series.
B.
Description: Solid state dimmer with preset for incandescent, low voltage or fluorescent
lamps, as indicated on Drawings.
C.
Device Body: White plastic with linear slide.
D.
Voltage: 120 volts.
E.
Power Rating: Match load shown on Drawings.
F.
Accessory Wall Switch: Match dimmer appearance.
G.
Three-way Switch: Match dimmer appearance.
RECEPTACLES
A.
Single Convenience Receptacle, Type 5-20R, Hospital Grade:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Duplex Convenience Receptacle, Type 5-20R, Hospital Grade:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Arrow Hart #8310.
Bryant #8310.
General Electric #GE 8310.
Hubbell #8310.
Leviton #8310.
Pass and Seymour #9301.
Arrow Hart #8300.
Bryant #8300.
General Electric #GE 8300.
Hubbell #8300.
Leviton #8300.
Pass and Seymour #9300.
GFCI Receptacle, Type 5-20R, Hospital Grade:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Arrow Hart #GF8300.
Bryant GFR83.
General Electric #GF 8300.
Hubbell #GF-8300.
Leviton #6898-HG.
Pass and Seymour #2091-SHG.
D.
Special Purpose Receptacle:
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
WIRING DEVICES
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
26 27 26 - 2
130-202 KMD
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
Arrow Hart.
Bryant.
General Electric.
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Pass and Seymour.
Configuration as shown on Drawings.
E.
Substitutions: Under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
F.
Device Body: Ivory plastic for normal use; red when connected to stand-by power source;
orange when used with isolated ground conductor; blue when used with UPS power.
WALL PLATES
A.
Decorative Cover Plate:
1.
2.
Stainless Steel.
Manufacturer: Same as wiring device.
B.
Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover. Provide
separately operable cover for each half of duplex receptacles.
C.
Provide plates for telephone data, television, and telephone outlets. Use same manufacturer
as wiring device plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install devices plumb, level, and rigidly in place.
C.
Install switches with OFF position down, 2 inches to 8 inches from trim on the strike side of
door.
D.
Install wall dimmers to achieve power rating required for load shown on drawings.
E.
Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
F.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottomtop.
G.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
H.
Install switched receptacles with top half switched.
I.H.
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. Use multigang plates for multiple devices.
J.I.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
K.J.
Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
L.K.
3.2
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above
accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 28 19
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Disconnect switches.
B.
Fuses.
C.
Enclosures.
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
1.4
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified or shown.
SPARE PARTS
A.
1.6
Submit corrected copies of submittal data under provisions of applicable section of Division
01 – General Requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
NEMA KS 1 – Enclosed Switches.
Provide 3 spare fuses of each size and type.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01-General Requirements.
B.
Product Data: Submit switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
ITE Siemens.
B.
General Electric-Alternate: (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team
to make change. Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system
meets, does not meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to
schedule for change in vendor.)
C.
Square D-Alternate: (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team to
make change. Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
26 28 19 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
meets, does not meet or exceeds specified.
schedule for change in vendor.)
2.2
2.3
2.4
Contractor shall also identify impacts to
D.
Cutler Hammer-Alternate: (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team
to make change. Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system
meets, does not meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to
schedule for change in vendor.)
E.
Substitutions: Under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
Fusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy duty, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed
knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with
switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: Designed to
accommodate Class R fuses.
B.
Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy duty, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter
enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front
cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C.
Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; As indicated on the drawings.
D.
Switch Ratings: Voltage and current ratings, number of poles as shown on plan or as
required by equipment or feeder controlled by switch. Provide solid neutral for switches
installed on a circuit including a neutral conductor.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – FUSES
A.
Buss.
B.
Economy.
C.
Shawmut.
D.
Substitutions: Under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
FUSES
A.
Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: UL Class RK with time delay when feeding circuit breakers or
panelboards; UL Class RK5 without time delay for service entrances and with time delay for
motor circuits.
B.
Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
C.
Provide fuses with voltage and current ratings suitable for equipment controlled. Where
current ratings are not shown on plans, provide fuses recommended by equipment
manufacturer(s).
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
26 28 19 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install disconnect switches shown mounted on walls at plus 4 feet-6 inches to centerline of
switch.
B.
Install disconnect switches shown on or adjacent to equipment on field-fabricated galvanized
steel frames conforming to Section 26 05 29.
C.
Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
END OF SECTION 26 28 19
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
26 28 19 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 28 23
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Enclosed circuit breakers.
REFERENCES
A.
NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation."
B.
NEMA AB 1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing ratings, trip units, time current curves,
dimensions, and enclosure details.
C.
Field Test Reports: Include description of testing, results, and corrective action taken.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
ITE Siemens.
B.
Alternate; (Provide separate cost including cost associated with A+E team to make change.
Contractor shall also identify paragraph by paragraph how their system meets, does not
meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall also identify impacts to schedule for change in
vendor.)
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
A.
2.3
Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1.
TRIP UNITS
A.
Non-current Limiting.
1.
Trip Frame rating less than 225 ampere and less: Thermal-magnetic, ambient
compensated.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
ENCLOSED
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 23 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
2.a.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.b.
h.c.
i.d.
e.
j.f.
B.
2.4
Trip Frame rating 250 225 ampere and greater: Solid state with electronic
sensing, timing and tripping circuits; mechanism for adjusting trip settings; trip
indication targets.
Long time current setting.
Instantaneous pick-up.
Ground fault pick-up and time delay.
Long time current setting.
Short time pick-up and time delay.
Ground fault pick-up and time delay.
Long time current setting and time delay.
Instantaneous pick-up.
Short time pick-up and time delay.
Ground fault pick-up and time delay.
Adjustable trip settings for devices on emergency system: Same as for normal
system except without ground fault pick-up and time delay.
Field-Changeable Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker: Provide circuit breakers with frame sizes
225 amperes and greater with changeable trip units.
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES
A.
Provide accessories as shown to NEMA AB 1.
B.
Shunt Trip Device: 120 volts, AC.
C.
Undervoltage Trip Device: 120 volts, AC.
D.
Auxiliary Switch: 120 volts, AC.
E.
Alarm Switch: 120 volts, AC.
F.
Electrical Operator: 120 volts, AC.
G.A. Handle Lock: Include provisions for padlocking.
H.B. Provide mechanical trip device.
2.5
I.C.
Provide insulated grounding lug in each enclosure.
J.D.
Provide Products suitable for use as service entrance equipment where so applied.
ENCLOSURE
A.
Enclosure: NEMA AB 1, Type as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Fabricate enclosure from steel.
C.
Finish using manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
ENCLOSED
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 23 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosed circuit breakers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05
29.
C.
Height: 5 feet (1.6 meters) to operating handle.
D.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 53.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test under provisions of Section 26 05 93.
B.
Inspect and test each circuit breaker to NEMA AB 1.
C.
Correct deficiencies discovered.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust trip settings under provisions of Section 26 05 93.
B.
Adjust trip settings in accordance with Protective Device Coordination Study.
END OF SECTION 26 28 23
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
ENCLOSED
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 23 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Lighting Fixtures.
B.
Ballasts.
C.
Lamps.
D.
Fixture Accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Product Data: Indicate dimensions, components, ratings, and performance data for each
lighting fixture.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list, instructions for maintaining luminaire, and
corrected copies of submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
California Energy Commission (CEC) P400-98-005 – Nonresidential Manual for Compliance
with the 1999 Energy Efficiency Standards.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
MATERIALS
A.
Furnish under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Provide 2 of each plastic lens.
C.
Provide 2 spare lamps of each type and wattage installed.
D.
Provide 2 of each ballast type.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
Furnish products as specified in Schedule and on Drawings. – Alternate; (Provide separate
cost including cost associated with A+E team to make change. Contractor shall also identify
paragraph by paragraph how their system meets, does not meet or exceeds specified.
Contractor shall also identify impacts to schedule for change in vendor.)
B.
Install ballasts and specified accessories at factory.
C.
Furnish fluorescent fixtures certified by the California Energy Commission as meeting
California minimum efficiency standards.
D.
Furnish fixtures complete with accessories, end caps, trim, plaster frames, yokes, hangers,
etc., required for specific installation.
E.
Furnish tandem wiring in accordance with regulatory requirements. Use pre-manufactured
cables of the same manufacture as affected luminaires. Use factory-installed connectors.
BALLASTS
A.
Fluorescent Ballast:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Dimming Ballast:
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.3
Universal.
Valmont.
Philips.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
Description: Class P, electronic.
Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified.
Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast
Manufacturers, Inc.
Program start ballast when use in conjunction with motion sensor.
Furnish dimming ballasts in specified luminaires.
Use ballast selected by dimming system manufacturer as suitable for operation with
control unit.
Lamps: Suitable for lamp type and quantity specified for luminaire.
Provide ballasts with maximum input watts, including lamps, not exceeding typical values
stated in CEC P400-98-005.
LAMPS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General Electric.
Osram.
Philips.
Sylvania.
Venture.
Substitutions: Under provisions of applicable section of Division 01.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
B.
2.4
Provide lamp type specified on drawings for luminaire.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Swivel Hangers: 45-degree swivel from plumb.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A.
3.2
Verify ceiling construction; coordinate with luminaire trim and accessories.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide
pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
C.
Support luminaires larger than 2 by 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing.
D.
Locate luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan and on architectural elevations.
E.
Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with
each other. Secure to prohibit movement.
F.
Suspended Grid Ceilings:
1.
Support surface and pendant mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building
structure.
2.
Support 2 by 4 foot and smaller recessed luminaires in grid ceiling by installing #12
(minimum) hanger at each corner of the affected ceiling grid. Provide 2 additional
hanger wires directly from the structure above to the fixture housing.
G.
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
H.
Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory
requirements for fire rating.
I.
Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
J.
Install wall mounted luminaires at height shown on Drawings.
K.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
L.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within luminaire.
M.
Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment-grounding conductor.
N.
Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
O.
Install poles plumb. Provide double nuts to adjust plumb. Grout around each base.
P.
Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole.
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 3
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
3.3
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Interface with air handling accessories furnished.
3.43.3 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust Work under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Aim and adjust luminaires as directed.
C.
Adjust exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
D.
Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
3.53.4 CLEANING
A.
Clean Work under Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
C.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
D.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
END OF SECTION 26 50 00
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 4
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Product Data: Indicate dimensions, components, ratings, and performance data for each
luminaire.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include instructions for maintaining luminaires and corrected copies of
submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Exterior luminaires and accessories.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under Division 01 – General
Requirements.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Provide 2 spare lamps of each type and wattage installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
LUMINAIRES
A.
Furnish products as specified on Drawings. – Alternate; (Provide separate cost including
cost associated with A+E team to make change. Contractor shall also identify paragraph by
paragraph how their system meets, does not meet or exceeds specified. Contractor shall
also identify impacts to schedule for change in vendor.)
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
LAMPS
A.
Manufacturers:
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 1
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
General Electric.
Osram.
Philips.
Sylvania.
Venture.
Substitutions: Under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General
Requirements.
Provide lamp type specified for luminaire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B.
Install bollards plumb.
B.C. Install poles plumb. Provide double nuts to adjust plumb. Grout around each base.
C.D. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D.E. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, and metal poles to branch circuit equipment-grounding
conductor.
3.2
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution as directed.
CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of applicable section of Division 01 – General Requirements.
B.
Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
C.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
D.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
END OF SECTION 26 56 00
11/20/12 INCREMENT #3–ADD #7
OSHPD BACKCHECK 2
130-202 KMD
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 2
SHARP GROSSMONT HOSP
DIAG & TRMT BLDG